Home

User Manual WCA330 & WCA380 3GHz & 8GHz Wireless

1. Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Symbol Specifies the symbol number on which the marker is positioned Ver Start Specifies the start symbol number on the vertical axis The default is the symbol 0 which contains the current data Options Y Axis Selects relative or absolute representation for the Y color axis Represents relative channel power to the total power along the Y axis Absolute Represents absolute channel power along the Y axis Selects the monochrome On or color Off display The default is the color display Number Colors Selects the number of display colors either 100 default or 10 Scale Marker Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Same as Scale in the Spectrogram view menu on page 2 73 Marker Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as the symbol O The delta marker is represented as and For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Hor Specifies the horizontal position to which you move By default O is positioned at the start point of the horizontal axis Ver Specifies the vertical position i e the symbol number to which you move O By default the marker is positioned at symbol 0 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Search Sear
2. 50 Q BNC connectors used to input the and Q signals directly C 98680 29999 09909 09090 Ti let 2883 Fess CNOA Te pees O50 papapa OOO E 25939 28399 UO LIEN 30898 03080 Expansion slot GPIB interface An IBM PC based expansion slot Note that Refer to the Programmer Manual addition or replacement of the board may be Mouse keyboard and LAN interface for GPIB controls conducted only by our service personnel When required contact your local Tektronix From the top a representatives m PC AT keyboard connector 6 pin mini DIN m PS 2 mouse connector 6 pin mini DIN m LAN Ethernet connector 10 100BASE T Refer to Appendix E for mouse and keyboard operation Refer to page 3 199 for LAN connection Figure 2 3 Rear panel map 2 4 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Interface Maps Display Screen Configuration Status display area Displays the status of system hardware Refer to page 2 7 for details of the information displayed Menu display area The analyzer can be operated using the front panel keys the general purpose knob and menus When you press a certain key on the front panel this area displays the menu You can operate the menu by pressing the associated side key located to the right of the menu Refer to page 2 11 for operating menus Refer to page 2 47 for menu item details Side keys In this manual the key
3. keypad PRINT ROLL BLOCK C L SETUP Set a reference level with the MAIN Freq Span Ref submenu J FREQ oe SPAN Ei REF Set a reference level gt ___ ENTRY a Eta 7 8 9 MHz s CONFIG IGO CI Coq CI Figure 3 5 SETUP keys for setting reference level Setting Range The setting range of reference level depends on the input frequency band Table 3 5 Reference level setting range Band Setting range Baseband 30 to 30 dBm 1 dB steps RF WCA330 RF1 2 WCA380 52 to 30 dBm 1 dB steps RF3 4 WCA380 IQ 50 to 30 dBm 1 dB steps 10 to 20 dBm 10 dB steps WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 13 Reference Level Overload When an overload occurs OVERLOAD turns red in the status display area on the screen Refer to Status Display on page 2 7 and Figure 3 6 for overload display indicator When the input signal level goes too high OVERLOAD turns red REMOTE UNCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE Status display area Figure 3 6 Overload indicator Changing the reference level actually changes the attenuator setting for the internal amplifier If you continue to operate the analyzer after an overload has occurred the internal DAC will not work for acquired signals resulting in a corrupt data display The OVERLOAD indicator is updated each time one physical frame is acquired Because of the in
4. Displayed on screen Figure 2 50 Setting the sync word parameters 2 110 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions GSMMask View Menu Table 2 29 summarizes the view menu shown when you select Power VSTime in the Measurement menu item of the GSM view menu refer to page 2 107 The GSMMask view displays the Power vs Time Pass Fail test according to the GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard For details on GSM analysis refer to page 3 151 Table 2 29 GSMMask menu table Top level Source Mask Mask Setup Options Rising Edge Falling Edge Full Scale Subordinate level options and descriptions Selects input data for a view You can select one of the following items D1 to D8 The default is D1 For the power vs time measurement in GSM the analyzer always writes waveform data in the D1 register Determines whether or not to execute the Power vs Time Pass Fail test using the specified mask For the GSM measurement the analyzer always turns Mask On This menu is for future use At present although you can create a mask with this menu the analyzer always uses the specified mask in the GSM standard regardless of your settings So this manual does not explain how to create a mask Same as Options in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 Expands the rising edge of the waveform horizontally on screen Expands the falling edge of the waveform horizontally on screen Sets the horiz
5. Delete File Deletes a file Create Dir Creates a new directory Delete Dir Deletes a directory WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 119 Menu Functions Print Menu Makes a hardcopy of the screen display with the PRINT key on the front panel For detail refer to Hardcopy on page 3 202 Table 2 37 Print menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Cancel Returns to the menu previously displayed Printer Selects a printer Print To Printer Performs a hardcopy Save To File Saves the hardcopy to a file BMP 2 120 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Changing the Power Up Settings If you want to start the analyzer with particular settings other than the factory default save the settings to the system file init cfg using the following steps 1 Set the analyzer to the power up condition as you desire 2 Press CONFIG MODE gt Config lt the top side key to display the Config menu 3 Press the side key Power On Save To INIT CFG in order The current settings are saved to the system file init cfg The analyzer will start with the settings saved in the system file init cfg from the next power on Restoring the When you return the power up settings to the factory default do the following Factory Default procedure 1 Press CONFIG MODE gt Config lt the top side key to display the Config menu 2 Press the side key Po
6. Min Searches for the minimum peak spectrum and moves the marker there This item is available when Format is other than FreqAmpl Separation Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks Same as Separation in the Waveform view menu on page 2 68 Ver Specifies the vertical position i e the frame number to which you move O By default the marker is positioned in frame 0 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Mkr gt Freq Sets the center frequency to the value at the current marker position This item is available when Format is FreqAmpl When you press this side key the Freq Span Ref Freq setting in the SETUP menu changes to the frequency at the current marker position Ver Mag Sets the number of vertical pixels to display one frame The range is 1 to 10 2 74 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Waterfall View Menu Table 2 11 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as Waterfall in the CONFIG VIEW menu Table 2 11 Waterfall view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Selects input data for a view Same as Source in the Spectrogram view menu on page 2 72 Format Defines the horizontal and vertical axes Same as Source in the Waveform view menu on page 2 63 Compression Selects a method of display data comp
7. Table 2 22 CodeWSpectrogram view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Time Slot Specifies the time slot number on which the marker is positioned Ver Start Specifies the start time slot number on the vertical axis The default is slot 0 which contains the latest data Symbol Rate Composite 16 It is set to Composite by default that corresponds to multi rate 32 64 128 256 When you select the other specific value the measurement is done with the fixed rate 512 1024 ksps Options Y Axis Selects relative or absolute representation for the Y color axis Relative Represents relative channel power to the total power along the Y axis Absolute Represents absolute channel power along the Y axis Monochrome Selects the monochrome On or color Off display The default is the color display Number Colors Selects the number of display colors 100 default or 10 Scale Marker Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Same as Scale in the Spectrogram view menu on page 2 73 Marker Operates the markers Refer to page 3 45 for how to use the markers Hor Inputs the horizontal position to move the O marker By default it is positioned at the start point on the horizontal axis Ver Inputs the slot number as the vertical position to move the marker By
8. 2 84 Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Same as Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Marker Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as the symbol O The delta marker is represented as and For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Hor Specifies the horizontal position to which you move the marker By default is positioned at the origin of the horizontal axis Spurious Places the marker on one of the spurious signals that have been detected This view detects eight spurious signals When you press the Spurious side key the Up and Down keys appear on the menu item Each time you press the Up arrow key the marker moves from a spurious position to the next stronger one Each time you press the Down arrow key the marker moves from a spurious position to the next weaker one This function is useful to examine the spurious position and intensity when you have set to something other than Spurious in the Measurement menu item Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there Peak Searches the peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Max Searches
9. Select Ordinary window in the Running size field F AD we FF YS BS Click OK The property setting window disappears The front panel interface will appear at the next startup and after If you have created a WCA330 or WCA380 shortcut also make the above setting To return to the initial condition no front panel interface display select Minimum window in step 8 above 1 Right click on the shortcut icon A menu appears Select Properties from the menu to open the property setting window 3 Click on the Shortcut tab in the property setting window 4 Select Ordinary window in the Running size field 5 Click OK The property setting window disappears The front panel interface will appear at the next startup and after To return to the initial condition no front panel interface display select Minimum window in step 4 above WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix E Mouse Operations Mouse Operations The mouse is available for the following operations WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Operating the front panel key Operating the side menu Selecting the CONFIG SETUP or VIEW menu Moving the marker or selecting a frame E 3 Appendix E Mouse Operations Operating the Front Panel The buttons in the front panel interface are associated with the front panel keys Key Itdoes not have the function associated with the general purpose knob however a similar function is implemented using the key pad arrow ke
10. Center 850MHz pan SOOkKHz Figure 3 44 Power measurement example 3 84 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement C N and C No Measurements The C N measurement measures the power proportion dB of carrier to noise The C No measurement measures the power proportion dB Hz of carrier to noise per frequency For the carrier signal measurement use the marker For the noise measurement use the band power marker For the band power marker operations refer to page 3 90 To measure C N or C No follow this procedure 1 Display the spectrum in the Waveform view or 3gppACPView for the 3GPP standard Select the following from the view menu For the C N measurement Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement C N For the C No measurement Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement C No Move the marker to the measurement point Use the marker search function as appropriate Use the band power marker to select a noise frequency region Read the measured value displayed at the top left corner on the view When necessary press the ROLL or BLOCK key to acquire the signal while measuring C N or C No Figure 3 45 shows C N and C No measurement examples View C Active Freqampl 97 07 25 15 24 05 View D Active Freqampl 97 07 25 15 24 05 Marker 850 007 812 5MHz 19 23dBm o N 45 184dE aBm Marker 850 007 812 5MHz 19 23dBm No measureme
11. For the relationship between modes and spans refer to Table 3 3 on page 3 7 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 3 Input and Memory Modes Selecting the IF Mode 3 4 Analog and FFT processing of input signals depends on the Intermediate Frequency IF mode You can select one of the three IF modes by using SETUP MAIN gt IF Mode Table 3 2 IF modes IF band IF mode _ width Normal 10 MHz Feature Application High degree of General measurement phase flatness Digital modulation analysis HiRes 6 MHz Wide dynamic range ACP measurement Spurious measurement Wide 32 MHz Wide IF bandwidth Modulation analysis of wide bandwidth signals W CDMA analysis Normal Mode This mode has an IF bandwidth of 10MHz and features a high degree of phase flatness It is suitable for digital modulation analysis with a span below 6 MHz or general measurement that does not require a wide dynamic range FFT in this mode is faster than the HiRes mode because it is performed by hardware When the memory mode is set to Dual or Zoom you can select software processing FFT You can specify the Normal mode when the input frequency band is set to Baseband or RF for WCA330 RF1 to 4 for WCA380 HiRes Mode This mode has a relatively narrow IF bandwidth of 6 MHz but has the widest dynamic range It is suitable for ACP and spurious measurement FFT is slow because it is always performed by software You can specify the HiRes mo
12. Mode to select a trigger mode There are several trigger modes Auto When you press the BLOCK key the analyzer acquires and displays one block of data When you press the BLOCK key again it stops acquisition see Figure 4 31 Data is written into the same memory block repeatedly Data acquisition Data Data Display acquisition Display acquisition Display ry gt Time For the Auto mode the point at which you press the BLOCK key For the Normal mode the point at which the trigger occurs after you press the BLOCK key Figure 3 32 Acquiring and displaying data in the Auto and Normal modes When you press the BLOCK key with Trigger Count set to On the analyzer repeats data acquisition and display the number of times specified by Times Normal When you press the BLOCK key the analyzer waits for trigger generation and acquires the specified number of frames after the trigger occurs With Trigger Count set to On the analyzer repeats data acquisition the number of times specified by Times When you create a trigger mask pattern on the Waveform view if you press the Draw Max Draw Line Draw Min or Draw Horizontal side key in the Edit submenu the trigger mode is automatically set to Normal WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Trigger Delayed Same as Normal except that the analyzer completes data acquisition at the specified time after trigger generation The delayed time is
13. Standard Accessories Optional Accessories Appendix B Specifications Electrical Characteristics Physical Characteristics Environmental Characteristics Appendix D Frequency and Time Resolution Appendix E Mouse Operations Displaying the Front Panel Interface Mouse Operations 005 Operations with Keyboard Caution in Turning Off the Power Appendix F Inspection and Cleaning Inspection and Cleaning Procedures WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Loading the Data 000 Attaching a Cable 0 Network Setting 00 Sharing Resources 0 000 Lee e REN EROT INA RORE TERRE A 1 Jib hid edd oboe a e A 1 bbb eh ede ee be whee A 2 igh Cae ede tbe adie es A 2 a E A E a E E ee B 1 PERE EET opis due als Bok Dotan E an a nates biaa B 2 sods iiu Ge Fats io does dee S Gis hae ard Waka tee Redes B 12 aieia dele deg Selb tag Gee DERS EEEE EREE B 12 Appendix C Default Settings Restoring Default Settings O mm ET EPP EE POP He COWNKS Table of Contents List of Figures vi Figure 1 1 WCA330 WCA380 wireless communication analyzer 1 1 Figure 1 2 Signal processing system block diagram 1 4 Figure 1 3 AC inlet on the rear panel 02 e cece eens 1 10 Figure 1 4 Mouse connector location rear panel 1 11 Figure 1 5 Principal power switch on the rear panel 1 12 Figure 1 6 Power swit
14. 3 4 7 shift 11 114 shit 01 1 4 x shift 00 1 4 xe shift ee 1 4 x shift 00 Shift starts from this point gt Figure 3 57 1 4 t QPSK constellation display example and error vector In each of these three display formats the following error information is commonly shown m Mag error RMS Root mean square of the amplitude error m Phase error deg Root mean square of the phase error m EVM RMS Root mean square of the EVM Error Vector Magnitude m Rho meter WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 107 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal The Rho Q meter indicates the waveform distortion It is represented with the following equation M DRZ k 1 2 i 2 SIRI gt Zl k 1 k 1 2 p Rho Where Rg is the ideal IQ signal point data represented by the complex number and the Z is the measurement IQ signal point data represented by the complex number 3 108 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual U ee Analyzing an FSK Digital Modulated Signal Setting WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual The analyzer can demodulate and display an FSK Frequency Shift Keying signal using the FSK view This section describes the setting and display of the FSK view Select the Dual or Zoom memory mode to provide the time domain data required to observe an FSK modulated signal 1 2 Press the CONFIG MODE key Press Dual Zoom or Digital Demod side key to s
15. Lower or right arrow allows you to select the menu item placed just below the currently selected item Back Space Deleting an item Deletes one character positioned just before the caret Delete Deleting anitem Deletes one character positioned just after the caret ESC Clears text in the input field ENTER Establishes the value in the input field to the analyzer K and k keys Both keys represent k 10 Be sure to press the ENTER key after the K or k M and m keys Numeric input Represent M 10 6 and m 107 respectively Be sure to press the ENTER key after the M or m 3 196 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Using Windows 98 Accessing Windows 98 When you attach a mouse and a keyboard and power on the analyzer a pointer appears on the screen You can start a Windows 98 application or switch to a Windows 98 desktop screen if necessary Starting Windows When you use a mouse to move the pointer to the bottom of the screen the Applications task bar appears The task bar shows Start and the name of the analyzer application e g WCA380 Following the Windows 98 operating procedure access a Windows application from Start View A Active Freq amp mpl Config lt Moc le Load From File CF6 Save To File CF6 Spectrum Spectrogram JEN S 4 Accessibility National Instruments NI 488 2 L Communications Programs
16. Now the analog signal can be demodulated and displayed on screen 3 95 Analyzing An Analog Modulated Signal Display The horizontal axis represents the time in all AM PM and FM demodulation displays By default the time duration matches the frame length see Table 3 9 on page 3 29 The vertical axis represents the modulation factor in AM modulation display the phase in PM demodulation display and the frequency in FM demodulation display Figure 3 51 shows three display examples In certain conditions the Analog view cannot finely display the whole waveform when the default scale settings are used In this case use the auto scale function refer to page 3 36 View D Active AM 97 02 09 5 50 06 Marker 0s 5 581 Start 0s AM signal demodulation display example View D Active PM 97 02 09 5 46 52 Marker 0s 49 60ideg Start Os PM signal demodulation display example View D Active FM 97 02 09 5 51 39 Marker 0s 7 763kHz Figure 3 51 Display examples of analog signal demodulation 3 96 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual SSS ES eee Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal There are several ways to analyze a digitally modulated signal WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Vector or constellation display in the Polar view the CDMAPolar view for the IS 95 and T 53 standards the codePolar view for the cdmaOne standard the codeWPolar view for the W CDMA s
17. Used to display the UTILITY submenu Na Figure 2 9 CONFIG menu keys Figure 2 10 shows the SETUP menu keys The top level of the SETUP menu is displayed by pressing the MAIN key When you press one of the lower three keys the particular submenu of the SETUP menu is displayed The three lower keys are shortcut keys to the submenus Refer to SETUP Standard Menu on page 2 54 SETUP CDMA Menu on page 2 59 and SETUP 3gppACP Menu on page 2 61 for the menu details T Ami d SETUP MAIN Used to display top level of the SETUP menu FREQ lt When you press this key the SETUP Freq Span Ref submenu appears and you can input a numeric value in the Freq menu SPAN When you press this key the SETUP Freq Span Ref submenu appears and you can use the Span menu item for selection REF When you press this key the SETUP Freq Span Ref submenu appears and you can input a numeric value in the Ref menu item Figure 2 10 SETUP menu keys WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Operations VIEW The view is an area to display waveform and measurement results The analyzer can display up to four views named A to D at the same time The VIEW menu allows you to make settings for each associated view To display the VIEW menu select the view using the A to D key See Figure 2 11 VIEW B Cc D l im Used to select a particular view MKR SRCH lt Used to displa
18. gt On Right 1 425 ms Options gt Mask Off Right 1 431 ms Options gt Mask Off Level 20 dB Options gt Mask gt On Level 3 dB Options gt Num Averages 100 Options Position 0 Spectrogram Five Fegan 0 Marker Ver Start 0 Options Scale Hor Scale 0 Options Scale Hor Start 0 Options Scale Ver Scale 1 Options Scale Ver Start 0 Options Scale Color Scale 20 Options Scale Color Start 0 COMAP Oa Aive 0 COWA_OGPSK 12288 V RootRaisedain Raised Cosine Manual Setup Alpha BT 0 2 Measurement Format Constellation Marker 0 Options Measurement Destination D5D6 D708 Options Position 45 EVM Format EVM Options Scale Hor Scale 1 Options Scale Hor Start 0 Options Scale gt Ver Scale 100 Options Scale Ver Start 0 1 These items are not reset when you set the basic configuration WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual C 5 Appendix C Default Settings Table C 3 Default settings for the 3GPP configuration Menu item SCP Down Link RST CONFIG 3gppACP Standard 3gppACPView Waveform None sgppSpectogram None 3gppPolar View D None 3gppPower SETUP Band RF RF1 RF RF1 J IF Mode HiRes Wide J Memory Mode Dual Zoom Input Coupling AC AC FFT Type SW SW FFT Window Blackman Blackman FFT Points 1024 1024 Freq 1 5 G
19. 1024 points All modes 1 to 16 000 frames Frequency mode 256 points 1 to 4 000 frames Frequency mode 1024 points 1 to 2 000 frames Dual or Zoom mode 14 bits 25 6 Msps 12 bits 40 96 Msps x 2 for I Q each signal 5 MHz 30 MHz Wide IF mode IQ 10 MHz Baseband 6 MHz Normal IF mode 5 MHz HiRes IF mode WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual B 5 Appendix B Specifications Table B 8 Sampling rate Characteristic Description Sampling rate Baseband Normal and Hires IF modes 10 MHz span Baseband 12 8 Msps 6 MHz span Normal IF mode RF 12 8 Msps 5 MHz span 6 4 Msps 2 MHz span 3 2 Msps 1 MHz span 1 6 Msps 500 kHz span 800 ksps 200 kHz span 320 ksps 100 kHz span 160 ksps 50 kHz span 80 ksps 20 kHz span 32 ksps 10 kHz span 16 ksps 5 kHz span 8 ksps 2 kHz span 3 2 ksps 1 kHz span 1 6 ksps 500 Hz span 800 sps 200 Hz span 320 sps 100 Hz span 160 sps Sampling rate Wide IF mode IQ 20 M to 30 MHz span 40 96 Msps 10 MHz span 20 48 Msps B 6 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 9 Frame update time Characteristic Description Minimum frame update time Frequency mode 10 MHz span Baseband 20 us 256 points 80 us 1024 points 500 k to 6 MHz span 20 us 256 points 80 us 1024 points 50 k to 200 kHz span 200 us 256 1024 points 5 k to 20 kHz span 2000 us 256 1024 p
20. 3 61 process 3 58 using the utility menu 3 59 Average Util C menu table 2 118 Backing up user files 1 18 Band selection 3 2 setting 3 6 Band power marker operation 3 90 Basband mode description 3 3 Base line trigger mask pattern 3 79 Bin description 3 41 Block mode description 3 21 Block size setting 3 22 Buffering the input value 3 11 C C N power measurement 3 85 C No power measurement 3 85 Calibration 1 19 IQ offset 1 21 self gain calibration 1 20 wide IQ balance 1 21 wide IQ full calibration 1 22 CCDF analysis 3 165 CCDF menu table 2 112 CCDFView menu table 2 114 2 115 CDMA analysis 3 111 modulation precision 3 112 spurious 3 116 time characteristics 3 122 waveform quality 3 112 cdmaOne analysis 3 127 CDMAPolar view menu table 2 86 CDMATime view menu table 2 88 CDMAWaveform view menu table 2 83 Center frequency setting with the search function 3 56 Changing display frames 3 38 Changing the power up settings 2 121 Characteristics check 1 25 electrical B 2 Environmental B 12 Physical B 12 Index 1 Index Cleaning F 1 Clock in out connectors rear panel 2 4 Code domain power measurement 3GPP 3 145 cdmaOne 3 129 W CDMA 3 137 CodePolar view menu table 2 92 CodePower view menu table 2 93 CodeSpectrogram view menu table 2 90 CodeWPolar view menu table 2 97 CodeWPower view menu table
21. Auto Normal Quick Delayed Interval Quick interval Timeout Hires IF mode Span lt 5 MHz Baseband Wide IF mode IQ Auto Normal Trigger source Internal Level comparator External TTL Internal trigger comparator data source Frequency amplitude Time amplitude External trigger threshold level 1 6V Pre post trigger setting Trigger position is settable within 0 to 100 of total data length Frequency event trigger Mask resolution 1 bin Level range 0 dBfs to 70 dBfs Time Event Trigger Mask resolution 1 sample point Level range 0 dBfs to 40 dBfs External synchronization timing uncertainty 50 ns 20 30 MHz span of Wide IF mode 100 ns 10 MHz span of Wide IF mode WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual B 9 Appendix B Specifications Table B 14 Display Characteristic Description Display format Waveform Frequency vs Amplitude Phase Frequency vs I Q voltage Time vs Amplitude Phase Time vs I Q voltage Spectrogram Time vs Frequency vs Amplitude Phase Waterfall Time vs Frequency vs Amplitude Phase Time vs Frequency vs 1 Q voltage Time vs Amplitude Phase Multi frame Time vs Q voltage Multi frame AM demodulation Time vs Modulation depth FM demodulation Time vs Frequency deviation PM demodulation Time vs Phase deviation FSK Demodulation Time vs Frequency deviation Polar Vector diagram Constellation diagram Eye pattern eye pattern Q eye pattern Trellis Symbol table Binary Octal
22. Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figure 2 42 Figure 2 43 Figure 2 44 Figure 2 45 Figure 2 46 Figure 2 47 Figure 2 48 Figure 2 49 Figure 2 50 Figure 3 1 Signal process flow Figure 3 2 Usage of data memory Figure 3 3 SETUP keys for setting the frequency and span CONFIG VIEW key and its submenu Selecting the Waterfall view cceceeeees Making changes to View D c cece eeeeee Four view display layout VIEW keys view control keys View B display 1 view display Averaging and compared waveform display Signal acquisition in the Zoom mode Example of zooming Moving the markers by peak search Measurement example using the delta markers Signal process and display blocks Frame Relative On and Off Separation setting Setting Mask Percent for the EVM calculation Setting the receive filter with the ACP submenu Setting the sync word parameters Figure 3 4 Relationship between the frequency and span settings Figure 3 5 SETUP keys for setting reference level WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 12 3 13 vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 6 Overload indicator cece eee eee cree eeee Figure 3 7 Window process of time domain data Figure 3 8 Roll mode and Block mode eeeeeeeee Figure 3 9 Relationship between the block size and fra
23. Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Figure 3 101 Figure 3 102 Figure 3 103 Figure 3 104 Figure 3 105 Figure 3 106 Figure 3 107 Figure 3 108 Figure 3 109 Analyzing a transient signal ceeceeeees 3 141 Code domain power spectrogram 6 3 147 Symbol constellation 0 ccc cece cee e eens 3 147 Code domain power ce cec ec ececeeeeees 3 148 Symbol power 0 0 2 c00 cece ewe cee eeenceeneeaee 3 148 3GPP ACP measurement example 3 150 Slot data structure 0 cece cece cee ee wees 3 152 Modulation accuracy measurement 06 3 155 Output power measurement ee eee 3 156 Power vs Time measurement 0eeeeeee 3 157 Spectrum MOD measurement 000 3 159 Spectrum SW measurement 0ceeeeee 3 161 Entering a sync word in the GSMPolar view 3 163 CCDF calculation process eee e eee eees 3 166 CCDF measurement View G eccceccceces 3 168 CCDF View display View H eeeeeeee 3 168 Auto save views in two modes View C and D 3 171 Automatic data storage in the Roll mode 3 172 Side keys to display the file access men
24. Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame GSM view Pass Fail test result 3 159 GSM Analysis Spectrum SW 1 Select Spectrum SW with the Measurement side key in the GSM view Measurement menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 2 Press the Burst Count side key and set the number of bursts to acquire 3 Press the Measure side key to start acquiring data The analyzer acquires bursts by the number specified with Burst Count peak holding the spectrum View A displays the spectrogram for the acquired data View B shows the peak held spectrum with the specified line in the GSM standard View C displays the vector diagram for the burst that was acquired first to obtain the carrier frequency and burst on level Pass Fail is shown in View D See Figure 3 86 If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key NOTE If no GSM burst is found the specified line is not displayed 4 Press the Analyze side key to analyze the data acquired on the memory The analyzer displays the measurement result and waveform as in step 3 If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 3 160 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis Spectrogram view Specified li in GSM GSMPolar view Freq Err 30 896Hz Origin Offset 51 5320B Waveform view Figure 3 86 Spectrum SW measurement
25. OSym 1 001 137 55deq at marker position 1 5 Freq Err from the left Origin Offset 99 999dB Origin offset Symbol number displayed by turning Amplitude Symbol Constellation on Phase ej Amplitude scale 216 559mV Unit View C 3gppPolar view Figure 3 77 Symbol constellation WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 147 3GPP Analysis Measurement values at marker position View D CodeWPower view with X Axis set to ShortCode Code domain power View D Polar Marker Sch 1i5k 2ch Bp dF Channel number 4 647d0B Symbol rate and channel number at that rate _ i start Och Figure 3 78 Code domain power Measurement values at marker position View D CodeWPower view with X Axis set to Symbol Symbol number Symbol power View D Polar Marker Sch 1i5k 2ch a ap Channel number III N Symbol rate and channel number at that rate Ssym 4 694qAB Figure 3 79 Symbol power 3 148 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3GPP Analysis 3GPP ACP Measurement Use the 3gppACPView menu to measure ACP Adjacent Channel Leakage Power according to the 3GPP standard Restrictions There are some restrictions on the 3GPP ACP measurement The data stored in the data file IQ AP is not available The displayed data can be stored in the text format Data is always acquired in the D5 register Usually use the default DS register as the view data source
26. RF1 for WCA380 Wide IF 53 dB RF2 3 4 Wide IF WCA380 only Alias suppression 65 dB Baseband 60 dB IQ B 4 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 6 Spurious response Typical Cont Characteristic Description Residual response without signal span lt 5 MHz RBW 30 kHz averaged 73 dBfs or 93 dBm whichever greater Normal HiRes IF 73 dBfs or 93 dBm whichever greater Baseband gt 1 MHz Wide IF mode without signal RBW 100kHZz averaged 55 dBfs or 85 dBm whichever greater Within 10 minutes and 5 C from acquisition start Spurious response Signal at center 2 MHz span averaged Normal and HiRes IF mode 70 dBc or 75 dBfs whichever greater Offset gt 400 kHz 65 dBc or 70 dBfs whichever greater 50 kHz lt offset lt 400 kHz Signal at center 10 MHz span averaged Wide IF mode 60 dBc or 65 dBfs whichever greater Offset gt 400 kHz Sideband spurious due to I Q imbalance averaged 55 dBc Wide IF mode 60 dBc Wide IF mode within 1 hour and 5 C from self IQ balance calibration Table B 7 Acquisition Characteristic Acquisition mode Acquisition memory size Memory configuration mode Data samples in one frame Block size A D Converter Baseband Normal IF Hires IF Wide IF IQ Real Time Span Vector Span Description Roll Block 16 Mbytes Frequency Dual Zoom 256 points Frequency mode only
27. Search Searches for the peak spectrum and places the 1 marker there Same as Search in the Spectrogram view on page 2 74 Height Sets the vertical amplitude full scale of one frame in pixel for displaying The range is 1 to 100 pixels Gap Specifies the interval between adjacent waveforms on screen The range is 1 to 100 pixels WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 75 Menu Functions Polar View Menu Table 2 12 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as Polar in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 Table 2 12 Polar view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Specifies the source data for the view Specifies no input source The display area in the view is empty None Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Specifies the zoomed data for an input source When you use the Zoom mode select this For zoom refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 and Zoom on page 3 51 File 1Q Specifies the IQ formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Frame Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written Standard Configures the analyzer according to the standard digital modulating system settings Configures the analyzer according to NADC North
28. See Figure 1 13 Press the C side key in the VIEW area wa PF p NM Press the Wide IQ Full Cal side key Calibration runs It takes several minutes to complete the process Mode config lt Demod Digital Calibration Diag PLE 1 22 SETUP MA VIEW area FREQ C key SPAN Calibration side key REF CONFIG area CONFIG MODE MODE key a SETUP VIEW Diag side key UTILITY EXT TRIG RF INPUT lt PF INPUT N type connector TTL 50 9 max 30dBm Figure 1 13 Running calibration and diagnostics WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Calibration and Diagnostics Diagnostics Running the Diagnostics You can run the internal diagnostic program to check hardware states Table 1 1 shows test items and their descriptions Table 1 1 Internal diagnostic program Item Input band Description Memory Check that data is written and read to from the RAMs correctly Level Check that levels are measured correctly Overload Check that overload is indicated correctly Freq Shift Baseband Check that frequencies are measured correctly T Domain Check that data is continuous in the time domain F Domain Check that there is no abnormal spurious RF Level Check that levels are measu
29. View A Active Freq mpl 200 04 07 11 10 49 View C Active 1 4PI_QPSK M asurement 2000 04 07 11 Setup lt Marker OHz 95 159dBm Marker 0 0285ym 1 029 0 52 deg Standard 1 5 Freq Span Ref Br Freq Hz 800m tl Atal ANA Y ilu vf h i Span Hz TEH l div f i Ei ALA ah i sig kay i HH TOTI iii FEP PN Ref dBm 100 HR IE i hi i i S arm fd HAMEL Ny Scale pooo Center SOOMHz Span 100kHz i 914 View B Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 11 10 49 View D Measurement I Marker OHz 95 159dBm Oframe Os Marker Os 0 02 303 1 5 Max Span frame o dBm Manual Mixer RFAtt Mixer Level dBm Nominal 100 aBm 1 5 frame L More Center SOOMHz Span 100kHz Start Os SceMe 47 619 047 619us div Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS Rij tt 200B Mixer 25dBm Freq 800MHz RF1 Normal AC Dual HU 1024 Bl ckman 400u 5 4m 200 Auto On 1 Spectrogram display Eye diagram Spectrogram view EyeDiagram view Figure 2 33 Views resulting from changes to the frequency and span settings WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial View Definitions and Layout Checking the View Definitions In this section you learn how to define a view or a window used to display waveform and results of measurement The view is a window used to display waveform and results of measurement This system allows you to define up to eight A to H vi
30. View B Polar View D Polar Marker Och 7 946dB 25 1 44ms Marker Och 7 946daB 101 0 dB al dB div HE ah i M ii hibah ut Nal ea j aB LLL Start Och Stop 63ch o 100 fai AN i Figure 3 70 Analyzing a transient signal WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 133 cdmaOne Analysis 3 134 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual _ Ss W CDMA Analysis This chapter describes the W CDMA Wideband CDMA analysis functions The following topics are discussed in this chapter m About the W CDMA analysis m Operating examples m Standard code domain power measurement m Code domain power measurement for continuous slots About W CDMA Analysis The analyzer processes the W CDMA down link signals specified in Specifica tions for W CDMA Mobile Communication System Experiment Version 1 1 1998 3 NTT Mobile Communications Network Inc The analyzer covers the W CDMA parameters listed in Table 3 16 Table 3 16 W CDMA parameters Item Chip rate Symbol rate Description 4 096 Mcps 8 192 Mcps 16 384 Mcps 16 ksps 32 ksps 64 ksps 128 ksps 256 ksps 512 ksps 1024 ksps Number of channels maximum 256 4 096 Mcps 512 8 192 Mcps 1024 16 384 Mcps Frame structure Long code Short code Time slot 625 us 18 bit Gold code using M sequence obtained from the generator polynomial Hierarchical orthogonal code sequence specified with the combination of the chip rate an
31. a Press CONFIG VIEW View C and select Waveform b Press VIEW C gt VIEW MAIN gt Source and select Zoom 5 Press the BLOCK key to start the data acquisition After one block of data has been captured the acquisition is completed and View A displays the spectrum 6 Run the zoom a Press SETUP MAIN gt Zoom b Press the FFT Type side key to select the FFT type For the FFT type refer to page 3 16 c Press the FFT Window side key to select the FFT window For the FFT window refer to page 3 17 d Press the Frequency side key to input the center frequency after zooming e Select the Mag side key to select the expansion factor The span equals Unzoomed span expansion factor f Zoom by pressing the Execute side key 3 54 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Zoom Now the enlarged spectrum is displayed in View C If necessary repeat step 6 while changing the center frequency and expansion factor In Figure 3 28 View A displays the original spectrum of the signal acquired in the Zoom mode View C displays the spectrum resulting from the zoom process In this example the signal acquired with a center frequency of 800 MHz and a span of 100 kHz enlarges by a factor of 100 around a center frequency of about 800 MHz Before zooming After zooming N View A Active Freq mpl 200i 7 04 07 11 14 59 View C Zoom Freq mpl 2000 14 07 11 Setup lt Marker 800 000 312 SMHz 21 38dBm Marker SO
32. dB indicates the power proportion of the high frequency adjacent channel signal to the carrier signal WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement 5 When necessary press the ROLL or BLOCK key to acquire the signal while measuring the ACP Figure 3 46 shows an ACP measurement example Band power marker View A Active Freq amp mpl ao 15 33 54 Marker 850MHz 27 918dBm ACP measurement result ACP Upper Center 850MHz Figure 3 46 ACP measurement example WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 87 Power Measurement OBW Measurement 3 88 The OBW Occupied Bandwidth measurement obtains the frequency bandwidth so that the power proportion of the carrier signal to the entire power of the span frequency region equals the specified proportion In this measurement you can input only the proportion Pr although it displays the band power markers To measure OBW follow this procedure 1 Display the spectrum in the Waveform view or 3gppACPView for the 3GPP standard From the view menu select Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement OBW Press the OBW side key and input the desired proportion Pr A band power marker is displayed in the view Its center indicates the current center frequency of the instrument When necessary change the input value in step 3 Read the measured value displayed at the top left corner on the view When necessary press the ROLL or BLOCK
33. filter shape factor Filter BW sets the bandwidth gt Frequency Figure 2 49 Setting the receive filter with the ACP submenu 2 102 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions 3gppSpectrogram View Menu 3gppSpectrogram view menu is the one when you have defined the view as 3gppSpectrogram in the CONFIG VIEW menu According to the 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project standard this view displays each channel power measured for each slot in color with channel along the horizontal axis and slot time along the vertical axis The menu is the same as the CodeWSpectrogram view menu on page 2 95 For detail on the 3GPP analysis refer to page 3 143 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 103 Menu Functions 3gppPolar View Menu Table 2 12 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as 3gppPolar in the CONFIG VIEW menu This view displays IQ loci and chip positions according to the 3GPP standard For detail on 3GPP analysis refer to page 3 143 Table 2 26 3gppPolar view menu table Top level Source Analysis Time Slot Standard Manual Setup Subordinate level options and descriptions Specifies the source data for the view Same as Source in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 Specifies the number of the time slot to display the IQ locus The default is slot 0 which contains the latest data Configures the analyzer according to the standard digital modulating system se
34. gt Spectrum Spectrogram CONFIG area VIEW pel UTILITY ENTER dBm Zoom EXT TRIG RF INPUT More ACCA Ge TTL 509 max 30dBm Figure 2 22 CONFIG MODE key and the menu 2 Press the Spectrum side key This key selects measurement of the spectrum with a default span of 3 GHz and a center frequency of 1 5 GHz The display in Figure 2 21 is unchanged because the initial screen defaults to the Spectrum WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 23 Tutorial Starting and Stopping Measurement Roll Mode 2 24 The Roll mode acquires data continuously and simultaneously displays current measurements of the displayed signal 1 Press the ROLL key on the front panel See Figure 2 23 of ee Sw ROLL key n LOCAL Co pm START STOP PRINT ROLL BLOCK C3 C3 SETUP VIEW MAIN A B c D mom Figure 2 23 Control of the start and stop of measurement Figure 2 24 shows an example of the spectrum display View A Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 10 57 22 Config lt Marker OHz 3 617dBm dBm Load From File CEG Save To File CFG Spectrum Spectrum Spectrogram Dil Center 1 5GHz Freq 1 5GHz Span 3GHz Ref 0dBm VECTOR EANLESS RFAtt 20d0B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Freq HW 1024 Blackma
35. the source is specified with Source in the 3gppACPView menu Basic Procedure The following is the basic procedure for measuring ACP under 3GPP 1 2 A wu e amp Press CONFIG MODE More 3GPP Press the ACP side key to configure the analyzer for the 3GPP ACP measurement View A is defined as 3gppACP View For details on the 3gppACPView menu refer to page 2 100 Press VIEW A to display 3gppACPView Press the ROLL key to start data acquisition When you turn on the receive filter press the Filter side key to select On If necessary set the band power marker and receive filter parameters by pressing VIEW A gt VIEW MKR gt ACP For the band power marker operations refer to page 3 90 Displayed data can be stored in the text format with the following steps m Press VIEW MAIN gt Options Copy To Text File and specify the file When you retrieve the data from the file do the following steps m Press VIEW MAIN gt Options Copy From Text File and specify the file Figure 3 80 is an example of the 3GPP ACP measurement WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 149 3GPP Analysis Band power marker REMOTE UNCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE _ eS EEE View A Average RMSExpo 10 10 Setup lt Marker OHz 86 52dBm 3gppAce or Freq Span Ref Measurement results gt Carrier Width Mixer RFAtt Mixer Level Span 15MHz Fre
36. 0s View C frame Polar frame 5 is Options Center SOOMHz i Span 100kH Freq 800MHz Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFatt 20dB Mixer 25dBm RF1i Normal AC Dual HW 1024 Blackman 400u 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Waterfall view Figure 2 36 Making changes to View D WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 35 Tutorial View Layout The views are placed in predefined positions on the display screen At present they are placed in the two by two layout as shown in Figure 2 37 If a view is not defined the area is empty YY ONU View A or E View C or G Uj area display area Y T YS BorF View DorH Y a YYW Figure 2 37 Four view display layout 3 Modify the View B display layout a Press the E key in the VIEW area see Figure 2 38 b Press the B key in the VIEW area see Figure 2 38 View B is displayed fully on the screen See Figure 2 39 VIEW B C D a VIEW area View selection keys MKR SRCH E View layout selection keys Figure 2 38 VIEW keys view control keys 2 36 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial MOR WERUUAD TRIGDERED PAUSE View B Spectrogram View B Active Freq mpl 2000 04 07 11 10 49 Marker OHz 93 996dBm Oframe Os Source Active Format Freq mpl Frame frame o Ver St
37. 108 H Hardcopy to a file 3 205 to a printer 3 202 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Header frame 3 189 HiRes mode description 3 4 T Q input connectors rear panel 2 4 IF mode selection 3 4 setting 3 6 Initial screen power on 1 14 Input mode 3 1 Inspection F 1 installation 1 9 Installation 1 9 other applications 1 18 power off 1 16 trouble 1 17 Interface maps 2 1 Interval trigger mode 3 68 IQ mode description 3 3 IQ offset calibration 1 21 K Keyboard connection 3 195 operation E 9 Keyboard interface connector rear panel 2 4 L LAN connection 3 199 connector rear panel 2 4 Line marker menu 2 65 Link Marker 3 40 view 3 40 Loading a file 3 174 LOCAL key front panel 2 3 Mag error EVM view 3 107 Manuals list xx Marker band power markers 3 90 link 3 40 operation 3 45 type 3 45 Memory mode 3 1 Index 3 Index selection 3 5 setting 3 6 Menu display 2 11 functions 2 47 item information 2 14 numeric input 2 16 operations 2 11 selection 2 16 Menu display area screen 2 5 Menu table 3gppACP View 2 100 3gppPolar view 2 104 3gppPower view 2 106 3gppSpectrogram view 2 103 Analog view 2 69 Average Util C 2 118 CCDF 2 112 CCDFView 2 114 2 115 CDMAPolar view 2 86 CDMATime view 2 88 CDMAWaveform view 2 83 CodePolar view 2 92 CodePower view 2 93 CodeSpectrogra
38. 13 17 22 100 2 13 17 31 100 3 13 17 35 37 Stop x Taaa View D Wiew D picck save status AutoSave view Religare Piscksere C PROGRAM FILES SONY TEKTRONIX UCA BIN BlockSave 1Q BlockSave C Users PROJ E B01 IQ jo 337 AE 7 E E ale a Freq 2 5GHz Span 1MHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEANLESS RFAtt 20B Mixer 25aBm RF1 Normal AC Freq HW 1024 Blackman 80u 640u 200 Auto On 1 Figure 3 91 Auto save views in two modes View C and D For any destination file actually containing stored data a serial number beginning with 0 is added before the file extension IQ in this example BO10 1Q B011 IQ BO12 1Q If time domain data is captured in the analyzer memory IQT files are also created automatically If a file with the same name already exists it is overwritten with the new one 6 For the RollSave view set the number of frames to be stored with the Save Frames side key if necessary the default is 100 frames 7 Press the ROLL or BLOCK key to start acquisition The auto save mode depends on the key you pressed In the Roll mode the RollSave view functions In the Block mode the BlockSave view functions The analyzer continues to store data into files until the data acquisition completes 8 If you want to restart to store data from the file with a serial number 0 press the Counter Reset side key The files that have been previously made will be overwritten 9 When you stop the acq
39. 2 8 Resolution frequency D 1 time D 1 Restoring default settings C 9 Restoring the factory default 2 121 RF input connector front panel 2 3 RF mode description 3 3 Rho meter EVM view 3 107 RMS description 3 60 RMSExpo description 3 60 Roll mode description 3 21 S SaveLoad Util B menu table 2 117 Saving a file 3 174 Scalar mode description 3 5 Scale setting 3 36 Scan disk power on 1 17 Screen hardcopy 3 202 SEAMLESS status display 2 8 Seamless acquisition description 3 26 Search operation 3 45 Self gain calibration 1 20 Self test at power on 1 13 displaying the result 3 211 SelfCal Util A menu table 2 116 Service support contact information xxi Setting analog demodulation 3 95 band 3 6 block size 3 22 date 3 209 default C 1 digital demodulation 3 100 FFT parameters 3 19 frame period 3 25 Frequency 3 9 FSK 3 109 IF mode 3 6 Memory mode 3 6 reference level 3 13 scale 3 36 span 3 9 time 3 209 trigger 3 66 view 3 32 SETUP CDMA menu table 2 59 SETUP Standard menu table 2 54 2 61 SETUP area front panel 2 3 Index 5 Index Setup display 2 9 Setup sequence 2 47 Setup status display area screen 2 5 Side keys front panel 2 2 2 5 Slope trigger 3 73 Source trigger 3 73 Span setting 3 9 Specifications B 1 Specified line CDMA 3 119 Spectrogram view men
40. 2 99 CodeWSpectrogram view menu table 2 95 Compression description 3 42 CONFIG area front panel 2 3 CONFIG menu table 2 48 Connection keyboard 3 195 LAN 3 199 mouse 1 11 3 195 power cord 1 10 printer 3 202 Constellation display 3 102 Contacting Tektronix xxi Conventions xx Copy file 3 181 Correction data block 3 194 Count trigger 3 70 Creating a trigger mask pattern 3 75 D Data block 3 189 file format 3 184 frame 3 191 Date setting 3 209 Default settings C 1 restore C 9 Delayed trigger mode 3 67 Delete file 3 181 Delta marker operation 3 48 Diagnostics 1 19 procedure 1 23 Difference between WCA 330 and WCA 380 1 3 Digital modulated signal analysis 3 97 Display adjusting the tilt angle 1 15 analog demodulation 3 96 constellation 3 102 error vector analysis 3 106 eye diagram 3 104 front panel 2 2 Index 2 FSK 3 110 menu 2 11 self test result 3 211 setup 2 9 status 2 7 symbol table 3 105 vector 3 102 version 3 211 waveform data 3 31 Documentation list xx Domain trigger 3 73 Down link 3GPP 3 143 cdmaOne 3 127 W CDMA 3 135 Dual mode description 3 5 E Electrical characteristics B 2 ENTRY keypad front panel 2 3 Environmental Characteristics B 12 Error vector analysis display 3 106 Ethernet connection 3 199 EVM description 3 106 EVM view 3 107 view menu table 2 81 Exhaust fan rear p
41. 2 0 00 c08 becuse dud ose eee Pee eee 2 72 Waterfall View Menu 2 0 eee cece tenet ia 2 75 Polar View Menu s4 c40 s0ese eee ese aveesin ger Peewee ees aries eed 2 76 EyeDiagram View Menu 405 6 08 osc ee cee bee eee bee ee sea es 2 79 SymbolTable View Menu 0 0 ee eee eee eee erences 2 80 EVM View Meni 2 54 6 ssoeee4b4 ess cee eee Pesan Goede es eres dees 2 81 CDMAWaveform View Menu 00 eee eee 2 83 CDMAPolar View Menu 2 0 cece eee teeter nee n eee 2 86 CDMATime View Menu 050665034 essevessie gerbe eile ees E 2 88 CodeSpectrogram View Menu 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 2 90 CodePolar View Menu c4 saccs0 0 ep chee esis dss PEREPERE eee eee ead 2 92 CodePower View Ment 2 0 0 cece cece tence enn eee eens 2 93 CodeWSpectrogram View Menu 0 0 0 eee eee cee eee 2 95 CodeWPolar View Menu 0 0 cece eee eee eet Eu 2 97 CodeWPower View Menu 2 cece cece eee tenet eens 2 99 SSppACP View MENU 2 oud 25 ini reit t We antics howe b bens hove go does 2 100 3gppSpectrogram View Menu 0 cece eee ee eee 2 103 3gppPol r View Menu seseris os ed ese ee ia ey pie en bbw we cee ee beens 2 104 SeppPower View Meni mei ci sind ghosts eau E Head ble hd tend aS poe bas bed 2 106 GSM View Menu esei meit kimu eea Shot dig betes REE EEE Ee Wee 2 107 GSMPolar View Menu iure i 2 5 seeds taea aoe dit eet toh Ce eR ERE OS 2 108 GSMMask View Menu sii 2 5
42. 3 129 cdmaOne Analysis 3 130 Data source i domain power Relative time from data end point R B nei ee number Symbol AN relative to i data acquisition end point pet Sart Och Measurement vanes at marker position View B CodeSpectrogram view Figure 3 67 Code domain power spectrogram Data source Date and time at data acquisition end point View C Active IS 95 EQ Measurement 99 05 31 15 18 Measurement values gt Marker 0 054chip 0 494 44 723deg at marker position 1 5 Freq Err 63 953Hz from the left Origin Offset e Chip number Origin offset Amplitude Phase Amplitude scale a 128 213mV Unit View C CodePolar view Figure 3 68 Constellation WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual cdmaOne Analysis Data source Code domain power View D Polar Measurement values Marker Och 7 212d0B at marker position o aB Channel number a View D CodePower view Start Och Figure 3 69 Code domain power WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 131 cdmaOne Analysis 3 132 Code Domain Power Measurement for Continuous Symbols The standard code domain power measurement as described above acquires and processes frames one by one so it can not capture symbols continuously because of the process time limit The following shows the method to obtain continuous code domain power by acquiring data for symbols in the lump and performing the measurement fo
43. 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz RF4 5 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz IF Mode Selects an Intermediate Frequency IF mode In the Baseband mode the IF mode is fixed to Normal For details refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 Normal This mode has an IF bandwidth of 10 MHz and features a high degree of phase flatness It is suitable for digital modulation analysis with a span below 6 MHz or general measurement that does not require a wide dynamic range HiRes This mode has a relatively narrow IF bandwidth of 6 MHz but has the widest dynamic range It is suitable for Adjacent Channel Leak Power ACP or spurious measurement Memory Mode Sets up input coupling a memory mode and FFT parameters Input FFT Same as Memory Mode Input FFT in SETUP Standard menu on page 2 54 Freq Span Sets a center frequency span and reference level The center frequency span and reference level can be Ref accessed directly using the SETUP FREQ SPAN and REF keys respectively NOTE When you change modes from Baseband to RF IQ or Wide or vice versa these setting will be changed to the defaults Sets a center frequency You must set the value so that Frequency Span 2 does not exceed the frequency range available for the analyzer Refer to Frequency and Span on page 3 9 for details Spans 30M 15M Selects a predefined span 30 MHz or 15 MHz Ref Sets a reference level It must be greater than the maximum level of an input signal If an overlo
44. 30M Span or by pressing the BLOCK key if 5M Span WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CDMA Analysis Changing the resolution bandwidth You can select the resolution bandwidth RBW If you set it to Off the usual spectrum is displayed 1 Press the RBW side key and select the resolution bandwidth or Off 2 Press the BLOCK key to start the measurement Sorting the number tags in frequency order The number tags default to be numbered in spurious strength order They can be renumbered in frequency order 1 Press Measurement Options Sorted by and select Frequency 2 Perform the measurement by pressing the ROLL key if 30M Span or by pressing the BLOCK key if 5M Span Performing the measurement with the number tag display fixed By default the spurious signals are searched and the number tags are updated each time the measurement is performed With the number tag display fixed you can evaluate time dependent changes of the spurious 1 Press Measurement Options Spurious Search and select Off 2 Perform the measurement by pressing the ROLL key if 30M Span or by pressing the BLOCK key if 5M Span WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 121 CDMA Analysis Time Characteristic Evaluation Figure 3 64 shows the two views that display the in band analysis result with the Time Domain basic configuration Averaged waveform Latest unaveraged waveform This figure contains white mask areas that are actually displayed
45. American Digital Cellular PDC Configures the analyzer according to PDC Personal Digital Cellular System PHS Configures the analyzer according to PHS Personal Handy Phone System Configures the analyzer according to TETRA Trans European Trunked Radio GSM Configures the analyzer according to GSM Global System for Mobile Communication CDPD Configures the analyzer according to CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data Manual Setup Sets the modulating system symbol rate filter and a BT manually Modulation Selects the modulating system required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal 1 4 PI_QPSK Specifies 1 4 mt Shift QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying modulation BPSK Specifies BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying modulation QPSK Specifies QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying modulation 8PSK Specifies 8PSK Phase Shift Keying modulation 16QAM Specifies 16QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation Specifies 64QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation Specifies 256QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation Specifies GMSK Gaussian filtered Minimum Shift Keying modulation Specifies GFSK Gaussian filtered Frequency Shift Keying modulation 2 76 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 12 Polar view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Symbol Rate Inputs the symbol rate required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal There is the following rel
46. Auto Auto Normal Trigger Count Off Off Off Trigger Times 1 1 1 Trigger Domain Frequency Frequency Time Trigger Source Internal Internal Internal Trigger Slope Rise Rise Rise Trigger Position 40 40 40 30B 30B 30 CDMA Source Active Active Waveform Format FreqAmpl FreqAmpl Frame 0 0 Options Scale Hor Scale 1 1 Options Scale Hor Start 0 0 Options Scale Ver Scale 1 1 Options Scale Ver Start 0 Options Marker Hor 0 or Of 900 KF 900 KF 42 0B 42 0B 798M 1 96 We 54 0B 54 0B 1906 MRZ 1 385 WF 60 dm 60 dBm Options Position 45 45 RBW 30 kHz 30 kHz Measurement Options OBW 99 99 Measurement Options Separation 2 2 Measurement Options Threshold 100 dB 100 dB Measurement Options Sorted by Frequency Frequency Measurement Options Spurious Search On On Measurement Options Standard IS 95 IS 95 Measurement Options Channel 777 777 C 4 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix C Default Settings Table C 2 Default settings for the CDMA configuration Cont Menu item EVR Spurious Time Domain RST CDMATime Active 0 On Trace2 Average On Options Scale Hor Scale 1 Options Scale Hor Start 0 Options Scale gt Ver Scale 1 Options Scale Ver Start 0 Options gt Mask gt Off Left 169 us Options gt Mask gt On Left 175 us Options gt Mask
47. B Specifications Table B 3 Input Characteristic Description Signal input Input connector Input impedance VSWR Maximum Input Level N type except IQ input BNC type IQ input 50 Q lt 1 5 2 5 GHz RF attenuation gt 10 dB lt 2 0 7 5 GHz RF attenuation gt 10 dB WCA380 only Maximum DC voltage 0 V RF for WCA330 RF1 to RF4 for WCA380 5 V Baseband 5 V IQ input Maximum input power 30 dBm RF for WCA330 RF1 to RF4 for WCA380 Attenuator RF attenuator 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step 0 2 5 7 dB RF for WCA330 RF1 and RF2 for WCA380 Baseband attenuator 0 to 40 dB 1 dB step Q attenuator 0 to 30 dB 10 dB step Table B 4 Reference level Characteristic Description Reference level setting range Reference level accuracy at 20 C to 30 C at 10 C to 40 C Level linearity 50 to 30 dBm 1 dB step RF for WCA330 RF1 to RF4 for WCA380 30 to 30 dBm 1 dB step Baseband 10 to 20 dBm 10 dB step IQ 0 8 dB Baseband 1 5 dB RF for WCA330 RF1 for WCA380 1 5 dB RF2 WCA380 2 0 dB RF3 WCA380 2 0 dB RF4 WCA380 1 0 dB Baseband 2 0 dB RF for WCA330 RF1 for WCA380 2 0 dB RF2 WCA380 2 5 dB RF3 WCA380 2 5 dB RF4 WCA380 0 2 dB 0 to 40 dBfs WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual B 3 Appendix B Specifications Table B 5 Dynamic range Characteristic Description 1 dB compression input 2 dBm RF attenuation 0
48. Background Color and select White Select the view For example if you have defined View B for the Waveform view press the VIEW B key You do not need to keep a waveform such as a spectrum displayed in the Waveform view However displaying a waveform will help you create a pattern meeting the measurement conditions Press VIEW MAIN gt Edit to display the mask edit menu Create the mask pattern For example to create the pattern shown in Figure 3 41 first create achromatic area A a Press the Draw Max side key b Place the O marker at A L using the Hor and Ver side keys 3 77 Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern c Press the Toggle Delta side key to change the O marker position with the marker d Move O to A R using the Hor and Ver side keys e Press the Draw Line side key The white area is created as shown below 3 78 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern f Using steps from b to e create areas B and C The trigger mask pattern you created is written into the internal trigger register Moving the Baseline You can move the trigger mask baseline as shown in Figure 3 42 Use one of the following operations under step 5a on page 3 77 to move the baseline m To place the baseline at the reference level Press the Draw Max side key m To place the baseline at the level 70 dB
49. Background Selects white or black for the screen background color Color Marker Link Specifies whether the markers in all views move in unison or separately If you want to move markers in unison select On Otherwise select Off Util There are utility menus of A to H When you press the More side key the Util E to H menus appear Action Switches side key functions Assign Allows you to select items using the Util A to H side keys Allows you to display the item selected using the Util A to H side keys Util A Displays the Self Calibration menu For detailed settings refer to page 2 116 SelfCal For the calibration procedures refer to Self Gain Calibration on page 1 20 Util B Loads and saves data to from a file For detailed settings refer to page 2 117 SaveLoad Util C Average Displays the Average menu For detailed settings refer to page 2 118 Util D Ext Syne This function is called when you select External Sync in CONFIG MODE menu refer to page 2 48 It is used internally and has no menu selection Displays the menus associated with the side keys of Util E to Util G The analyzer incorporates no function by factory default Util H Remote Displays the remote control menu The menu allows you to set up communication parameters between the analyzer and external devices For details refer to the Programmer Manual WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 53 Menu Functions SETUP Standard Menu
50. D1 to D8 for an input source Copy data to this register using Options Copy To in other view menus or Util C Average on a utility menu File 1Q Specifies the IQ formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 File AP Specifies the AP formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Format Defines the horizontal and vertical axes FreqAmpl Horizontal axis Frequency span Vertical axis Amplitude FreqPhase Horizontal axis Frequency span Vertical axis Phase Compression Generally as the horizontal number of pixels is smaller than the number of bins bin data is thinned out in agree with the number of pixels on the screen when it is displayed This item allows you to select a compression method This item affects only data display and appears only when you select a register of D1 to D8 for Source For compressing display data refer to Relationship among Frames Bins and Pixels on page 3 41 Sample Samples data at a regular interval to display it Max Displays the maximum value of the data for each pixel Displays the minimum value of the data for each pixel Frame Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written Ver Start Sets the start value of the vertical axis i e frame number By default it is set to frame 0 into which th
51. FM or PM modulated signal and displays the result Horizontal axis represents time and vertical axis frequency FM amplitude AM or phase PM For detailed settings refer to page 2 69 Demodulates a Frequency Shifting Keying FSK modulated signal and displays the result Horizontal axis represents time and vertical axis modulating levels phase or frequency For detailed settings refer to page 2 71 Spectrogram Enables frame by frame time series display along the vertical axis In each spectrum the horizontal axis represents frequency amplitude or phase in color This is called color spectrogram display For detailed settings refer to page 2 72 2 50 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 3 CONFIG menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Waterfall Enables frame by frame time series display along the vertical axis In each spectrum the horizontal axis represents frequency or time and the vertical axis amplitude phase I or Q This is called waterfall display For detailed settings refer to page 2 75 Displays a demodulated signal in polar coordinates The horizontal and vertical axes represent and Q respectively in rectangular coordinates It is used to observe phases and amplitudes of a digitally modulated signal and is called constellation display For detailed settings refer to page 2 76 EyeDiagram Uses the demodulated sign
52. File Loads the data from the file that contains it in the AP format AP WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 117 Menu Functions Average Util C Menu Controls averaging For details on the operation refer to Average and Peak Hold on page 3 57 Table 2 35 Average menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Selects the input source None Specifies no input source Active Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Zoom Specifies the zoomed data for the input source Refer to Zoom on page 3 51 File 1Q Specifies the IQ formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 File AP Specifies the AP formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Begin Frame Specifies the first frame for averaging End Frame Specifies the last frame for averaging With the beginning and end frames specified only the frames of this data range are averaged The specified frame number may be 0 to block size 1 or to trigger count x block size 1 If you set a trigger Destination Selects one of the D1 to D8 data registers as the destination for storing the result The default is D1 Mkr gt Frame Sets the frame in the marker position to End Frame RMS Performs the averaging with RMS root mean square PeakHold Performs the peak hold 2 118 WCA330 amp WCA380 User
53. Hexadecimal Error vector EVM Magnitude error Phase error Waveform quality p View Number of views 1 2 4 Settable views 8 Maximum Number of traces 2 at the Waveform display LCD panel Size 30 7 cm 12 1 in Display resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Color 256 colors Maximum Table B 15 Marker Characteristic Description Marker Type Normal Delta Band power Search functions Peak right Peak left Maximum Link between views On Off Measurement functions Noise power Power within band C N ratio Adjacent channel power Occupied bandwidth B 10 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 16 Zoom Characteristic Digital zoom ratio Maximum span at Zoom mode Table B 17 Controller Interface Description 2 to 1000 5 MHz Baseband Normal and HiRes IF modes 30 MHz Wide IF mode IQ Characteristic Description Controller CPU Intel Celeron 433 MHz DRAM 128 Mbyte DIMM os Windows 98 System bus PCI ISA Data storage Hard disk 40 Gbyte 3 5 inch IDE Floppy disk 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch Flash disk 8 Mbyte flash memory Interface Printer port Centronics parallel GPIB IEEE488 1 LAN 10 100 Base T IEEE802 3 Mouse PS 2 Keyboard PC AT Monitor out 15 pin D sub VGA connector Table B 18 Power requirements Characteristic Line voltage and frequency Line fuse Primary circuit dielectric voltage withstand grounding impedance Description 100 to 240 VAC 47 to 6
54. In the Block mode it displays raw data without averaging For averaging in the Block mode use Execute below Average Type RMSExpo Performs averaging using exponential Root Mean Square RMS This average type decreases the influence of the weighted old data on an average exponentially Performs averaging using RMS values PeakHold Holds peak values of the waveform Num Averages Specifies the number of frames to be averaged If Average Type is set to RMS frames specified with Num Averages are averaged before switching to a fixed display If Average Type is set to RMSExpo Num Averages is used for weighing old data Begin Frame Specifies the first frame for averaging with Execute below Specifies the last frame for averaging with Execute below Mkr gt Frame Sets the range of frames to be averaged using Execute between the marker and delta marker This range is applied to Begin Frame and End Frame Execute Averages the data written in memory in the Roll or Block mode This item does not depend on the settings of Average On Off Reset Restarts the averaging that has been started with Average On 2 64 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 7 Waveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions RBW Simulates Resolution Bandwidth RBW for compatibility with data measured by a conventional scanning RF spectrum analyzer RBW Selecting On performs the calcu
55. LAN Connection The analyzer is equipped with the standard LAN Ethernet interface You can share resources such as files or disks by connecting the analyzer to your network You can also control the analyzer from other PC s via LAN For details on remote control refer to the Programmer Manual Attaching a Cable Figure 3 102 shows the location of connectors on the rear panel The connector at the bottom in the second slot from the right is an Ethernet 10 100 BASE T connector Attach a twisted pair cable to this connector R 60A 0 S09 oo ooj 10 100 BASE T connector gt Figure 3 102 10 100 BASE T connector location rear panel If you reboot the analyzer after connecting to LAN the analyzer detects the network speed automatically and sets it to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 199 LAN Connection Network Setting Sharing Resources 3 200 You can use the Network dialog box in the Windows 98 Control Panel to set network parameters You must set network parameters such as an IP address as appropriate to your operating environment Contact your system administrator for how to set these parameters If you connect the analyzer to LAN you can share resources such as files and disks on the network To share resources open Properties dialog box for each resource such as
56. Leave a WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Installation and Power On Connecting the Power Cord 1 Plug in the power cord to the AC inlet on the rear panel Refer to Figure 1 3 Figure 1 3 AC inlet on the rear panel AC inlet O 000000000000000 0000 000000000000000 OO0000 k O00000000000000 2 OO000 000000000000000 2 COOCOO e O00000 orf e COOO0O y 83 00000 e coocoo 33 00000 83 OOO0O0 OO 2 00000 OO0000000000000 eJ QO00 OO0000000000000 00000 ODOOOO0O000000000 O0000 990208080808 0208 028020 OLORSBOROBOBORS8580868 GSO O OSOS ld BE bd Bod pak CAUTION The analyzer operates at a power supply voltage of 90 V to 250 V and a power supply frequency of 47 Hz to 66 Hz Before plugging the cord into the outlet make sure that your power supply is suitable for the analyzer 2 Plug the power cord into a three wired outlet that has a protective ground line The metallic section on the surface of the analyzer is connected to a power supply protective ground terminal through a power cord ground line To prevent electrical shocks insert the plug into an outlet that has a protective ground line WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Installation and Power On Powering On Connecting the Mouse Connect the standard mouse to the rear panel connector before turning the analyzer power on see Figure 1 4 connecting the mouse If th
57. MHZIs 7 MAIN FREQ SPAN REF i o 4 6 KHZ ms PRNT ROLL 1 s PEETA MAIN SCALE MKR SRCH 3 Wz u MODE SETUP VIEW uT E M E E SSeS BLOCK CLR BS ENT UNCA OVERLOAD TRIGGERED Config lt Front panel interface View A Active Freqadmpl Mod Mode Load From File CFG Save To File CFG Spectrum Spectrum div Spectrogram Pil Dual ne PAN AA Zoom A U More Freq 1 5GHz Span 3GHz Ref OdBm VECTOR REALTIME RF Freq AC Blackman 1024 80u 200 Auto On 1 Freq Int Rise 50 J Figure E 1 Front panel interface for mouse operations E 1 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix E Mouse Operations Displaying the Front Panel Interface Starting the Software from the Task Bar Starting the Software from the Shortcut Icon E 2 You can start the mouse operating software from the task bar or shortcut icon Connect a mouse and a keyboard if necessary referring Attaching a Mouse and a Keyboard on page 3 195 then perform the following procedure 1 Move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the screen The Windows 98 task bar appears Right click on the Start icon A menu appears Select Open from the menu The Start Menu window appears Double click the Programs icon Right click on the WCA icon A menu appears Select Properties from the menu to open the property setting window Click on the Shortcut tab in the property setting window
58. Manual CDMA Analysis View Contents View A Shows the plot of the in band power values within the specified RBW resolution bandwidth using the CDMAWaveform view Power in band power and OBW occupied bandwidth are displayed at the top left corner of the view The RBW value is preset to 30 kHz If necessary it can be switched to 1 MHz Refer to Power Measurement on page 3 81 for detail on the definitions of Power and OBW Note that the CDMA analysis uses the measurement parameters defined in the IS 95 and T 53 standards View B Displays the Spectrogram view to confirm the signal acquisition status View C Displays the frequency and origin offset errors using the CDMAPolar view while demodulating the input signal This view also displays the symbol positions with red points and the symbol to symbol trace in the vector display Refer to Process Flow on page 3 98 for the demodulation function View D After compensating the origin offset from the signal demodulated in the CDMAPolar view View D displays the following modulation quality information at the top left corner of the view using the EVM view m EVM RMS Root mean square of EVM error vector magnitude m Mag Error RMS Root mean square of amplitude error m Phase Error deg Root mean square of phase error m Rho meter The IS 95 and T 53 standards specify that the meter value shall be 0 995 or larger Refer to Error Vector Analysis Displa
59. Manual Menu Functions File Access Menu The File Access menu is called from the File X XX submenu item of any other menus and then displayed together with the directory and file lists The file extension XXX indicates CFG IQ or AP Refer to File Menu Operations on page 3 178 for details Table 2 36 File Access menu table Top level Cancel Subordinate level options and descriptions Returns to the menu calling the File Access menu OK Once you have selected a file press the OK side key to accept the file File Selects a file Dir Selects a directory Expand Dir Lists the files in the selected directory or shows the directory listing Drive Name Entry Operation Selects a drive Inputs the file name or directory name Press this side key and use the general purpose knob to move the caret within the file name input field Delete Char Press this side key to delete the character placed in the caret position within the input field When the caret is not displayed the last character is deleted each time you press this side key ABCDEFG _ When you press one of these side keys you receive a submenu in which a character is H assigned to each side key Press the side key showing the character you want to input IJKLMNO P QRSTUVW X YZ01234 5s 6789 Operates a file Refer to File Menu Operations on page 3 178 for details Copy File Copies a file
60. OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS Freq 800MHz RFAtt 20aB Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Zoom HW 1024 Blackman 6 4m 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Figure 2 44 Measurement example using the delta markers WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 45 Tutorial Turning Off the Power After completion of your measurements turn off the power 1 Press the power switch at the bottom left corner of the front panel to select the STANDBY position The Windows 98 shutdown process runs and powers down the analyzer 2 Turn off the signal generator You have completed the tutorial 2 46 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions This section provides detailed information on menu functions Setup Sequence When you power on the analyzer the Windows 98 operating system boots up and the initial screen appears on the display The analyzer is now ready for measurement Figure 2 45 shows the rough flow from signal input to display It also contains hierarchical representation of the menus associated with the keys on the front panel and the process blocks that can be operated by the menus Use the following procedure to set up or operate the analyzer 1 1 With a basic configuration pattern make settings for two major categories signal process modes and views 2 Adjust the basic configuration pattern as required for a specific application 3 Analyze the signal while making fine changes to the settings Use the CONFIG MODE menu to set up
61. Press the Position side key to put the cursor where you want to change m To insert a character put the cursor immediately after the position where you want to insert the character To delete the character at the cursor position press the Delete Char side key Press the desired character side key For example if you want to insert A press A B C D EF G H gt A If necessary repeat the steps 3 and 4 Inputting a New Name If the file name is not shown in the file name field or if you want to enter a new name follow this procedure 1 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Press the Name Entry side key If the file name field contains characters press the Delete Char side key to delete them Press the desired character side key For example if you want to insert A press A B C D E F G H gt A Repeat this step to complete the name To change a character press the Position side key and then turn the general purpose knob to position the cursor at the character you want to change To delete a character at the cursor position press the Delete Char side key While the cursor is on the space the Delete Char side key works as the Backspace key 3 183 File Operations Data File Format 3 184 File Structure This section describes the structure of data files AP IQ In the frequency domain mode the analyzer makes only frequency domain data files In the dual domain mode the anal
62. RCE SES 3 137 3JGPP Analysis 25 o diodes srs 9 6dns Fea 6 4 Giala ies ars 4h Se Siw ele ear E E 3 143 3GPP Down Link Signal Analysis 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 143 3GPP ACP Measurement i cieie fork dW Gut Gabo ee Reb eds ahs ER 3 149 GSM Analysis sie suns 95 ssc ws vie auiniensoics o EEEE EEE EREEREER we 3 151 Measurement FUNCHONS 4 555320 osha ote r od E od baled ee Hee whee SR ee 3 152 Basic Operations v 1 sss0 554accen gos ort iani pede Pe Eee sheds SE Oe 3 154 Entering the Sync Wortd 2 354 400 0o0sh0sbpenen beers shee obec gee Me 3 163 CODE AmallySis 55 sse6 4 3 5 oat dsb ai o 00s o 9 ite ENEE Gta shade oie atenay ai 3 165 About CODE Analysis 440 354 8 00 ested SORE Bhan BEY ote aeaes 3 166 Operating Examples 2 ss e 3s ed iv adeiee ESETE EE E E OE 3 167 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents Appendices Index Auto Save Function RESCH ONS neee Pogo aes Operating Procedure File Operations e000 Saving and Loading Files Operating File Access Menu Data File Format 020 5 Data Block 2 eee eee ee ee Correction Data Block Using Windows 98 Attaching a Mouse and a Keyboard Accessing Windows 98 LAN Connection Outputting Waveform Data Screen Hardcopy siaii ik weal urriei Outputting View Data in Text Format Setting the Date and Time Displaying the Version and Self Test Result Appendix A Options and Accessories QPUODS 6 ee es bes ao ee
63. Range The upper limit of the span depends on the mode as shown in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Frequency and span setting range Band Maximum Frequency range mode span Baseband Normal 10 MHz 2 Dual 10 MHz DC to 10 MHz Normal Scalar 3 3 GHz 10 MHz 5 to 3 GHz Frequency 6 MHz RF RF1 RF Dual 6 MHz 2 5 GHz to 3 5 GHz WCA330 Zoom 5 MHz RF2 RF1 to RF4 3 GHz 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz WCA380 Dual 6 MHz RF3 5 MHz 5 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz omz PFA Q 30 MHz 1 The maximum span per frame 2 10 MHz when the number of FFT points is 1024 5 MHz when the number of FFT points is 256 3 If you set the span to 10 MHz or more the mode changes to the Scalar automatically 4 1 GHz only if the band is RF2 5 50 MHz only if the IF mode is Wide When you change the frequency band or the IF mode SETUP MAIN gt Band or IF Mode the frequency and span is reset to the defaults Set them with SETUP Freq and Span again The frequency and span settings must satisfy the following conditions Center frequency Span 2 lt Upper limit of the frequency setting range RF mode lt 10 MHz or 5 MHz Baseband mode depending on the memory mode Center frequency Span 2 Lower limit of the frequency setting range RF mode 0 Hz Baseband mode 3 10 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Frequency and Span Setting the Frequency with the Marker and Search You can position the marker in the peak spectrum using the search
64. Refer to page 3 65 for the trigger While data acquisition is at a stop this field turns blue Refer to page 3 21 for stopping and starting data acquisition VECTOR SEAMLESS Gray Blue This field is gray when one frame is constructed by multiple scans It turns blue when the span is set to acquire one frame data by one scan called Vector mode It is always blue in the Baseband IQ and Wide modes In the RF mode it turns blue when the span is set to 6 MHz or less This field is blue when data is acquired seamlessly That is there is no gap between frames It is always seamless in the Zoom mode In other modes it depends on the frame period setting Refer to page 3 26 for details WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Interface Maps Setup Display The setup display area shown in Figure 2 7 on the display screen displays the settings listed in Table 2 2 on the next page All display items in this area are identical to those set through the SETUP menu Refer to page 2 54 for the SETUP menu Setup display area A C N Freq 2 5 MHz Span 5 MHz Ref 10dBm RF Att 20dB Mixer 25dBm C RFI Normal AC Freq HW 1024 Blackman 80u 160u 200 Auto On 1 Freq Int Rise 50 Figure 2 7 Setup display area NOTE When you connect a mouse to the analyzer the Windows 98 task bar may hide the setup display area WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 9 Interface Ma
65. Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement gt Noise 3 Move the marker to the desired data point 4 Read the measured value displayed at the top left corner on the view 5 When necessary press the ROLL or BLOCK key to acquire the signal while measuring the noise Figure 3 43 shows a noise measurement example View A Active Freqampl 97 07 29 22 17 20 Marker 849 860 156 25MHz 81 549dBm Noise measurement result Noise 112 803dBm Hz Center 850MHz pan SOOkKHz Figure 3 43 Noise measurement example WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 83 Power Measurement Power Measurement The Power measurement measures the power dBm of the frequency region specified with the band power marker For band power marker operations refer to page 3 90 To measure power follow this procedure 1 Display the spectrum in the Waveform view or 3gppACPView for the 3GPP standard From the view menu select Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement Power Use the band power marker to bracket the desired frequency region as shown in Figure 3 44 Read the measured value displayed at the top left corner on the view When necessary press the ROLL or BLOCK key to acquire the signal while measuring power Figure 3 44 shows a power measurement example Power measurement result Band power marker View B Active Freqampl 9 O7 25 15 24 05 Marker 850 007 812 SMHz 9 234Bm _ 230Bm
66. Selecting menus using the mouse ee02 E 7 Figure E 6 Moving the marker and selecting a frame E 8 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual xi Table of Contents List of Tables xii Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 2 13 Table 2 14 Table 2 15 Table 2 16 Table 2 17 Table 2 18 Table 2 19 Table 2 20 Table 2 21 Table 2 22 Table 2 23 Table 2 24 Table 2 25 Table 2 26 Table 2 27 Table 2 28 Table 2 29 Table 2 30 Table 2 31 Table 2 32 Table 2 33 Internal diagnostic program cc cece eeeee 1 23 Status display 2 2 66 soi 3ie nie wie ldsa es edinw 0 8 were o oo aene 2 8 Setup display items ccc ccc c cece cee ee ceeee 2 10 CONFIG menu table ccc cece cece ee eens 2 48 SETUP standard menu table 02 eeeee 2 54 SETUP CDMA menu table 0 cece eens 2 59 SETUP 3gppACP menu table eee 2 61 Waveform view menu table e eee eeeeee 2 63 Analog view menu table ccc cce ce ececeees 2 69 FSK view menu table cece cece eee e ec ceees 2 71 Spectrogram view menu table ceeeeeeee 2 72 Waterfall view menu table ccc eee ceeees 2 75 Polar view menu table ccc cee cs eee ceeees 2 76 EyeDiagram view menu table eeeceeees 2
67. Set the average parameters a Press VIEW A gt VIEW MAIN gt Average b With the Average Type side key select the averaging mode c With the Num Averages side key set the number of averaging d With the Begin Frame and End Frame side keys or Mkr gt Frame side key specify the frame range for averaging 2 Press the Execute side key to run averaging 3 62 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Average and Peak Hold Operating Example of the Utility Average Function Suppose that the data memory already contains the data acquired in the Roll or Block mode If you use the Roll mode stop the data acquisition before executing the process 1 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Set the average parameters in the utility menu a Press CONFIG UTILITY gt Util C Average Source and select Active The contents of the data memory are processed in this case To process the contents of a file select either File IQ or File AP Input the frame numbers in Begin Frame and End Frame to define the frame range to be processed If you press the All Frame side key 0 and total number of frames 1 are set in Begin Frame and End Frame respectively If you press the Mkr gt Frame side key the number of the frame in the marker position is set in End Frame Press the Destination side key to select one of the D1 to D8 data registers for the destination Press the RMS root mean square side key or PeakHold peak
68. Trigger Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Normal Trigger Count On On On On On Trigger Times 1 1 1 1 1 Trigger Domain Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Trigger Source Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External Trigger Slope Rise Rise Rise Rise Rise Trigger Position 50 50 50 50 50 Zoom Frequency 1 5 GHz 2 Zoom Span 3 GHz2 Zoom Mag 22 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Default Settings Table C 1 Default settings for the Standard configuration Cont Spectrum oa Menu Item Spectrum Se Dual Zoom caine a nal A SI gram View A Source Active Active Active Active Active Format FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl Frame 0 0 0 0 0 Display Lines Hor 1 Visible Off Off Off Off Off Display Lines Hor 1 0 0 0 0 0 Display Lines Hor 2 Visible Off Off Off Off Off Display Lines Hor 2 0 0 0 0 0 Display Lines Ver 1 Visible Off Off Off Off Off Display Lines Ver 1 0 0 0 0 0 Display Lines Ver 2 Visible Off Off Off Off Off Display Lines Ver 2 0 0 0 0 0 Scale Hor Scale 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz Scale Hor Start 0 0 0 0 0 Scale Ver Scale 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm Scale Ver Start 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm Trace2 Source None None None None None Trace2 Format FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl Trace2
69. Zoom mode select this For zoom refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 and Zoom on page 3 51 D1D2 to D7D8 Specifies a register pair for an input source The digitally modulated signal demodulated in the Polar view is written into the register pair To display the spectrum of a demodulated digitally modulated signal use a register pair as the input signal For demodulation of digitally modulated signals refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 D1 to D8 Specifies one of the data registers of D1 to D8 for an input source Copy data to this register using Options gt Copy To in other view menus or Util C Average on a utility menu File 1Q Specifies the 1Q formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 File AP Specifies the AP formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Generally as the horizontal number of pixels is smaller than the number of bins bin data is thinned out in agree with the number of pixels on the screen when it is displayed This item allows you to select a compression method This item affects only data display and appears only when you select a register of D1 to D8 for Source For compressing display data refer to Relationship among Frames Bins and Pixels on page 3 41 Samples data at a regular interval to display it Selects the maximum and min
70. a basic system environment Several basic setting patterns are predefined Their icons are displayed in the side keys You can use the CONFIG SETUP menu to change signal processing modes or the CONFIG VIEW menu to changes display formats or the number of views Before or during measurement you can use the SETUP MAIN or VIEW MAIN menu to change detailed settings For example you can change frequency span or display scales You can also operate markers or create trigger mask patterns Input signal gt Signal process block Figure 2 45 Signal process and display blocks WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CONFIG MODE A a a CONFIG SETUP CONFIG VIEW A A 1 D VIEW MAIN SETUP MAIN VIEW SCALE SETUP FREQ VIEW MKR SETUP REF VIEW SRCH a A S SS Data memory Time or frequency Display analysis domain signal block Data register 2 47 Menu Functions CONFIG Menu The CONFIG menu configures the analyzer with the predefined basic patterns You can select the CONFIG menu in the CONFIG area on the front panel Table 2 3 CONFIG menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Factory Reset Reset the current settings to the factory default To display this menu press CONFIG MODE front panel Config lt top side key NOTE The settings on the Remote Util 8 will not be changed Power On Loads and saves the power on settings The power on settings a
71. a wide span of 10 MHz to 3 GHz Frequency mode m Acquires signals in a span below 10 MHz for a long time m Acquires signals in real time depending on the frame period Dual mode m Analyzing analog or digital modulation m Acquires signals in real time depending on the frame period Zoom mode m Enlarging a particular frequency domain WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual _ Ey Frequency and Span You can set a frequency and span with the SETUP menu using the general purpose knob or keypad on the front panel You can also set a frequency and span using the marker and search functions See Figure 3 3 Setting Frequency and Span Set a frequency and span with the SETUP keys on the front panel There are two ways to set the keys m Press SETUP MAIN gt Freq Span Ref gt Freq or Span and enter the value using the general purpose knob or keypad Press SETUP Freq or SETUP Span and enter the value using the general purpose knob or keypad i ey a SETUP Set a frequency and span with the hi Freq Span Ref submenu gt FREQ Set a frequency gt SPAN Set a span gt REF ENTRY 7 8 9 MHz s CONFIG MODE 4 5 6 kzms Figure 3 3 SETUP keys for setting the frequency and span WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 9 Frequency and Span Setting
72. access menu Displaying the File Access The file access menu appears when you press the side key as shown in Fig Menu ure 3 93 in the CONFIG or VIEW menu Source A Load From v File XXX File XXX Save To File XXX File extension XXX represents CFG IQ or AP Figure 3 93 Side keys to display the file access menu The file access menu displays the directory and file listings as illustrated in Figure 3 94 and the menu items as shown in Figure 3 95 Drive selection Sees ied EE Y ABCcf field Ly cfg f 7 C ABC cfg se dual10m cfg acy Program Files dual3g cfg freq10m cfg WCA scal3g cfg SUP cfg SYSTEM SUP2 cfg zoom10m cfg zoom3m cfg Directory listing File listing Figure 3 94 Directory and file listings in the file access menu 3 178 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Returns to the previously displayed menu without processing Cancel Execute the save load or other operation Ww PIE Select a file from the file listing File Select a directory from the directory listing Display the file listing located in the directory you selected above Expand Dir Select the drive in the drive selection field Drive Edit the characters in the file name entry field in the subdirectory Name Entry Open the subdirectory to copy or delete a file or c
73. and Q signals directly from the rear panel connectors Converts the analog I and Q signals separated by the IQ splitter to the digital quantity respectively Thins out the sampling clock to change the span Stores the data from the wideband digital filter and outputs them to the digital down converter synchronizing with the data stream from the analog front end Conditions the signal for A D conversion by using the low noise amplifier and high precision attenuator and anti aliasing filter The input signal goes through this block in the RF and Baseband mode The output from the analog front end block enters the A D converter via the fine tuning attenuator the anti aliasing filter and the driver amplifier The sampling rate of this converter is 25 6 MHz and its resolution is 14 bits The A D converter is equipped with the offset regulating D A converter voltage reference and reference clock generator at the periphery WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 5 Product Overview Digital Down Converter FIFO FFT Processor Digital Trigger Comparator 1 6 Performs span and center frequency setting which are required for flexible spectrum analysis This converter consists of two main stages The first stage converts the 0 to 10 MHz real signal into the complex signal of 5 MHz The second stage converts the frequency to set any center frequency A thinning out filter is provided between stages to implement span changes by thi
74. and a span of 1 MHz The Zoom mode re analyzes exactly the same signal with a center frequency of 2 5 MHz and a span of 100 kHz and displays the result on screen You can set the span to 1 1 000 to 1 2 with high precision without causing amplitude or phase distortion This differs from enlargement by simple division scale or interpolation In addition while changing the center frequency and span settings you can repeat zooming the data acquired once During the zoom process the original data in the frequency domain is saved in the CPU memory so it can be re displayed at any time Data memory Original data in time domain Re analyzed data in frequency domain CPU memory YJ Original data in frequency domain Saved in CPU memory Figure 3 27 Zoom process WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Zoom Zoom Range Available Data Expansion Factor All data available for display in the Waveform Analog FSK Waterfall or Spectrogram views is available for zoom When zoom runs the waveform enlarges by the specified factor along the time and frequency axes The zoom range depends on the block size number of frames and the span settings If you press the BLOCK key during data acquisition the resulting written data does not reach the set block size In this case the block size depends on the number of written frames and the span The magnification is as follows Table 3 11 Zoom range Mode Span
75. could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A WARNING Protective Ground CAUTION High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Manual WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual EI ns Service Safety Summary Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock disconnect the mains power by means of the power cord or if provided the power switch Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual xvii Service Safety Summary xviii WCA330
76. dB 3rd order intermodulation distortion 73 dBc Hires IF mode signal level lt 10dBfs 2 GHz 70 dBc Normal IF mode signal level lt 10dBfs 2 GHz 55 dBc Wide IF mode signal level lt 10dBfs 2 GHz Displayed average noise level Typical Baseband 153 dBm Hz 1 to 10 MHz Hires IF mode 150 dBm Hz 10 to 25 MHz 147 dBm Hz 25 M to 2 5 GHz 145 dBm Hz 2 5 to 3 GHz 142 dBm Hz 3 to 8 GHz WCA380 only Normal IF mode 147 dBm Hz 10 to 25 MHz 143 dBm Hz 25 MHz to 2 5 GHz 141 dBm Hz 2 5 to 3 GHz 140 dBm Hz 3 to 8 GHz WCA380 only Wide IF mode 140 dBm Hz 50 M to 3 GHz 140 dBm Hz 3 to 8 GHz WCA380 only Spectrum due to modulation for GSM 80 dBc 30 kHz RBW 1 2 MHz offset 78 dBc 100 kHz RBW 1 8 MHz offset 78 dBc 30 kHz RBW 1 2 MHz offset 78 dBc 30 kHz RBW 1 8 MHz offset 65 dB ACPR Configuration Spectrum due to switching transient for GSM ACPR W CDMA forward link crest factor 11dB Table B 6 Spurious response Typical Characteristic Description Image suppression 15 IF 75 dB RF for WCA330 RF1 for WCA380 center 1 5 GHz input 9 962 GHz 75 dB RF2 center 3 GHz input 11 462 GHz WCA380 only 70 dB RF3 center 5 GHz input 5 842 GHz WCA380 only 70 dB RF4 center 6 5 GHz input 5 658 GHz WCA380 only 2nd and 34 IF 80 dB RF for WCA330 RF1 for WCA380 Normal HiRes IF mode 75 dB RF2 3 4 Normal Hires IF mode WCA380 only 60 dB RF for WCA330
77. data register in which the symbol data currently being displayed is saved temporarily 2 80 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions EVM View Menu Table 2 15 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as EVM in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 Table 2 15 EVM view menu table Top level Format Mask Type Subordinate level options and descriptions Selects the display format For the detail refer to Error Vector Analysis Display on page 3 106 EVM Displays the error vector magnitude The vertical axis represents the percentage of error vector magnitude and the horizontal axis represents the time Mag Error Displays the amplitude error The vertical axis represents the percentage of amplitude error and the horizontal axis represents the time Phase Error Displays the phase error The vertical axis represents the percentage of phase error and the horizontal axis represents the time Selects the way to specify the mask area that is excluded from calculating EVM Percent Specifies the mask area with percent in the Mask Percent menu item described below Symbol Specifies the mask area with the symbol number in the Mask Left and Right menu item described below Mask Percent Specifies the mask area with percent on screen The range is 0 to 50 relative to full scale 0 excludes no area and 50 does whole area from the EVM calcu
78. default it is positioned at slot 0 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Searches for the peak spectrum in the specified time slot and positions the marker there Peak Searches the peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Max Searches for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Min Searches for the minimum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Separation Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks Refer to Separation in the Waveform view menu on page 2 68 Ver Inputs the slot number as the vertical position to move the marker By default it is positioned at slot 0 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Ver Mag Sets the number of vertical pixels to display one slot The range is 1 to 10 2 96 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions CodeWPolar View Menu Table 2 23 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CodeWPolar in the CONFIG VIEW menu This view displays IQ loci and chip positions according to the W CDMA standard For details on W CDMA analysis refer to page 3 127 Table 2 23 CodeWPolar view menu table Top level Source Analysis Time Slot Standard Manual Setup Subordinate level options and des
79. files or disks and enter necessary information on the Sharing tab Figure 3 103 shows a setting example to share a folder wea Properties General Sharing CN eE ed HEI Share Name wea Comment m Access Type Read Only C Full C Depends on Password Passwords Read Only Password Full Recess Password Cancel Figure 3 103 Setting for sharing a folder WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual _ See _eee Outputting Waveform Data You can output the data acquired in the analyzer to a printer hard disk and floppy disk in a screen hardcopy or text format for use in other applications such as creating a report with a word processor m Screen hard copy 02 ee ee eee page 3 202 m Outputting view data in text format page 3 206 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 201 Outputting Waveform Data Screen Hardcopy Outputting Data to a Printer You can make a hardcopy to a printer The Windows 98 application allows you to make a screen capture as a bit map file and store the file on a hard disk or a floppy Before you can print a hardcopy you have to connect a printer to the analyzer In addition you have to install the printer driver and set the default printer NOTE For the optional HP970Cxi printer the printer driver is factory installed For the optional accessories refer to Appendix A Connecting the Prin
80. for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Min Searches for the minimum peak spectrum and moves the marker there This item is available when Format is other than FreqAmpl WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 16 CDMAWaveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Separation Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks Same as Separation in the Waveform view menu on page 2 68 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other RBW Selects the resolution bandwidth RBW The default is 30 kHz When you select Off the input signal is displayed as is Measurement The measured value is displayed at the top left corner of the view Select one of the following for its mode Off Displays no measurement value Power Displays Power in band power and OBW occupied bandwidth For OBW the default power ratio between the carrier frequency domain and the whole span area is set to 99 by default which is the value specified in the IS 95 or T 53 standard It can be changed with Measurement Option OBW Refer to page 3 88 for the OBW measurement concept Refer to page 3 84 for the Power measurement concept Spurious In addition to Power and OBW above the eight detected spurious signal power and frequency positions are displayed Measurement You can change the fol
81. function Then you can set the frequency at the marker position to the center frequency 1 Press one of the VIEW A to D keys to select the view 2 Press the VIEW SRCH key The marker is positioned at the maximum peak spectrum Rotating the general purpose knob clockwise searches the peak spectrum rightward and places the marker there and vice versa 3 Press the Mkr gt Freq side key to set the marker frequency position to the center frequency Unless you ensure that the span setting which extends on either side of the new center frequency is still valid the frequency you set using this procedure may not take effect Refer to the following topic Buffering the Input Value Buffering the Input Value The frequency and span settings are stored into the buffer memory temporary Suppose that the frequency and span have been set to 1 5 GHz and 3 GHz respectively If you attempt to change the frequency to 800 MHz the value displayed in the Freq menu item returns to the initial value 1 5 GHz This is because you attempted to input a value that is inhibited as shown in Figure 3 4 The previously input 800 MHz frequency is saved and displayed in the Freq menu item when you select a valid span such as 200 MHz Most settings immediately affect the hardware The frequency and span settings are written into the buffer For possible combination of settings they are then reflected directly to the hardware If you attempt to input a value
82. horizontal axis is divided into 10 divisions Figure 2 5 View general display information 2 6 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Interface Maps Status and Setup Display This section shows the status display areas on the display screen and lists their details Status Display The status display areas on the display screen show the six status items listed in Table 2 1 on the next page Status messages are displayed in red or blue Those displayed in red are warning messages REMOTE UNCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE Hardware status display area i Setup status display area B aean VECTOR SEAMLESS Figure 2 6 Status display areas WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 7 Interface Maps 2 8 Table 2 1 Status display Items Display color Descriptions REMOTE If this field turns blue it indicates that key operations on the front panel are not available because of a remote operation UNCAL If this field turns red it indicates that the gain calibration is required Run the calibration refer to page 1 20 OVERLOAD If this field turns red it indicates an overvoltage input state TRIGGERED Grey Blue PAUSE Use the analyzer only while this field is gray If overvoltage input occurs lower the input level or change the hardware reference level setting refer to page 3 13 When the trigger is generated this field turns blue
83. in other three dimensional views Also change of a marker position in a view causes change of marker positions in other views View A 2 D View C 2 D Frame number Marker position Frame number Marker position Frame number Marker position Frame number Marker position View B 2 D View D 2 D View A 2 D View C 2 D Frame number Marker position Frame number Marker position Frame number Marker position Frame number Marker position View B 3 D View D 2 D If all of Views A to D are two dimensional when the display frame of View A is switched from 0 to 100 all display frames of Views B to D are also switched from 0 to 100 If View B is three dimensional and all other views are two dimensional when the display frame of View A is switched the display frames of Views C and D are also switched At this time the frame position of the marker displayed in View B moves together with the display frame of View A Figure 3 23 Linked views example To enable or disable view linking do the following procedure m Press the CONFIG VIEW key gt the Options side key gt the Marker Link side key and select On or Off On Views are linked default Off Views are independent 3 40 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Wave
84. in the VIEW area one view is displayed on the screen Use one of the view selection keys A B C and D keys to select the view to be displayed M O OG G O G 0 G 0 Figure 3 17 One view display Two View Display If you press the key in the VIEW area two views are displayed on the screen Up to two views can be displayed concurrently in the display area horizontally split into two parts as shown Figure 3 18 Use one of the view selection keys A B C and D keys to select two views to be displayed If the selected view is not defined the display area is empty MMM Yl one UG the View A C E and Cis displayed A KK N Y one of the View B D F and H is displayed WORE Figure 3 18 Two view display 3 34 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Waveform Data Four View Display Four views can be displayed at the same time There are two layouts If you press the key in the VIEW area 1 x 4 display results As shown in Figure 3 19 up to four views can be displayed concurrently in the display area horizontally split into four parts If you press the key in the VIEW area 2 x 2 display results As shown in Figure 3 20 up to four views can be displayed concurrently i
85. item appears when Average is set to Off Symbol Rate Composite 16k It is set to Composite by default that corresponds to multi rate 32k 64k 128k When you select the other specific value the measurement is done with the fixed rate 256k 512k 1024k Options Same as Options in the CodePower view menu on page 2 93 Average Options Sets the averaging parameters and starts the process Begin Slot Specifies the first slot to be averaged The range is 0 to the number of time slots 1 End Slot Specifies the last slot to be averaged The range is 0 to the number of time slots 1 Specifies that the averaging is done for all slots Mkr gt Slot Sets Begin Slot and End Slot with the marker and delta marker Average Type Same as Average Type above on the top menu level Executes averaging WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 99 Menu Functions 3gppACPView Menu Table 2 25 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as 3gppACP View in the CONFIG VIEW menu Use this view to measure ACP Adjacent Channel Leakage Power according to the 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project standard For details on 3GPP analysis refer to page 3 143 Table 2 25 3gppACPView menu table Top level Source Filter Average RBW Options 2 100 Subordinate level options and descriptions Selects input data for a view You can select one of the following items D1 to D8 Specifies one of
86. key and select On to fix the Center band power marker at center It is always On for the 3gppACPView You can move the marker independently Press the BW side key and input the bandwidth Press the SP side key and input the frequency interval between two adjacent channels You can display the Upper and Lower band power markers by selecting Band Power Markers Upper and Lower respectively WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement OBW Measurement This band power marker is represented by two vertical cursors used to determine the bandwidth It cannot be operated directly See Figure 3 50 Tp is the total power of the area represented by the frequency span The analyzer obtains the power region Xp for which the proportion to Tp equals the value set in Options Scale Marker Search Marker OBW Xp Pr X Tp 100 From Xp the analyzer obtains the bandwidth around the center frequency Center frequency analyzer center frequency L gt lt lt gt 100 Pr 2 power region Pr power region H power region lt gt Total power Tp Figure 3 50 Band power marker used for the OBW measurement To obtain OBW follow this procedure 1 From the view menu select Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement gt OBW 2 Align the carrier signal center frequency in the analyzer center frequency position 3 Press the OB
87. level displayed on the screen is the sum of the reference level actually processed by the analyzer and its offset This setting is required for example when an attenuator is connected externally This does not affect the reference level internally processed by the analyzer Usually set this value to zero Reference Osc Selects a reference clock External When you want the analyzer to operate on the same clock as other devices use the 10 MHz sine wave between 10 dBm and 6 dBm input through the 10 MHz REF INPUT connector on the rear panel Internal The internal reference clock for the analyzer 10 MHz sine wave is used Sets a frame period The frame period is valid when data is acquired in the block mode with the memory mode set to Frequency or Dual In the Zoom mode this setting is ignored and is not displayed as a menu item because the frame period is so set that frames are continuous in the temporal aspect For details on the frame period refer to page 3 25 Specifies the number of frames when data is acquired in the block mode When you press the BLOCK key data is acquired in frames for the block size specified here and then displayed Refer to Setting the Block Size on page 3 22 for details Sets up a trigger The trigger function is available only for the Block mode In the Roll mode this setting is ignored and data is acquired continuously Refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for details Mode Selects the trigger mo
88. marker required for these types of measurement For how to operate markers refer to page 3 45 This menu item is displayed when you select ACP for Measurement This marker is ACP measurement specific For how to operate markers refer to page 3 45 This menu item is displayed when you select OBW for Measurement Set the ratio of the power in the specified band region to the power in the entire span region marker there Searches the peak spectrum and moves the marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Searches for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the O marker there WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Searches for the minimum peak spectrum and moves the marker there This item is available when Format is other than FreqAmpl Menu Functions Table 2 7 Waveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Separation Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks The range is 0 to 10 full scale 100 When you set Separation to say 10 if the distance between the two peaks accounts for 10 or more of the full scale these peaks are recognized as separate See Figure 2 47 below Trace Selects either Trace 1 or Trace 2 for the waveform you operate with a marker Trace 2 specifies the waveform selected in the Source Trace2 submenu Delta Ma
89. page 3 5 2 48 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 3 CONFIG menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Makes basic settings compliant to the 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project standard Choose one of the following ACP Performs measurement analysis and display of ACP Adjacent Channel Leak Power Down Link Performs measurement analysis and display of down link signals CCDF Configures the analyzer for the CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function measurement Refer to CCDF Analysis on page 3 165 CDMA Configures the analyzer for ARIB T 53 and IS 95 standard compliant CDMA analysis IS 95 T 53 Select one of the following three EVM Rho Performs measurement analysis and display of Error Vector Magnitude EVM RHO p meters frequency errors and origin offset errors Spurious Performs measurement analysis and display of signal power OBW and spurious characteristics Time Domain Performs measurement analysis and display of the time characteristics of burst signals cdmaOne Configures the analyzer for analyzing cdmaOne forward link signals Fwd Link Refer to cdmaOne analysis on page 3 127 W CDMA Make basic settings for analyzing W Wideband CDMA down link signals Down Link Refer to W CDMA analysis on page 3 135 Digital Demod Configures the analyzer for observing digitally modulated signals External Sync Configures th
90. peak search and zoom functions Using delta markers Powering down These procedures assume that the installation procedure beginning on page 1 9 has already been completed WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 19 Tutorial Preparations Prepare the following equipment for use in the examples m Digitally modulated signal generator Recommended signal generator Rohde amp Schwartz SMIQ m One 50 Q coaxial cable Connecting the Signal Generator 1 Connect the standard mouse to the rear panel connector of the analyzer Refer to Connecting the Mouse on page 1 11 2 Connect the signal generator output through the cable to the RF INPUT connector on the front panel see Figure 2 19 e EXT TRIG RF INPUT OPER oi TTL 50N max 30dBm RF INPUT N type connector Figure 2 19 Cable connection 2 20 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial 3 Set the signal generator as follows Center frequency 800 MHz Modulation PDC modulation system Symbol rate 21 kHz Fiet perrea Euin wen Rate Root Raised Cosine OB ME 0 5 Output level 10 dBm Modulation data Applying Power 1 Power up the signal generator 2 Press the principal power switch found on the rear panel of the analyzer then press the power swit
91. pikal i i 4 A i i A Thinning out data Compression Bin O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 Frame n Invalid data Valid data lt Invalid data gt Figure 3 24 Relationship among frame bin and pixel There are four compression types Sample Max Min and MinMax see Figure 3 25 MinMax is commonly used When the horizontal and vertical axes represent frequency and amplitude respectively the format is set to FreqAmple Max is used In the following views when you select one of the data register D1 to D8 for the view source you can select a compression method in the Compression menu Waveform view Spectrogram view Waterfall view CDMAWaveform view WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Waveform Data Sample Removes pixel data at regular intervals Pixel data on screen Acquired data points gt Max Removes the maximum data point for the rt a E corresponding pixel Pixel data on screen gt Acquired data points gt Min Removes the minimum data point for the corresponding pixel Pixel data on screen a Acquired data points MinMax Removes the minimum and maximum T Q data points for the corresponding pixel The minimum and maximum are connected with a line Pixel data on screen Acquired data points z Figure 3 25 Display data compression method 3 43 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Waveform Data 3 44 WCA330 amp WC
92. required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal Specifies 1 4 71 Shift QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying modulation Specifies BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying modulation QPSK Specifies QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying modulation 8PSK Specifies 8PSK Phase Shift Keying modulation 16QAM Specifies 16QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation 64QAM Specifies 64QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation 256QAM Specifies 256QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation GMSK Specifies GMSK Gaussian filtered Minimum Shift Keying modulation GFSK Specifies GFSK Gaussian filtered Frequency Shift Keying modulation CDMA _OQPSK Specifies CDMA OQPSK Offset QPSK used in the IS 95 standard 2 86 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 17 CDMAPolar view menu table cont Top level Burst Mask Options Subordinate level options and descriptions Symbol Rate Inputs the symbol rate required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal There is the following relationship between the symbol and bit rates Symbol rate Bit rate x 1 state Number of bits Measurement Selects None no filter RootRaisedCosine or IS95 for the filter required to demodulate the Filter digitally modulated signal Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Reference Selects None no filter RaisedCosine Gaussian or 1S95 for the filter required to create Filter refer
93. select 1 to 777 for the channel number Channels 1 and 777 correspond to 825 03 and 848 31 MHz respectively The frequency difference between two adjacent channels is 0 03 MHz For T 53 you can select 1 to 1199 for the channel number Channels 1 and 1199 correspond to 915 0125 and 888 9875 MHz respectively The frequency difference between two adjacent channels is 0 0125 MHz 3G 2G 1G 500M Selects a predefined span This value depends on the input mode 200M 100M 50M Baseband mode 100 Hz to 10 MHz in 1 2 5 steps 30M 20M 10M RF mode 100 Hz to 3 GHz in 1 2 5 steps 6M 5M 2M 1M IQ and Wide modes 10 MHz 20 MHz or 30 MHz 500k 200k 100k ein arte A If you press the Max Span side key the maximum span is set 5k 2k 1k Refer to Frequency and Span on page 3 9 for details 500 200 100 Sets a reference level It must be greater than the maximum level of an input signal If an overload occurs the measured data will be invalid Refer to Reference Level on page 3 13 for details MaxSpan Sets the maximum span Reference Osc Selects Internal or External for the reference clock Same as Reference Osc in SETUP Standard menu on page 2 56 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 59 Menu Functions Table 2 5 SETUP CDMA menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions 30MHz Span Sets the span to 30 MHz when Standard is IS 95 50MHz Span Sets the span to 50 MHz when Standard is T 53 5MHz S
94. set the acquisition stops after the specified number of blocks is acquired Refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for trigger details In the Block mode you can set a time interval between a frame data acquisition and the next acquisition called frame period Frames can be acquired continuously or overlapped Refer to Frame Period and Real Time on page 3 25 for detail Acquire Acquire Acquire Roll mode one frame Display one frame Display one frame Display gt Time Repeat by trigger count Block mode Acquire one block N frames Display gt Time Figure 3 8 Roll mode and Block mode WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 21 Acquiring Data Setting the Block Size When you acquire data in the Block mode set a block size The block size is the number of frames per block see Figure 3 9 Frame 0 Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame N 1 Figure 3 9 Relationship between the block size and frames Set the block size with the following steps 1 Press SETUP MAIN gt Block Size Block Size N frames 2 Turn the general purpose knob to select the block size The default is 200 The block size setting range depends on the memory mode and FFT points as shown in Table 3 8 Table 3 8 Block size setting range FFT points Memory mode Block size 256 Frequency 1 to 16000 frames Frequency 1 to 4000 frames 1024 Dual 1 to 2000 frames
95. set with Trigger Delayed Data acquisition Display Time Specified time The point at which the trigger occurs after you press the BLOCK key Figure 3 33 Delayed trigger Timeout The analyzer acquires data when no trigger is generated for a certain period If trigger events occur repeatedly for a certain period analyzer does not acquire data and waits This setting is valid when specifying an internal trigger source The timeout value is set with Trigger Timeout Waiting while acquiring data Display A l Specified time ime ae Trigger events generated Point at which you Timeout press the BLOCK key Figure 3 34 Timeout trigger WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 67 Trigger Interval The analyzer repeats data acquisition and display at a regular interval The interval value is set with Trigger Interval Data Data acquisition Display acquisition Display gt e Specified time gt Time The point at which you press the BLOCK key Figure 3 35 Interval trigger Quick Same as Normal except that the analyzer acquires all the blocks and then displays them Data Data Data acquisition acquisition acquisition Display Time The point at which the trigger occurs after you press the BLOCK key Figure 3 36 Quick trigger 3 68 WCA330 am
96. sued oi arbiteb aotiden bent beds he ahs PES a OS 2 111 CODEF Ment y 3 94 sekth eek tb bed tbs mod dad bee gabe ds weeks eked 2 112 CEDEView MENU ix i Sci snd 2 5 fot earth wads ented be ee MoE BRE 2 114 AutoSave Ment sipe isete 25 bobbie arbi 4 yoni ented t hohe oe aOR EES WERE RES 2 115 seltCal UGA MENU 6 isd 25 sb eremit leotak se eotdad gt bowen S Sens And Ree 2 116 SaveLoad Util B Menu 0 een nee 2 117 Average Ut Men rriti ot d oe antibod t rane Sent 4 hho ee PES BOO 2 118 File ACCESS MEDU cuei lied t odd ie barbie 4 oe hie uted 4 hohe oe aOR Wee BEN 2 119 Print Meni seius feted elon uek fin he arth eb ees tee Abd Sane WOES S EE 2 120 Changing the Power Up Settings 0 0 00 kE Euta eee eee eee 2 121 ii WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents Reference Input and Memory Modes 06 Selecting the Input Frequency Band Selecting the IF Mode 0 0 0 0 00 2b eee Memory Modes Scalar Frequency Dual and Zoom Setting the Mode 0 00 cee eee ee eee Mode Summary 0 0 eee eee ee Frequency and Span cece cece ee eeee Setting Frequency and Span 00 00000 Setting the Frequency with the Marker and Search Buffering the Input Value 0 0 00 ce eee eee ee Reference Level cc ccc cccccccccsscees Setting the Reference Level 0004 Ove
97. the contents of this file to restore the saved instrument settings Save Save the settings in a file 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key 2 Press the Save To File CFG side key The file access menu appears Select the destination drive and directory for save Set the file name not including the extension and save the file Refer to Operating File Access Menu on page 3 178 for detail Load Load the file and set up the 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key 2 Press the Load From File CFG side key The file access menu appears Select the drive and directory in which the file is located and load it Refer to File Menu Operations on page 3 178 for detail WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Data File 1Q AP The data file transfers the IQ or AP formatted data between the data memory and a file Save You can save the data residing in the data memory using the Save function in the UTILITY When the data is saved part of the setting information is saved to allow the data to be displayed normally when being loaded 1 Display the SaveLoad menu a Press the CONFIG UTILITY key b Press the Util B Save Load side key c Press the Save side key 2 Press the Source side key to select the data source If you select Active the data in the data memory will be saved If the data has been zoomed you can save it by selecting Zoom 3 Select the frame range you want to save with one of the following ways m D
98. the Symbol Rate side key to input the symbol rate Press the Measurement Filter side key to select either None no filter or RootRaisedCosine for the measurement filter Press the Reference Filter side key to select None no filter RaisedCosine or Gaussian for the Reference filter Press the Alpha BT side key to input the a BT value Now the settings are complete The EVM phase error vector and eye diagrams can be displayed Then press the ROLL or BLOCK key to acquire data WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 101 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Vector and Constellation Displays The Polar view displays the digitally modulated signal in the vector or constella tion form Select Format gt Vector or Constellation in the Polar view Vector Display The vector display uses the polar coordinate or IQ diagram to display signals represented by the phase and amplitude Figure 3 53 left is an example showing a vector display of the signal in the 1 4 mn QPSK modulation The red points show the measurement symbol positions The green trace shows the locus of shifts between symbols Each point through which multiple concentrated traces pass corresponds to the symbol of the measurement signal You can estimate the error vector size by comparing such points with the red points The cross hairs show the symbol positions of the ideal signal Note that the symbol is not shown in the vector form in the CDMAPolar
99. the following characteristics when selecting a window for your purpose m Frequency resolution is improved by reducing the width of the main lobe window m Accuracy of the amplitude levels of frequency components is improved by reducing side lobe level relative to the main lobe WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual FFT Parameters Setting FFT Parameters Uses the following procedure to set FFT parameters 1 Press the SETUP MAIN key gt the Memory Mode Input FFT side key 2 Select the FFT type a Press the FFT Type side key b Turn the rotary knob to select HW or SW 3 Select the number of FFT points a Press the FFT Points side key b Turn the rotary knob to select 1024 or 256 4 Select the FFT window a Press the FFT Window side key b Turn the rotary knob to select the FFT window WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 19 FFT Parameters 3 20 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Acquiring Data There are two ways to acquire and display data Roll mode and Block mode In the Block mode you can select the block size Roll Mode and Block Mode You can acquire data with the Roll or Block mode see Figure 3 8 Roll Mode In the Roll mode the captured data is written into the data memory frame by frame while being displayed one frame has 256 or 1024 data points The trigger is not available Block Mode In the Block mode the acquisition stops upon completion one block acquisition If the trigger has been
100. the remaining lower bits are set to 0 If this length is less than that of the user defined word the remaining lower bits are ignored Sets the sync word position in bits for waveform display See Figure 2 50 For the GSM measurement the analyzer always set it to 61 default Sets the data length in bits for analysis and display See Figure 2 50 For the GSM measurement the analyzer always set it to 148 default WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 109 Menu Functions Table 2 28 GSMPolar view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Options Display Selects the measurement or reference data for display Same as Display in the Polar view menu on page 2 78 NOTE Use the default setting Measurement for the GSM measurement Format Selects the vector or constellation format for display Same as Format in the Polar view menu on page 2 78 NOTE Use the default setting Vector for the GSM measurement Marker Inputs the time to move the O marker Position Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed after a trigger event If this frame number agrees with the trigger position specified with Setup Trigger gt Pos the frame for which a trigger is generated is displayed By default Position is set to zero current frame Sync Word Length lt Sync Word Position gt _ _ gt Data stream lt Sync word lt Analysis Length gt
101. the symbol number to display the IQ locus The default is symbol 0 which contains the latest data Configures the analyzer according to the standard digitally modulating system settings IS 95 Configures the modulating system according to IS 95 without equalizer IS 95 EQ Configures the modulating system according to IS 95 with equalizer Sets the modulating system symbol rate filter and a BT manually Modulation Selects the modulating system required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal IS 95 Selects IS 95 without equalizer IS 95 EQ Selects IS 95 with equalizer Chip Rate Inputs the chip rate to demodulate the digitally modulated signal The value must be 1 2288M Measurement Selects the filter required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal You can select either Filter None no filter or RootRaisedCosine Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Reference Filter Selects None no filter RaisedCosine Gaussian or IS95 for the filter required for creating reference data Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Alpha BT Inputs the a BT value Auto Carrier Determines whether to search the carrier automatically Same as Auto Carrier in the Polar view menu on page 2 77 Options Analyze 2 92 Display The polar view can display either measurement data or a reference signal which has been demodulated and modulated in this view Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Me
102. the trigger register which contains a trigger mask pattern is used For how to create trigger mask patterns refer to page 3 75 For the external trigger a trigger is caused by the rising edge of a signal input through the EXT TRIG connector on the front panel Setting m Press SETUP MAIN gt Trigger Source and select either Internal internal source or External external source Trigger Domain You can generate a trigger in the time or frequency domain Setting A trigger domain is set automatically under the following conditions m With Format set to FreqAmpl in the Waveform view the trigger domain is automatically set to the frequency domain when you press the Draw Max Draw Line Draw Min or Draw Horizontal side key in the Edit submenu to create a trigger mask pattern With Format set to TimeAmple in the Waveform view the trigger domain is automatically set to the time domain when you do the same operations Use the following procedure to set the trigger domain manually m Press SETUP MAIN gt Trigger Domain and select Time time domain or Frequency frequency domain Trigger Slope With the trigger source set to Internal and the trigger slope set to Rise the trigger occurs when a signal exits the blue area of a trigger mask pattern and enters into black area Likewise with the trigger slope set to Fall the trigger occurs when a signal exits the black area and enters into blue area With the trigger source se
103. view Constellation Display Figure 3 53 right shows a constellation display example Like the vector display the constellation shows the signal in the polar coordinate or IQ diagram However the constellation shows only the measurement signal symbols in red without displaying the symbol to symbol locus View C Active 1 4PI QPSK Measurement 97 11 21 14 2 View C Active 1 4PI OPSK Measurement 97 11 21 14 2 c Marker 0 057s 1 058 1 883deg 1 5 By 9 Frequency error Origin offset 300m div Vector display Constellation display Figure 3 53 Vector and constellation display examples 3 102 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal On the upper left corner of the view Freq Err frequency error and Origin Offset are displayed m Freq Err indicates the difference between the center frequency of the analyzer and the carrier frequency of the signal Match the center frequency and the carrier frequency by setting the center frequency to the value of Current center frequency Freq Err m Origin Offset indicates the shift of the origin of the polar coordinate for the ideal signal from that for the measurement signal All the signals and measurement data in the Polar view are displayed after the origin shift has been corrected The Polar view can display the ideal signal as well as the measurement data Select Display gt Measurement measurement data or Refer
104. without labels do not cause any response Figure 2 13 Examples of lower menu item display WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 15 Menu Operations Selection and Numeric Input Figure 2 14 shows the configurations of a menu item that requires selection or numeric input Selection menu item Block Size Mi Indicates that a drop down listing will be displayed Numeric input menu item Frame Period s Figure 2 14 Menu items requiring selection or numeric input Selecting an ltem Use the following procedures to select an item 1 Press the associated side key The menu item changes to the display as shown in Figure 2 15 below lt _ Indicates that the menu item is currently selected and the general purpose knob and the amp and keys are available Block Size m Indicates that the drop down listing will be displayed J eS e Drop down listing Select an item using the general purpose knob or the amp and Y keys B gt a 40 x Figure 2 15 Drop down list for selecting an item 2 Turn the general purpose knob to move the blue item within the drop down listing and select an item Alternatively you can use the amp and keys for the selection 2 16 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Operations 3 Press the side key again to finish the selection You can also use the ENTER dBm key in the ke
105. 0 m 4m 4m 4m 40m 100 m 200 m 156 25 312 5 m 1 25 3 125 m 320 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 641 The frame period is set with multiplying this value by an integer Max 60 s Fixed in Zoom mode frame length FFT is always running for each minimum frame period in the frequency mode Measured with the setting of frame period frame length Rectangular of the FFT window is selected RF mode only 1 2 5 steps in the range of 10 MHz to 3 GHz plus 30 MHz and 3 GHz 800xN 1 N Span 5 MHz Baseband mode only WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 6 200xN 1 N Span 5 MHz D 1 Appendix D Frequency and Time Resolution Table D 2 Frequency and time resolution IF mode Wide 1 Frame length Span Hz s 30 M 20M 10M 50u Maximum Frame period measurement time s 50u 100m Frequency resolution Hz 20k The number of bins within Time resolution s a span 24 4140625n 40 96 M 751 24 4140625n 40 96 M 501 48 828125n 20 48 M 501 1 The FFT point is 1024 only 2 Frame period Frame length fixed in the Zoom mode D 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix E Mouse Operations With a mouse connected to the analyzer you can perform all the menu opera tions for the analyzer With a keyboard connected to the analyzer you can more easily enter numeric values and file names LJ Solomon Panel SETUP VIEW 9
106. 1 D1D2 to D7D8 Specifies a register pair for an input source The digitally modulated signal demodulated in the Polar view is written into the register pair To display the spectrum of a demodulated digitally modulated signal use a register pair as the input signal For demodulation of digitally modulated signals refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 D1 to D8 Specifies one of the data registers of D1 to D8 for an input source You should have copied the data to this register using Options Copy To in other view menus or Util C Average on the utility menu File 1Q Specifies the IQ formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 File AP Specifies the AP formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Defines the horizontal and vertical axes Same as Format in the Waveform view menu on page 2 64 Selects the display data compression method Same as Format in the Waveform view menu on page 2 64 Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written If you select Average for the above Source frame selection is meaningless this item disappears from the menu Selects an average type Same as Average Type in the Waveform view menu on page 2 64 For details on averaging refer to Average and Peak Hold on page 3 5
107. 1 WCA330 WCA380 wireless communication analyzer WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 1 Product Overview Features The analyzer has the following features 1 2 Measurement frequency range DC to 3 GHz for the WCA330 DC to 8 GHz for the WCA380 Measurement span 100 Hz to 3 GHz Concurrent processing of real time frequency and modulation analysis Digital zoom function 2 to 1000 times expansion of frequency Concurrent analysis and display of frequency and time domain data Abundant trigger functions frequency mask level and external triggers Power analysis noise power C N C No ACP and OBW Digitally modulated signal analysis Maximum span of 30 MHz CDMA analysis IS 95 standard Ability to display 17 types of analysis results Spectrum display frequency vs level or phase Spectrogram display frequency vs level or phase vs time Waterfall display time vs modulation factor phase or frequency Analog demodulation display time vs modulation factor phase or frequency FSK demodulation view time vs frequency Constellation vector display digital demodulation EYE diagram display Symbol table display EVM Rho analysis display IS 95 standard Spurious analysis display IS 95 standard Time characteristics analysis display IS 95 standard Code domain power W CDMA standard Time vs channel power W CDMA standard Code domain power spectrum W CDMA standard ACP measurement W CDMA standard CCDF display CCDF me
108. 1 for WCA380 with the general purpose knob c Press the IF Mode side key to select the following mode with the general purpose knob m HiRes for ACP m Wide for Down Link 4 Set the frequency span and reference level a Press the SETUP FREQ key b Press the Span side key to enter 1 5 GHz using the keypad c Press the Span side key to enter the following value using the keypad m 15 MHz for ACP m 10 MHz for Down Link d Press the Ref side key to enter 0 dBm using the keypad C 10 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix D Frequency and Time Resolution Table D 1 Frequency and time resolution Frame length Table D 1 shows the relation between span frame length frame period maximum measurement time and frequency and time resolution Minimum frame period s 80 u 80 u 160 u 160 u IF mode Normal HiRes Maximum measurement Frequency time s 2 resolution Hz Dual 256 Freq Dual Freq Zoom 1024 256 Time resolution s The number of bins within a span 1024 256 fesk k l 5 8 20u 320m 125k 50k 78 125n 128M 801 201 320m 125k 78 125n 128M 481 1 5625 k 201 161 161 781 25 161 312 5 161 ros fa fs 105 atau sok oer T 10m 160m 20m om 20m 2500 120 15605 eas fosu ise fon 50m 6400 100m 32 m 128 m 1 28 3 2 8m 16m 32 m 320 m 800 m 1 6 2m 2m 2m 20m 50m 10
109. 1 5 GHz You must go on and set the span before the new center frequency 800 MHz is available For details refer to Buffering the Input Values on page 3 11 The MHz s kHz ms Hz us and ENTER dBm keys function in the same manner as the ENTER key They establish the numeric value you typed in When you press any of these keys the hardware is immediately set up with the values you selected If you type in an erroneous digit correct it using the BS back space or CLEAR key You can also change the numeric value using the general purpose knob or the amp and keys in the ENTRY area See Figure 2 30 pm ENTRY 7 8 9 MHz s 4 5 6 kHz ms The unit keys also function as the ENTER key ni The typed in numeric value is immediately Numeric input key gt i 1 2 3 Hz ys established by pressing any of these keys l 0 A lt Increments or decrements the value in the CLEAR BS ENTER dBm V numeric value input field Clear all characters from an input field gt or dismiss the drop down list LU Clear the character preceding the caret or clear the field being displayed in blue Figure 2 30 Numeric input keypad WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 29 Tutorial Changing the Span The currently displayed menu indicates that the span is set to the default value 3 GHz Change it to 100 kHz 1 Press the Span side k
110. 170 Center 1 899 931 25GHz View B Active Freqampl 97 11 17 20 19 06 Marker 1 899 756 25GHz 49 385dBm_ 170frame_ 19 9435 Ver Start 255 frame frame o dBm Options Center 1 899 931 25GHz Sp 1OMHz Span 10MHz Ref OdBm VECTOR REALTIME RF Freq AC Blackman 1024 80u 200 Auto On 1 Freq Int Rise 50 When you click in the specified area on the screen the contents of the side menu change Figure E 5 Selecting menus using the mouse WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual E 7 Appendix E Mouse Operations Moving the Marker and When you click on any point in the waveform display area the primary marker Selecting a Frame moves as follows In two dimensional views such as the Waveform view the marker moves on the waveform with the horizontal position determined by the click point m In three dimensional views such as the Spectrogram view the marker moves to the click point The frame on which you click is selected The associated two dimensional view changes to the selected frame data You can also move the primary marker continuously by dragging it as follows 1 Move the mouse pointer to the marker and press the left mouse button 2 Move the pointer to the desired position while holding down the button and then release it For the delta marker you can move only the O marker using the mouse Refer to Marker Operations and Peak Search on page 3 45 and Changing Display Frames on page 3 38 fo
111. 3 22 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Acquiring Data Starting Stopping Data Acquisition Roll Mode Press the ROLL key on the front panel to start the data acquisition in the Roll mode See Figure 3 10 When you press the ROLL key again the acquisition stops NOTE The trigger cannot be used in the Roll mode Acquire data with the Roll mode Acquire data with the Block mode Co STARTIS IP ay PRINT ROLL BLOCK CI Figure 3 10 ROLL key and BLOCK key Block Mode Press the BLOCK key on the front panel to start the data acquisition in the Block mode In the Block mode the acquisition stops upon completion of one block If the trigger has been set the acquisition stops after the specified number of blocks is acquired Refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for trigger details If you press the BLOCK key again while the data acquisition is in progress the acquisition stops and only the acquired frame data is displayed One block data may not be acquired in this way NOTE In the RF mode when you set the span to 10 MHz or larger the Roll mode operates even if you press the BLOCK key In the Baseband mode whenever you press the BLOCK key the Block mode operates WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 23 Acquiring Data 3 24 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual _ Se a SS aes Frame Period and Real Time The frame period settings are important when data is acquired i
112. 3 74 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Example of a trigger mask pattern with a shifted Noise measurement example Power measurement example C N and C No measurement examples ACP measurement example 00eeeeeeees OBW measurement example ceeceeeees Power measurement band power marker ACP measurement band power marker Band power marker used for the OBW measurement Display examples of analog signal demodulation Digital modulation signal flow 500 Vector and constellation display examples Vector and Eye diagram display examples Symbol table display example 2 000 EVM view display examples e0 0e00 1 4 Tt QPSK constellation display example and error Example display of FSK modulation signal CDMA analysis with the EVM Rho basic CDMA analysis with the Spurious basic configuration CDMA analysis with the Spurious basic configuration Default specified line when RBW 30 k Default specified line when RBW 1 M CDMA analysis with the Time Domain basic Default mask area Analyzing rising and falling characteristics in detail Code domain power spectrogram Constellation Code domain power Analyzing a transient signal Code domain power spectrogram Symbol constellation Code domain power Symbol power Table of Contents Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80
113. 40Bm 100 dBm Center 837 5MHz Span 30MHz Figure 3 60 CDMA analysis with the Spurious basic configuration 30 MHz span WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CDMA Analysis View Contents Views A and B use the CDMAWaveform view By default the two views show the same results with the same settings In Figure 3 60 the RBW for View B is set to 1 MHz With the RBW resolution bandwidth set to 30 kHz or 1 MHz the in band power values are calculated from the input signal The waveform displayed in the view is created by plotting these values in each frequency position The red line is the Specified Line from IS 95 and T 53 The displayed spectrum must be inside this line When you set the RBW menu item to Off the input signal itself is displayed but the Specified Line disappears The Power in band power and OBW occupied bandwidth values for the input signal are listed at the top left corner of the view Refer to Power Measurement on page 3 81 for detail about the definitions of Power and OBW Each number enclosed in yellow lines called a number tag indicates a spurious signal position The eight strongest spurious signals can be selected and numbered in frequency or level order The selection is made by searching the signals outside the red base line with the strongest area see Figure 3 60 Information about each spurious signal having the number tag is displayed in each view in the following format Number Fail inform
114. 50 Hz power cord A4 North American power 220 V 60 Hz power cord cord A5 Switzerland power cord 220 V 50 Hz power cord AC China power cord 220 V 10A 50 Hz power cord A99 No power cord 1R Rackmount Spectrum Analyzer comes configured for installation in a 19 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual inch wide instrument rack For later field conversions order kit 016 1754 XX A 1 Appendix A Options and Accessories Standard Accessories Optional Accessories The analyzer comes standard with the accessories listed in Table A 2 Table A 2 Standard accessories Accessory Part number User manual 070 A752 XX Programmer manual 070 A754 XX U S power cord 161 0066 XX Keyboard 119 B061 XX Mouse 119 B063 XX BNC N adapter 103 0045 XX You can also order the optional accessories listed in Table A 3 Table A 3 Optional accessories Accessory Part number 070 A755 XX 016 1754 XX Data display and analysis software for PC SL7PCW3 Service manual Rack mount kit for field conversion A 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual eee E _ Appendix B Specifications This appendix lists the electrical physical and environmental characteristics of the analyzer and specifies the performance requirements for those characteris tics The specifications are common to the WCA330 and WCA380 unless otherwise noted WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual B 1 Appendix B Specifi
115. 50 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Wide RF2 WCA380 2 5 GHz to 3 5 GHz RF3 WCA380 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz RF4 WCA380 5 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz IQ Use the 1 Q signals from the rear IQ input connectors 3 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Input and Memory Modes Baseband Mode This mode can process data within a span of DC to 10 MHz the number of FFT points 1024 or 5 MHz the number of FFT points 256 per frame This mode does not use the internal down converter RF Mode This mode uses the internal down converter to process 10 MHz to 3 GHz for WCA330 8 GHz for WCA380 signals Generally with a span of up to 6 MHz data is acquired in one logical frame by one scan If a span is greater than 6 MHz data is acquired in one frame by two or more scans The analyzer is configured to process data within a span of up to 3 GHz For example if the span is set to 3 GHz data is acquired in one logical frame by 600 scans NOTE Physical Frame and Logical Frame There are two types of frame physical frame containing scanned data and logical frame containing display data In the RF mode with the span above 6 MHz one logical frame consists of several physical frames With the span below 6 MHz one physical frame corresponds to one logical frame called Vector mode IQ Mode I and Q signals input through the I and Q INPUT connectors on the rear panel are processed by the wide bandwidth signal processing Spans can be expanded to 30 MHz
116. 6 Hz 10A 1 500 Vrms 50 Hz for 15 s without breakdown Verify continuity of grounding connection by any suitable means between a representative part required to be grounding and attachment plug cap grounding pin 0 1 Q at 30 A Maximum power dissipation fully loaded 350 W max Maximum line current is 5 Arms at 50Hz 90V line with 5 clipping Surge current Maximum 30 A peak at 25 C for lt 5 line cycles after product has been turned off for at least 30 s WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual B 11 Appendix B Specifications Physical Characteristics Table B 19 Physical Characteristic Description Width 430 mm 16 9 in without belts Height 270 mm 10 6 in without feet Length 600 mm 23 6 in without connectors and fan cover Net weight 31 kg Environmental Characteristics Table B 20 Environmental Characteristic Description Temperature Operating 5 C to 40 C floppy not used 10 C to 40 C floppy in use Non operating 20 C to 60 C Humidity Operating and non operating 80 no condensation Maximum wet bulb temperature 29 C Altitude Operating To 3 000 m 10 000 ft Non operating To 12 000 m 40 000 ft Random vibration Operating 0 27 g 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis Non operating 2 28 g 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis Shock Non operating 20 g half sine 11 ms duration 3 shocks per axis in each direction 18 shocks total Cooling cleara
117. 7 Specifies the number of frames to be averaged Same as Num Averages in the Waveform view menu on page 2 64 Options Mask Sets up a mask to make PASS FAIL decision for the displayed waveform The default values meet the IS 95 standard For detail refer to Specified Line Settings on page 3 119 Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Same as Display Lines in the Waveform view menu on page 2 65 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 83 Menu Functions Table 2 16 CDMAWaveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Copy To Copies the waveform currently being displayed to one of the destinations Same as Copy To in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Copy From Loads text data from the file to which the waveform was copied using Copy To This menu item appears only when you select a register of D1 to D8 for Source Position Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed after a trigger event If this frame number agrees with the trigger position specified with Setup Trigger Pos the frame for which a trigger is generated is displayed By default Position is set to zero the current frame Hold Ver Scale Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the vertical axis when you change the input source Same as Hold Ver Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Scale Marker Search
118. 79 480 lt 543 dummy data gt 0 1 2 237 238 239 501 250 251 252 498 499 500 lt 523 dummy data gt 0 1 2 247 248 249 641 320 321 322 638 639 640 lt 383 dummy data gt 0 1 2 317 318 319 751 375 376 377 748 749 750 lt 273 dummy data gt 0 1 2 372 373 374 801 400 401 402 798 799 800 lt 223 dummy data gt 0 1 2 397 398 399 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 191 File Operations Definition of Bin The bin is defined as the following structure AP format data struct apBin_st short a short p IQ format data struct iqBin_st short q short i j Definition of frame The frame is defined as the following structure AP format 1024 bins struct apFrame1024_st struct apBin_st ap 1024 3 IQ format 1024 bins struct iqFrame1024_st struct iqBin_st 1q 1024 3 AP format 256 bins struct apFrame256_st struct apBin_st ap 256 IQ format 256 bins struct iqFrame256_st struct iqBin_st iq 256 3 3 192 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Calculation of Data All the data of amplitude phase I and Q are transformed to 2 byte signed integers then written on the file Amplitude For the APT or AP file the amplitude is calculated using a with this formula Amplitude a 128 GainOffset MaxInputLevel dBm For the IQT file the amplitude is calculated using i and q with this formula Amplit
119. 79 SymbolTable view menu table ceeeeeeee 2 80 EVM view menu table cece ewes cece e nes 2 81 CDMAWaveform view menu table 006 2 83 CDMAPolar view menu table ceeeeeeee 2 86 CDMATime view menu table ceeeeeeee 2 88 CodeSpectrogram view menu table 06 2 91 CodePolar view menu table 0 cece ewes 2 92 CodePower view menu table ee eee 2 93 CodeWSpectrogram view menu table 2 96 CodeWPolar view menu table ee eeee 2 97 CodeWPower view menu table 00000 2 99 3gppACPView menu table 0 cece eee eee 2 100 3gppPolar view menu table eee e ee eeee 2 104 GSM view menu table cece cece cece eee 2 107 GSMpPolar view menu table cece ee ewes 2 108 GSMMask menu table 2 cece cee c cece cece 2 111 CCDF menu table ccc ccc cece cece cence 2 113 CCDFView menu table cece cee e cc ecees 2 114 AutoSave menu table 0 cece cece cece ewes 2 115 SelfCal menu table 0 ccc cece ce eee eee cees 2 116 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents Table 2 34 SaveLoad menu table cc cece wee renee 2 117 Table 2 35 Average menu table cc ccc cece ccc e ce eeenes 2 118 Table 2 36 File Access menu table cee eee wee renee 2 119 Table 2 37 Print menu table cc cece eee eee e eee en
120. 794 XX standard accessory explains how to use the script language and how to use GPIB commands The script language allows you to allocate a custom function to a menu key of the analyzer and perform automatic measurement GPIB commands allow you to control the instrument from a PC remotely WCA330 and WCA380 Service Manual 070 A795 XX optional accessory describes how to verify the characteristics of adjust disassemble assemble and troubleshoot the analyzer and contains the information required for repair including module replacement and calibration This manual uses the following conventions Front panel button and control labels are printed in the manual in upper case text For example ROLL BLOCK PRINT If it is part of a procedure the button or control label is printed in boldface For example Press BLOCK To easily find buttons on the front panel the area name label is printed together with the button by concatenating with a colon as in SETUP MAIN VIEW SCALE etc For example Press the CONFIG MODE key Menu and on screen form titles are printed in the manual in the same case initial capitals as they appear on the analyzer screen For example Source Format If it is part of a procedure the menu title is shown in boldface For example Press the Trigger side key A list of keys controls and or menu items separated by an arrow symbol gt indicates the order in which to perform the listed tasks Fo
121. 8 Turns the delta marker on or off Changes the and marker positions each other WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions FSK View Menu Table 2 9 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as FSK in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Analyzing an FSK Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 109 Table 2 9 FSK view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Selects input data for a view Same as Source in the Analog view menu on page 2 69 Frame Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written Options Same as Options in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 71 Menu Functions Spectrogram View Menu Table 2 10 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as Spectrogram in the CONFIG VIEW menu Table 2 10 Spectrogram view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Selects input data for a view You can select one of the following items None Specifies no input source The display area in the view is empty Active Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Zoom Specifies the zoomed data for an input source When you use the Zoom mode select this For zoom refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 and Zoom on page 3 51 D1 to D8 Specifies one of the data registers of
122. 981 4 69E O07 15 7875 547E 07_ 15 7419 Series1 6 25E 07 16 2202 Series 7 03E 07 15 6189 7 81E 07 16 0146 8 59E 07 16 0659 9 38E 07 16 0297 1 02E 06 15 9226 1 09E 06 15 8359 117E 06 15 9068 1 25E 06 15 9043 1 33E 06 16 0286 Figure 3 107 Creating a graph from the text data in Excel 3 208 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Setting the Date and Time The analyzer displays the system managed date and time in each view You can change the date time and time zone using the Windows 98 date and time setting application from the front panel 1 2 Press CONFIG UTILITY key on the front panel Press Action side key and select Assign Press UTIL D side key and select TimeDate The Date Time Properties dialog box appears View A Active Freqimpl Date Time Properties Date amp Time Time Zone Date f 1236 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Current time zone Pacific Standard Time y 10 33 164M_ 5 Figure 3 108 Date Time Properties dialog box WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Util D TimeDate Select Item E gt Down Left 4 Right gt Space Bar 3 209 Setting the Date and Time 3 210 Change the date and time with the following substeps If you want to change the time zone skip to the step 5 a Using the general purpose knob move the cursor to select the field b Change the value with th
123. A330 amp WCA380 User Manual Operating Basics r SSS Interface Maps This section lists the names of the front and rear panel components and their functions Following the descriptions of the menu operations this section also gives brief descriptions of the menu item functions WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 1 Interface Maps Front Panel Floppy disk drive Saves or recalls data and settings A 3 5 inch 2HD 1 44M bytes or 2DD 720K bytes floppy disk formatted in MS DOS form is available NOTE While the LED indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit you must not press the Eject button to remove the floppy disk If you do so the data stored on the medium may be destroyed or an error may occur Side keys A menu is displayed in the right area on the display screen It contains a maximum of eight menu items associated with the side keys Pressing these keys enables you to set or select parameters or select a function while controlling the menu Refer to page 2 11 for menu operations Refer to page 2 47 for menu details LED indicator Eject button gt STANDBY LED indicator The indicator is on when the analyzer is on standby Power ON STANDBY Switch Windows 98 and then the analyzer system are started by turning on the Power Switch
124. A380 User Manual SSS EES Marker Operations and Peak Search There are four types of markers primary marker delta marker band power marker and line marker The primary and delta markers move along a waveform and indicate the exact value of the data point at the current marker position To move a marker use the general purpose knob keypad or search functions This section focuses on the primary and delta marker operations You can use the markers to create a trigger mask pattern and to switch a frame to be displayed For the details refer to Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern on page 3 75 and Changing Display Frames on page 3 38 Type of Marker There are four types of markers m Primary marker or marker is represented with the symbol O on screen It is used to measure absolute values such as the frequency time amplitude and phase at the current marker position It is also called absolute marker Delta A marker is displayed with the symbols O and on screen It is used to measure relative values such as the frequency time level and phase differences between the two markers The delta marker is also called relative marker m Band Power Marker is represented with two vertical lines It is used for power measurement For details refer to Band Power Marker Operations on page 3 90 m Line Marker is shown with a vertical or horizontal line and the value at the marker position for general pur
125. AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Service Options Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other services that are designed to meet your specific service needs Advancing technology has brought incredible change to the power of measurement instruments Manufac turing methods and calibration techniques have been revolutionized making the service challenge tougher than ever By using Tektronix as your service provider you make use of our technology and product knowledge our world wide logistics infrastructure and our ISO9000 approved service centers Tektronix technicians are trained on the latest products and are equipped with the most current information on product improvements and upgrades for optimum product performance Warranty Repair Service Tektronix technicians provide warranty service at most Tektronix service locations worldwide The warranty period for this product can be found behind the title page in this manual Calibration and Repair Service Tektronix offers calibrations non warranty repair and support for customers performing their own service Where appropriate calibrations are compliant to ANSI NCSL Z 540 ISO GUIDE 25 and ISO9000 Quality Systems If you prefer to perform your own service Tektronix supports repair to the replaceable part level through providing for circuit board exchange All services ca
126. ATime view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Specifies the source data for the view Same as Source in Polar view menu on page 2 76 Block Specifies the block position to be displayed By default the data of Block 0 is displayed In the Block mode data is acquired in the number of frames specified as on block with SETUP CDMA Block Size If the data has been acquired in two or more blocks you can specify this block position to display the data The block containing the latest acquired data is defined as Block 0 Refer to Acquiring Data on page 3 21 Tracei Raw If set to On the acquisition data is displayed by a green trace If set to Off this display disappears Trace2 If set to On the averaged waveform is displayed in yellow If set to Off this display disappears Average This menu item appears when the you use the Measure or Measure Data side menu for the measurement Options Mask Sets up a mask to make PASS FAIL decision for the displayed waveform The default values meet the IS 95 standard For detail refer to Mask Settings on page 3 123 Num Averages Specifies the averaging count The default is 100 specified in the IS 95 standard Be sure to use the Measure side menu for the measurement Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Same as Display Lines in the Waveform view menu on page 2 65 Position Specifies the frame to be displaye
127. Block size setting 1024 Dual 2 000 Block size setting 3 70 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Trigger If you set the trigger count to 1 or more block to block gaps are displayed in thin black stripes They are shown in white in this figure View B Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 12 04 41 Marker 799 986 875MHz 56 622dBm Oframe Os 655 frame o ar Setup Standar Trigger Source Interni Domain Freque Slope Rise o frame Pos b 100 Figure 3 38 Three dimensional view display effect by setting a trigger count WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 71 Trigger When Trigger Count is set to On data is written into a different memory block for each trigger Frame numbers are given sequentially Figure 3 39 shows an example when Trigger Count is set to 4 Example Trigger count 4 Block size 512 frames Frame 0 1 data acquisition Frame 1 Frame 2 Block 1 Frame 511 _ nnmmmmET Frame 512 and data acquisition _ a Frame 513 Frame 514 Block 2 Frame 1023 _ _ nmmOyyooo_ Frame 1024 3 data acquisition Frame 1025 Frame 1026 Block 3 Frame 1535 Frame 1536 4th data acquisition Frame 1537 Frame 1538 Block 4 Frame 2047 Figure 3 39 Relation between the trigger count and the frame 3 72 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Trigger Trigger Source You can specify an internal or external trigger source For the internal trigger
128. CFG and TRG m Data files AP IQ APT and IQT Using LAN The analyzer is equipped with the standard LAN Ethernet interface allowing you to save data in peripheral devices such as PCs hard disks or MO via network For how to connect the analyzer to LAN refer to page 3 199 About Installation of Other Applications The analyzer incorporates Windows 98 as the operating system Some combina tions of internal measurement applications and external applications may cause degradation in the basic performance and contention among these applications It is not recommended that you install other applications including Internet Explorer Word and Excel on the analyzer If you do so you must keep this in mind 1 18 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual SSeS SSS Calibration and Diagnostics To guarantee the basic operations of the analyzer perform the following m Calibration m Self gain calibration IQ offset calibration m Wide IQ balance calibration m Wide IQ full calibration m Diagnostics m Characteristic checks When an error occurs during above process contact your local Tektronix representative WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 19 Calibration and Diagnostics Calibration 1 20 Self Gain Calibration This internal calibration routine calibrates the amplifier gain based on an internal signal generator This routine should be run when you boot the analyzer or when UNCAL uncalibrated is displayed during operation Al
129. CLEAR front panel key WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CDMA Analysis Analyzing rising and falling characteristics in detail The rising and falling characteristics are critical to the time characteristic measurement Figure 3 66 shows the rising and falling waveforms enlarged in two of the four views View A Active 97 11 18 21 40 37 Marker Os_ 52 77dBm ia dBm View B Active 97 11 18 21 40 37 Marker 172 031lus 50 729daBm o View Ci Active 97 11 18 21 40 37 Marker Os_ 52 77dBm in dBm rt 0s View D Active 97 11 18 21 40 37 Marker 1 428ms 40 662daBm o aBm a I dBm f 4 n aBm Start 159 531 25us Scale 2 5us div Start 1 415 468 75ms Scale 2 5us div Figure 3 66 Analyzing rising and falling characteristics in detail 1 Press the CONFIG VIEW key 2 Select CDMATime for Views C and D Now the four views contain the same display 3 Change the View B display a Press the key VIEW B gt VIEW MAIN b Press the side key Option Scale Marker Search Scale Rising Edge WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 125 CDMA Analysis 4 Change the View D display a Press the key VIEW D gt VIEW MAIN b Press the side key Option Scale Marker Search Scale Falling Edge View B and D change as shown in lower part of Figure 3 66 3 126 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual ee eens cdmaOne Analysis This chapter describes the cdmaOne analysis fun
130. Expansion factor RF Baseband 5 MHz 2 to the number of frames in 2 5 10 step Other than 5 MHz 2 to the number of frames in 2 4 10 step IQ Wide 10 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz 2 to the number of frames in 2 5 10 step When running zoom one physical frame is regenerated using the physical frame in the time domain for the magnification Therefore the number of frames that can be displayed in the Spectrogram and Waveform views is The number of acquired frames Expansion factor 1 NOTE For a three dimensional view one frame of those resulting from zoom will not contain the data available for display so the number of frames available for display will decrease by one WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 53 Zoom Zoom Operation To perform zooming use the following procedure 1 Set the analyzer to the Zoom mode There are two ways a Use the CONFIG menu basic configuration pattern Press CONFIG MODE gt Zoom b Use the SETUP menu Press SETUP MAIN Memory Mode Input FFT Memory Mode and select Zoom 2 Set the center frequency span reference level and other parameters as necessary 3 Set the unzoomed view For example if you display an unzoomed spectrum in View A with the Waveform view do the following step a Press CONFIG VIEW gt View A and select Waveform 4 Set the zoomed view For example if you display the zoomed spectrum in View C with the Waveform view use the following steps
131. Frame 0 0 0 0 0 View B Source Active Active Active Active Format FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl FreqAmpl Scale Hor Scale 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz Scale Hor Start 0 0 0 0 Scale Ver Scale 308 132 308 308 Scale Ver Start 0 0 0 0 Scale Color Scale 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm Scale Color Start 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm 100 dBm ViewC Source Active Zoom Active Format Timel FreqAmpl Vector Timel Frame 0 0 Display Lines Hor 1 Visible Off Off Display Lines Hor 1 0 0 Display Lines Hor 2 Visible Off Off Display Lines Hor 2 0 0 Display Lines Ver 1 Visible Off Off Display Lines Ver 1 0 0 Display Lines Ver 2 Visible Off Off Display Lines Ver 2 0 0 Scale Hor Scale Scale Hor Start 7 Scale Ver Scale 2V 100 dBm Scale Ver Start 1V 100 dBm C 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix C Default Settings Table C 1 Default settings for the Standard configuration Cont Menu View D Spectrum na Item Spectrum nels Dual Zoom bees ed nal A of gram Burst Number Frames 1 Burst Search Off Burst Block Size 4 Burst gt Peak Threshold 40 Burst Threshold 20 dB Burst Offset 0 Mask gt Mask Off Mask Marker Link Off Mask Center 0 Mask Width 0 Mask Left 0 Mask Right 0 Manual Setup Modulation 1 41 QPSK Manual Setup Symbol Rate 21k Manua
132. Harris and Hamming See Table 3 7 Generally window frequency resolution is inversely proportional to accuracy with which to measure amplitude levels For ordinary measurement select the window capable of separating the desired frequency component Such a window maximizes the accuracy with which to measure amplitude levels and minimizes leakage errors while separating each frequency component WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 17 FFT Parameters To select a optimum window first select the window that maximizes frequency resolution rectangular window Then sequentially switch to windows with less frequency resolution such as Hamming and Blackman Harris Use the last window that still passes the frequency component to be separated Suitable frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy are obtained by using the window immediately before the one from which the frequency component cannot be separated Table 3 7 FFT window and band pass filter Window type Blackman Harris Window 1 J Hamming Window Equivalent noise Band pass filter 3 dB bandwidth Maximum side lobe bandwidth 3 sample B type 67 dB 1 708 4 sample B type 92 dB 2 0 1 362 Rectangular Window 1 3 sample B type when the FFT type is HW 4 sample B type when the FFT type is SW For measurement of noise and power the Blackman Harris window is valid For details refer to Power Measurement on page 3 81 Consider
133. Hz 1 5 GHz J Span 15 MHz 10 MHz y Ref 0 dBm 0 dBm J Carrier Width 5 MHz Manual Mixer Mixer 25 dBm 25 dBm 2008 20 08 Reference Osc Internal Internal Fo fp Ref Offset 0 0 View A D5 Acie FreqAmp 0 Of of Of RMSE ANS Expo Average Num Averages 10 10 Average Begin Frame 0 0 Average End Frame 0 0 Of Of RBW Alpha 0 5 0 5 0 Edit Hor 0 Edit Ver 0 Trace2 Source None FreqAmp 0 Options Position 100 Options Hold Ver Scale Off Off C 6 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix C Default Settings Table C 3 Default settings for the 3GPP configuration Cont Menu item sd Down Link RST OF OF Display Lines Hor 1 0 0 of Of Display Lines Hor 2 0 0 Display Lines Ver 1 Visible Off Off Display Lines Ver 1 0 Display Lines Ver 2 Visible Off Display Lines Ver 2 0 Scale gt Hor Scale 1 Scale Hor Start 0 Scale gt Ver Scale 0 Scale Ver Start 0 Scale gt Frame Relative Off Marker Hor 0 Marker Trace Trace1 Marker Delta Marker Off ACP of Conia 5 ue 1 006 Nz of Marker gt ACP Filter Alpha 0 22 5 We 1 006 Nie Search Separation 2 of View 0 0 Compose G4 ch 0 i 0 5008 Scale gt Color Start 50 dB Marker Hor 34 ch Marker Ver 0 Of Search Separation 2 Search Ver 0 Search Delta Marker Off Opti
134. Installed Options Figure 3 109 Displaying the version and self test result view of upper left corner WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 211 Displaying the Version and Self Test Result The display shows the following information m Version m Main System Basic application software version m Sub System Firmware version m Self test result The self test runs for the ROM RAM and A20 digital down converter board The result is shown with Pass or Fail for the ROM and RAM and Installed or Not installed for the A20 board Note that the analyzer cannot be checked sufficiently with this self test If you suspect that the analyzer operates abnormally contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office m Optional information If any optional software is installed it is indicated with its version 3 212 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendices eC Appendix A Options and Accessories Options Table A 1 Options This appendix describes the various options as well as the standard and optional accessories that are available for the analyzer Table A 1 list the options available when ordering this product Option Label Description N Al Universal European 230 V 50 Hz power cord A power cord Fuse 5A T IEC 127 swe Fuse Cap Cable Retainer A2 UK power cord 230 V 50 Hz power cord Fuse 5A T IEC 127 Fuse Cap Cable Retainer gt A3 Australian power cord 240 V
135. Measurement For the submenu Band Power Markers SP and BW refer to Band Power Marker Operations on page 3 90 The submenu Filter is the same as that on the top menu level on page 2 100 For the submenu Filter Alpha Filter SP and Filter BW see Figure 2 49 on page 2 102 This menu item is displayed when you select OBW for Measurement Set the ratio of the power in the specified band region to the power in the entire span region 2 101 Menu Functions Table 2 25 3gppACPView menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Searches for the peak spectrum and places the Peak Max Separation marker there Searches the peak spectrum and moves the marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Searches for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks Refer to Separation in the Waveform menu on page 2 68 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Mkr gt Freq Sets the center frequency to the value at the current marker position When you press this side key the Freq Span Ref Freq setting changes to the frequency in the current marker position Filter SP sets the interval Filter Alpha sets the
136. Mouse Keyboard Printer Monitor Flash memory LAN interface ad lt K Ep gt i gt CPUboard Hard disk _ Ea Floppy disk amp IQ splitter Digital down yan converter m amp GPIB interface gt IQ signal N Twin FFT input A D converter processor dep TFT controler m TFT display ad Wideband Digital trigger digital filter comparator SS y FIFO Controller Gr e Trigger signal input Data memory Figure 1 2 Signal processing system block diagram 1 4 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Product Overview 3 GHz 8 GHz Down Converter Wideband IF IQ Splitter Twin A D Converter Wideband Digital Filter FIFO Analog Front End A D Converter Converts the RF signal input at the front panel RF INPUT into a 10 MHz IF signal The bandwidth is 3 GHz for the WCA330 and 8 GHz for the WCA380 The signal output from the down converter is sent to the succeeding block i e analog front end The down converter is equipped with the voltage reference and reference clock generator at the periphery Amplifies and filters the IF signal converted through the down converter with the wideband amplifier that implements the maximum span of 30 MHz without scanning The input signal goes through this block in the Wide IF mode Splits the signal processed in the wideband IF block to the I and Q components Also you can input the I
137. ONFIG MODE menu NOTE Use this setting unchanged in usual operation E None Prohibits settings with the Setup menu Standard Configures the analyzer with standard settings For detailed settings refer to Setup standard Menu on page 2 54 CDMA Configures the analyzer with the settings for CDMA analysis For detailed settings refer to Setup CDMA Menu on page 2 59 3gppACP Configures the analyzer with the 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project standard compliant settings for ACP measurement For detailed settings refer to Setup 3gppACP Menu on page 2 61 View Determines how to analyze and display data on the screen Switches side key functions Allows you to select items using the View A to H side keys Allows you to display the item selected using the View A to H side keys View A to H Selects a display format for each view To show View E to H menus press the More side key You can choose one of the following display formats Use each view menu for detailed settings None si Specifies no waveform is displayed in a view Waveform Displays a spectrum whose horizontal axis represents frequency or time and vertical axis represents amplitude phase or Q For detailed settings refer to page 2 63 This view has an averaging function for a spectrum waveform It can also display two waveforms concurrently which is useful when you observe two waveforms to compare them It allows measurement of noise and power Demodulates an AM
138. Off uses the ordinary time axis 2 66 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 7 Waveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as O and the delta marker as and For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Hor Specifies the horizontal position to which you move By default O is positioned at the start point of the horizontal axis Trace Selects either Trace1 or Trace2 for the waveform you operate with the marker Trace2 indicates the waveform selected with the Source Trace2 submenu Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Mkr gt Freq Measurement Band Power Markers ACP OBW Searches for the peak spectrum and places the Peak Max Sets the center frequency to the value at the current marker position When you press this side key the Freq Span Ref gt Freq setting in the SETUP menu changes to the frequency at the current marker position Performs power measurement Select one of the measurement types Noise Power C N C No ACP and OBW Refer to Power Measurement on page 3 81 This menu item is displayed when you select Power C N or C No for Measurement You can operate the band power
139. Official Journal of the European Union Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 69 EEC EN 61010 1 1993 UL3111 1 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 ANSI ISA 82 01 1994 IEC61010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment CSA safety requirements for electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment Safety standard for electrical and electronic test measuring controlling and related equipment Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The installation categories are CAT III Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT II Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level includes appliances portable tools and similar products Equipment is usually cord connected CAT Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 21 Certifications and compliances Cont Characteristic Description Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be th
140. SEAMLESS Figure 3 12 Seamless status display Table 3 9 shows the default minimum frame period The minimum frame period depends on the number of FFT points and spans Frame period is valid in the Block mode In the Roll mode the frame period is meaningless because data is displayed each time it is written into a frame In the Dual mode the frame period is set to a minimum value by default In the Zoom mode the frame period is so set that frames are acquired continuously in the temporal aspect i e the frame period is equal to the frame length In the Block mode if the frame period is so set that frames are acquired continuously or frames overlap in the temporal aspect data is acquired continuously The seamless acquisition that captures frames with 50 or more of the frame length overlapped is called Real Time Acquisition With 50 or more of the frame length overlapped FFT processing results in continuous spectrum With less than 50 of the frame length overlapped the result is discontinuous spectrum see Figure 3 14 on page 3 28 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Frame Period and Real Time Real time acquisition is possible under the following conditions Input band Baseband and RF for WCA330 RF1 to 4 for WCA380 Span 5 MHz or less Frame length Seamless acquisition Frame 0 in other than the Zoom mode Fame i i Frame 2 i gt Time gt gt gt F
141. Save Save the data captured in the Block mode One of the two modes is actually used depending on the acquisition mode a Press View C Mode and then select RollSave b Press View D Mode and then select BlockSave Specify the name of the destination file If you skip this specification by default the files are stored in the following folder which contains the WCA system programs C Program Files SONY Tektronix WCA Bin The example in Figure 3 91 has specified that the data is stored in the following files RollSave view C Users PROJ E RO1 IQ BlockSave view C Users PROJ E B01 IQ a Press View C File Name and then specify a file name b Press View D File Name and then specify a file name WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Auto Save Function REMOTE UCL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE View A Wiew a active Freqimpl 6 7 00 1 17 35 PH View c Marker OHz 83 363dBm Waveform view z Roll Save dBm 10 aB A Tais Script 100 fi RollSave ai 5 2 Center 2 5GHz Span 1MHz View B view B active Freqimpl 6 7 00 1 17 35 PH Marker OHz 83 363dBm Oframe 0s FileName Spectrogram view 127 frame o dBm 100 dBm Save Frames oO frames frame 100 si Center 2 5GHz Span _1MHz __________ View C mien c foil Save status RollSave Blocks AutoSave view poise Counter Reset C Users PROJ E RO1 1Q RollSave O 13 17 13 100 1
142. User Manual Tektronix f WCA330 amp WCA380 3GHz amp 8GHz Wireless Communication Analyzer 070 A792 50 This document applies to firmware version 3 2 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Japan Ltd All rights reserved Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Japan Ltd 5 9 31 Kitashinagawa Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0001 Japan Tektronix Inc P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If a product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with ship
143. VErab ine Process u Sst eu OS She s oN e eee ee hale a aA Averaging Modes 8 i c5 08 Eso iert eee de Hee kd ae Operating Example of the View Average Function Operating Example of the Utility Average Function WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents VTS OCR See c5ice so wicier guide caecalsdeauduahle eaaa Shee wees a0 ale a aod Gee e whee eke 3 65 Setin a TUET erea A T eee 3 66 Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern sssssssessseseseseseses 3 75 Hints for Creating a Mask Pattern 0 2 eee 3 76 Example of Creating a Mask Pattern 0 0 eee eee 3 77 Power Measurement 5 cc006cccc creer eeaserenen new es ewes onan 3 81 Setting Requirements sessenta ngr Sabie wa be eka ye ead eel pds 3 82 Noise Meastitement 2 4 c accacc hae hb be ee Bale eE eip wb ke cde wounds 3 83 Power Measurement 0 cee cee cee eee een en ee eee 3 84 C N and C No Measurements 0 00 e eee eee eee 3 85 ACP Measurement oi 4 s225 0 5 h52 2405 riere ba Deeb ead wel ad Rede pends 3 86 OBW Measurement srci erroia puss eae bea Seal Rae bhai a i aan ace 3 88 Band Power Marker Operations 0 000 e eee eee eee eee 3 90 Analyzing an Analog Modulated Signal 02 eee 3 95 Setting ore Unde bine eed dd bes ea saw baw e tale e e dt be 3 95 Display s2100icndetaaidl ceed beri Gb bee Ghat e a i 3 96 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal 3 97 PROCESS FOW ab din sree e dbl pt eetri id
144. W side key and input the proportion Pr The analyzer calculates the occupied bandwidth and displays the result by the cursors and the value at the top left corner on the view WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 93 Power Measurement 3 94 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual eee T E Analyzing an Analog Modulated Signal Setting WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Use the Analog view to analyze an analog modulated signal This view is capable of demodulating and displaying PM phase modulation AM amplitude modulation and FM frequency modulation signals Select the Dual or Zoom mode to provide the time domain data required to analyze an analog modulated signal When displaying a signal select the modulating system 1 2 Press CONFIG MODE gt Dual or Zoom Set a proper frequency and span refer to page 3 9 The analyzer requires the proper span to recognize the analog modulation and display the signal Set the span as close to the bandwidth as possible and fine tune it Redefine the view a Press the CONFIG VIEW key b Press one of the VIEW A to D side keys c Turn the general purpose knob to select Analog If you want to define two or more Analog views repeat steps b and c Select the modulating system a Select the view you selected For example if you have defined View B as the Analog view press the VIEW B key b Press the Format side key c Turn the general purpose knob to select AM PM or FM
145. WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM view Pass Fail test result 3 161 GSM Analysis 3 162 Analyzing File Data If you want to analyze data on a file IQ follow this procedure NOTE The IQ formatted file is available for the GSM measurement 1 Select one of the five items with the Measurement side key in the GSM view menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 2 Load a file a Press CONFIG UTILITY gt Util B SaveLoad gt Load gt Load From File IQ b Select a file Refer to Operating File Access Menu on page 3 178 for selecting a file 3 Press the VIEW D key to show the GSM view menu 4 Press the Analyze side key to analyze the data loaded on the memory The analyzer repeats to measure each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 5 Press the Burst No side key and select a burst number This side key is not available in the Spectrum SW measurement View A to D show the measurement result for the specified burst NOTE When you change the measurement item with the Measurement side key in the GSM view menu the analyzer clears the data loaded from a file onto the memory WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis Entering the Sync Word For the GSM measurement the analyzer always searches the sync word The default sync word is TSCO Training Sequence Code H25C225C speci
146. When you place the Power Switch in the STANDBY position the system shuts down and powers off automatically Refer to page 1 9 for powering on and off Figure 2 1 Front panel map left part 2 2 Display A tilt display that uses a 12 1 inch XGA TFT LCD module On the display screen the result of measurement can be displayed in various formats A maximum of four views you defined can be displayed concurrently The brightness cannot be adjusted Refer to page 1 15 for angular adjustment of the display Refer to page 3 211 for status display Refer to page 3 202 for making a hardcopy of the screen image Refer to page 3 206 for capturing the display data into DTP software WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Interface Maps STEP keys Changes the number of steps that is used to increment or decrement a numeric value To increment or decrement a numeric value use the general purpose knob or the amp or W key on the key pad Refer to page 2 17 for inputting numeric values LOCAL key Switch REMOTE to LOCAL in GPIB controls Refer to the Programmer Manual for GPIB controls PRINT key Outputs a hardcopy of the display image to the printer The contents of the display image can also be saved as data Refer to page 3 202 for hardcopy details SETUP area Displays the SETUP menu In the SETUP menu you can make hardware related settings Refer to page 2 54 for the SETUP menu CONFIG area Used to c
147. When you select Standard with CONFIG SETUP gt Setup pressing the SETUP MAIN key displays the menu shown in Table 2 4 Use this menu to set input mode frequency reference level trigger FFT and other parameters Table 2 4 SETUP standard menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Band Selects an input frequency range Baseband 0 to 10 MHz RF WCA330 only 10 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Normal HiRes or 50 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Wide RF1 to RF4 WCA380 only RF1 10 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Normal HiRes or 50 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Wide RF2 2 5 GHz to 3 5 GHz RF3 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz RF4 5 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz las Processes the and Q signals input from the and Q INPUT connectors on the rear panel IF Mode Selects an Intermediate Frequency IF mode In the Baseband mode the IF mode is fixed to Normal In the IQ mode it is fixed to Wide For details refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 This mode has an IF bandwidth of 10 MHz and features a high degree of phase flatness It is suitable for digital modulation analysis with a span below 6 MHz or general measurement that does not require a wide dynamic range HiRes This mode has a relatively narrow IF bandwidth of 6 MHz but has the widest dynamic range It is suitable for Adjacent Channel Leak Power ACP or spurious measurement Wide This mode has an IF bandwidth of 32 MHz which is the widest of all the three modes It is suitable f
148. Windows 98 access 3 197 displaying the desktop screen 3 198 starting applications 3 197 use 3 195 Wireless communication analyzer description 1 1 Z Zoom description 3 51 mode 3 6 operation 3 54 range 3 53 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual
149. a File on page 3 180 3 Press the Delete File side key to delete the file 4 Press the uppermost side key twice to return to the top level menu WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 181 File Operations 3 182 Creating a Directory Deleting a Directory 1 Press the side key Operation and then Create Dir The Create Dir menu appears 2 If necessary change the directory Refer to Changing a Directory on page 3 180 3 Enter the directory name using the procedure described in nputting a Directory or File Name on page 3 183 4 Press the Create Dir side key to create the directory 5 Press the uppermost side key twice to return to the top level menu 1 Press the side key Operation and then Delete Dir The Delete Dir menu appears 2 If necessary change the directory Refer to Changing a Directory on page 3 180 3 Press the Delete Dir side key to delete the directory 4 Press the uppermost side key twice to return to the top level menu NOTE Directories containing one or more files cannot be deleted WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Inputting a Directory or Renaming an existing File When you select a file from the listing the name is FileName displayed in the file name field To create a new file by changing this file name follow this procedure 1 Select a file using the procedures described in Selecting a File on page 3 180 Press the Name Entry side key
150. acquisition the first slot is analyzed Press the VIEW C key Press the Analyze side key to analyze for all frames WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual W CDMA Analysis Example Figure 3 75 shows an example of continuous slot analysis In this example the analyzer has captured the phenomenon that the signal power is decreasing gradually using the trigger functions refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for using trigger functions The movement of the marker along the time axis in View B links to the display of code domain power in View A and D So you can observe the time varying signals with consistency between the frequency domain and code domain View E Active Freqampl 99 02 01 16 14 13 View C Active W CDMA Measurement 99 02 01 16 14 13 Marker 2 117 58GHz 40 071dBm 518frame 25 9ms Marker 0 021chip 0 923 179 385deg 1212 foo Freq Err 58 594Hz frame Origin Offset 5 dBm 167 55mV Unit Center 2 117 SGHz View B Polar View D Polar Marker Och 16k O0ch 3 076d0B 39 9 24 45ms Marker Och 16k Och 3 076dB 101 o cB 0 a Hl 100 dB 0 50 2 Mil Ul Lai nih Start Och Stop 127ch tart Och Stop 127ch Figure 3 75 Analyzing a transient signal WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 141 W CDMA Analysis 3 142 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3GPP Analysis This chapter describes down link signal analysis and ACP Adjacent Channel Leakage Power measurement under the 3GPP 3 Generation Partnershi
151. ad occurs the measured data will be invalid Refer to Reference Level on page 3 13 for details WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 61 Menu Functions Table 2 6 SETUP 3gppACP menu table cont Top level 2 62 Subordinate level Carrier Width options and descriptions Sets the carrier bandwidth The range is 1 MHz to 10 MHz The IF filter is not applied within the specified range Manual Mixer and RF attenuator levels are usually set automatically When you want to set these levels manually select Mixer or RF Att and set the value as described below Mixer Level Freq Offset Ref Offset Reference Osc When you select Mixer in Manual above select the level The mixer level depends on the Band setting RF WCA330 RF1 RF2 WCA380 5 10 15 20 25 dBm RF3 RF4 WCA380 5 15 25 dBm Select the level necessary for your measurement The default is 25 dBm Normally use the default If your measurement requires high dynamic range such as Adjacent Channel Leak Power ACP measurement you can increase the level up to 5 dBm NOTE Raising the mixer level increases waveform distortion When you select RF Att in Manual above select the level The RF attenuator level depends on the Band setting RF WCA330 RF1 RF2 WCA380 0 to 50 dB in 0 2 5 7 step RF3 RF4 WCA380 0 10 20 30 40 50 dB The frequency displayed on the screen is the sum of the frequency actually processed by
152. ain Figure 3 106 shows waveform data that has been pasted in the application software Scratch Pad WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Outputting Waveform Data View A lt View A Active Timeadmpl 9 21 98 2 40 07 PM Sauerorn Marker 80us 8 651dBm T Options Copy To Clipboard Untitled Notepad Fie Edit Search Help 8E 5 8 65125661522059 9921875E 5 8 65125661522059 984375E 5 9 26047526412456 9765625E 5 8 4882792811 0534 96875E 5 9 22467118246588 9609375E 5 8 47801242660616 953125E 5 9 17877261186832 9453125E 5 8 40905697344741 9375E 5 9 38853025003561 9296875E 5 8 33665619962982 921875E 5 9 42934876582446 5 9146625E 5 8 28838 661367566 90625E 5 9 31319552936216 8984375E 5 8 249943 86954376 896625E 5 9 2335 6662962466 8828125E 5 8 16442886228767 875E 5 9 395361609726621 8671875E 5 8 13766882266257 859375E 5 9 16598241907881 8515625E 5 8 12379385512494 84375E 5 9 27170009419051 8359375E 5 8 04752019684844 828125E 5 9 16496245890658 8203125E 5 8 16296625153623 8125E 5 9 18437428078948 8046875E 5 8 668489145 64126 796875E 5 9 17100578613851 7896625E 5 8 14550693783416 78125E 5 9 0896 46 6466 6369 7734375E 5 8 07894188362863 765625E 5 9 02928141745742 7578125E 5 8 2166717715168 Start 80us Scale 8us div Figure 3 106 Pasting text data of the spectrum Text Output P
153. al in the Polar view as an input source to display an EYE diagram whose horizontal axis represents frequency or time and vertical axis amplitude phase I or Q This view must be used together with the Polar view For detailed settings refer to page 2 79 SymbolTable Uses the demodulated signal in the Polar view as an input source to display numeric values for a digital pattern This view must be used together with the Polar view For detailed settings refer to page 2 80 Uses the demodulated signal in the Polar view as an input source to display an error vector magnitude for a digitally modulated signal This view must be used together with the Polar view For detailed settings refer to page 2 81 CDMA related view CDMAWaveform This view has basically the same functions as the Waveform view except for the ARIB T 53 and IS 95 compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 83 CDMAPolar This view has basically the same functions as the Polar view except for the ARIB T 53 and IS 95 compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 86 CDMATime The horizontal axis represents time or frequency and the vertical axis signal levels This view has the ARIB T 53 and IS 95 compliant functions for spurious measurement and analysis For detailed settings refer to page 2 88 cdmaOne related view Code This view has basically the same functions as the Spectrogram view except Spectrogram for th
154. am Symbol display Frequency error measurement Origin offset measurement Eye diagram 1 Q Trellis display 1 to 16 symbols Error vector diagram EVM Magnitude error Phase error Waveform quality 6 measurement Symbol table Binary Octal Hexadecimal Error measurement accuracy 10 frames averaged PDC EVM lt 1 2 Mag error lt 1 0 Phase error lt 0 8 100 kHz span PHS EVM lt 1 4 Mag error lt 1 2 Phase error lt 0 8 1 MHz span GSM EVM lt 1 8 Mag error lt 1 2 Phase error lt 1 0 1 MHz span 64QAM 5 3 Msps 1 GHz carrier Typical QPSK 4 096 Msps 2 GHz carrier Typical QPSK 16 384 Msps 2 GHz carrier Typical EVM lt 2 5 20 MHz span EVM lt 2 5 20 MHz span EVM lt 3 0 30 MHz span 25 C 5 C Table B 11 Analog demodulation accuracy Typical Characteristic AM demodulation accuracy PM demodulation accuracy Description 2 10 dBfs input at center 10 to 60 modulation depth 3 10 dBfs input at center FM demodulation accuracy 1 of span 10 dBfs input at center B 8 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 12 Resolution bandwidth filter Characteristic Description Filter shape Gaussian Rectangle Root Nyquist Frequency range 1 Hz to 10 MHz Maximum span setting to activate RBW filter 50 MHz Table B 13 Trigger Characteristic Description Trigger mode Normal IF mode Span lt 6 MHz
155. ame size 6 os6 o 00 4 06 5 oi0e dines 2 sieleis weno ces 608 a 3 191 Table 3 23 Order of bins in frequency domain 3 191 Table 3 24 Functions available with a keyboard 3 196 Table A 1 Options ccc ccc cece cece cece eee eeeenes A 1 Table A 2 Standard accessories 0 cece cece eee rec eeee A 2 Table A 3 Optional accessories 0 cece cece cece eee eeee A 2 Table B 1 Frequency ssssssesesesesesesecoosososososeo B 2 Table B 2 Spectrum purity ccc cece cece ee ee ee eens B 2 Table B 3 Input 22 0 0 cece ccc cece rece eee eee EES B 3 Table B 4 Reference level 0 cece cece cece reece eens B 3 Table B 5 Dynamic range ccc cece cece cece cece eeeees B 4 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual xiii Table of Contents xiv Table B 6 Spurious response Typical sssssesnsssssess B 4 Table B 7 Acquisition 1 0 cece ecw cece cee e eee eens B 5 Table B 8 Sampling rate cece ccc cece ee ee renee B 6 Table B 9 Frame update time cece cece ccc e ce cceees B 7 Table B 10 Digital demodulation cece cece eens B 8 Table B 11 Table B 12 Table B 13 Table B 14 Table B 15 Table B 16 Table B 17 Table B 18 Analog demodulation accuracy Typical B 8 Resolution bandwidth filter eee eee B 9 Triger soso 2is0 Si seo a EE E ERS B 9 Display os cccisass cease ch cde sii
156. amp WCA380 User Manual Preface About This Manual WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual This user manual is for the WCA330 and WCA380 Wireless Communication Analyzers This manual consists of the following sections Getting Started contains the product overview and describes the architecture installation and calibration of the analyzer Operating Basics explains the functions of the front and rear panels and menu items of the analyzer and describes the basic menu operations This section also provides the tutorials for beginners It gives step by step procedures for measurement using a signal generator Reference explains the basic concepts of measurement processes and application specific operations It also gives the combined procedures of the front panel keys and menu operations Appendix explains the accessories specifications default settings mouse keyboard operations and how to clean the analyzer First time users should complete the installation as described in Getting Started then go to Operating Basics and perform the procedures shown in Tutorial beginning on Page 2 19 The analyzer uses Windows 98 as the operating system This manual does not describe common use of Windows 98 Refer to your Windows 98 manuals as necessary xix Preface Related Documents Conventions In addition to this user manual the following documentation is available for your analyzer WCA330 and WCA380 Programmer Manual 070 A
157. anel 2 4 Expansion slot rear panel 2 4 External trigger input connector front panel 2 3 Eye diagram display 3 104 EyeDiagram view menu table 2 79 F Features overview 1 2 FFT parameters 3 15 points 3 16 setting the parameters 3 19 type 3 16 window 3 17 File access menu operations 3 178 access menu table 2 119 copy 3 181 delete 3 181 extension 3 174 format 3 184 header 3 185 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Index name entry 3 183 operations 3 173 File extension IQT 3 172 Floppy disk drive front panel 2 2 Format data file 3 184 Four view display 3 35 Frame data 3 191 header 3 189 period 3 25 relation among frame bin and pixel 3 41 Frame period table 3 29 Frequency error Polar view 3 103 mode 3 5 resolution D 1 setting 3 9 setting with the marker and search 3 11 Front panel CONFIG area 2 3 display 2 2 ENTRY keypad 2 3 external trigger input connector 2 3 floppy disk drive 2 2 general purpose knob 2 3 PRINT key 2 3 RF input connector 2 3 SETUP area 2 3 side keys 2 2 2 5 STANDBYLED indicator 2 2 START STOP keys 2 3 step keys 2 3 switch 2 2 VIEW area 2 3 FSK analysis 3 109 view menu table 2 71 G General purpose knob front panel 2 3 GPIB connector rear panel 2 4 GSM analysis 3 151 GSM view menu table 2 107 GSMMask view menu table 2 111 GSMPolar view menu table 2
158. ar Measurement values gt Marker 26ch 256k ich 6 489dB at marker position NIDI C Channel number Slot number in radio frame zE om ti HERH Symbol rate and channel Slot number relative to number at that rate data acquisition end point 100 aB n View B CodeWSpectrogram view Start Och Stop 63ch Figure 3 71 Code domain power spectrogram Data source Date and time at data acquisition end point View C Active W CDMA Measurement 99 04 29 16 23 5 Measurement values gt Marker Osym 1 003 132 223deg at marker position 1 5 Freq Err from the left Origin Offset 46 3871aB lt Origin offset Symbol number displayed by turning e Amplitude Symbol Constellation on Phase Amplitude scale 21 782mV Unit View C CodeWPolar view Figure 3 72 Symbol constellation 3 138 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual W CDMA Analysis Data source Code domain power View D Polar Measurement values Marker on ich 6 489dB at marker position A TR E T u and channel number at that rate View D CodeWPower view AB with X Axis set to ShortCode Start Och Stop Figure 3 73 Code domain power Data source Symbol number Symbol power View D Polar Measurement values gt Marker 16ch 256k 1ich Osym 6 238d0B at marker position 5 dE Channel number u arit Symbol rate and channel number at that rate ab dB div 15 View D C
159. ar CDMAPolar codePolar codeWPolar 3gppPolar GSMPolar CCDF O x CDMATime Ol x EyeDiagram SymbolTable EVM x XxX Polar CodeSpectrogram CodePower XZ X CodePolar CodeWSpectrogram CodeWPower X CodeWPolar F 3gppSpectrogram 3gppPower 3gppACPView X 8gppPolar CCDFView Xx CCDF x 1 The data acquired only with the block size of 20 is displayed 2 The file data can not be input directly but displayed through the view shown in the Display column WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Use the utility menu 1 Display the SaveLoad menu a Press the CONFIG UTILITY key b Press the Util B SaveLoad side key c Press the Load side key 2 Press the Load From File IQ side key and select the IQ formatted file NOTE You cannot load AP formatted data in the analyzer data memory The file access menu appears Specify the device directory and file name Refer to Operating File Access Menu on page 3 178 for detail Once you have selected the file the IQ formatted data saved in the file is loaded in the memory 3 Specify Active in Source of the view menu to display the contents of the data memory In this way you can zoom the waveform if the data has been acquired in the Zoom mode WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 177 File Operations Operating File Access Menu This section describes how to save or load data and copy or delete a file using the file
160. arker there Same as Search in the CDMAWaveform view menu on page 2 84 Measure Pressing this side key measures the CDMA time characteristic for the input signal The analyzer acquires data 100 times by default and displays the averaged waveform as Trace2 in yellow The PASS FAIL decision is made by comparing the averaged waveform with the mask settings You can specify the averaging count with Option Num Averages The IS 95 standard requires that the values from 100 measurements be averaged To abort the measurement after you press Measure side key press the Break side key Measure Data Measures the CDMA time characteristic for the data already contained in memory It is useful for example when you loaded the data from a file To abort the measurement after you press Measure side key press the Break side key WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 89 Menu Functions CodeSpectrogram View Menu Table 2 19 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CodeSpectrogram in the CONFIG VIEW menu According to the cdmaOne standard this view displays each channel power measured for each symbol in color with channel along the horizontal axis and symbol time along the vertical axis For details on cdmaOne analysis refer to page 3 127 2 90 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 19 CodeSpectrogram view menu table
161. art frame o Options Center 800MHz Span 100kHz_ Freq 800MHz Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 20d0B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Dual HW 1024 Blackman 400u 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Figure 2 39 View B display 1 view display c Try pressing the A to D keys in the VIEW area d Try pressing the WE and BH keys and the A to D keys in various combinations to see the possible view configurations WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 37 Tutorial Averaging and Compared Display Setting Up the Averaging Acquiring and Displaying the Signals 2 38 The Waveform view has the averaging function that reduces noise on a wave form In this section you learn how to compare averaged waveform with the original The Waveform view is predefined for View A Modify the averaging parameters 1 Modify the averaging parameters a Press the VIEW A key VIEW A means the A key in the VIEW area on the front panel The keys may mentioned like this hereafter b Press the VIEW MAIN key c Press the Average side key d Press the Average side key to select On e Press the Average Type side key to select RMS f Press the Num Averages side key to set the number of sweeps for averaging For example enter 64 using the numeric keypad or the general purpose knob Perform the averaging 2 Press the ROLL key on the front panel The averaging does not work if you press the BLOCK
162. asure Selects the measurement data for display Reference Selects the reference data for display Selects the display format Vector Displays a data in vector format that represents chip to chip movements using a vector Constellation Displays data in constellation format that represents only chips Inputs the time to move the O marker Performs measurement for all the symbols on data memory WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions CodePower View Menu Table 2 21 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CodePower in the CONFIG VIEW menu According to the cdmaOne standard this view displays each channel power measured for the symbol by default specified with Symbol in CodeSpectrogram view menu For details on cdmaOne analysis refer to page 3 127 Table 2 21 CodePower view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions X Axis Defines the parameter for the horizontal axis Specifies that the horizontal axis represents code numbers Symbol Specifies that the horizontal axis represents symbol numbers The display is for the channel on which the marker is positioned when the horizontal axis is code numbers Average Determines whether to perform averaging or not Specifies no averaging Displays the measurement results averaged for the number of symbols specified with Num Averages below Average Type Selects the average mode Performs averaging with the e
163. asurement display 12 1 inch full color TFT display and sturdy cabinet WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Product Overview Targets The analyzer is capable of real time analysis for the following usages Power measurement Power noise C N ACP and OBW m W CDMA 3GPP Code domain power EVM and ACP m CDMA IS 95 Rho spurious characteristics and time characteristics m CCDF measurement m Digital modulation analysis m Analog modulation analysis m Variation analysis in PLL frequency Jitter in reference oscillator of a mobile phone localization of a radio set Hard disk read out jitter m Analysis of momentary noise Mixed noise measurement EMI measurement m Multi path measurement Measurement of electric wave environment m Electric wave interference Radar interference m Electric wave analysis Analyzing electric wave from foreign countries Difference between WCA330 and WCA380 WCA330 and WCA380 have the same functions except for their measurement frequency ranges WCA330 DC to 3 GHz WCA380 DC to 8 GHz The descriptions in this manual apply to both the WCA330 and the WCA380 unless otherwise noted WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 3 Product Overview Architecture Figure 1 2 contains the signal processing system block diagram for the analyzer Front panel key RF and Baseband mode t 3 GHz 8GHz Analog i gt down converter gt front end ISA PCI bridge Wide mode y
164. ation signal intensity dB or dBm frequency position The Number corresponds to the number of the number tag If a spurious signal is beyond the Specified Line Fail is displayed Otherwise empty display results WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 117 CDMA Analysis 3 118 View A Active 97 11 25 20 12 51 848 622 SMH OdBrm 10 AB div 840MHz View B Active 97 11 25 20 12 51 Marker 848 622 SMHz OdBm Center 840MHz Span SMHz Figure 3 61 CDMA analysis with the Spurious basic configuration 5 MHz span WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CDMA Analysis Specified Line Settings By default the specified lines are set as shown in Figures 3 62 and 3 63 The values agree with those specified in the IS 95 and T 53 standards You can view and set the specified line parameters by selecting Options Mask in the CDMAWaveform view menu Level2 54 dB Level1 42 dB gt S Frequency1 900 kHz gt Frequency1 1 98 MHz Figure 3 62 Default specified line when RBW 30 k Levelt 60 dBm Frequency 1 385 MHz Figure 3 63 Default specified line when RBW 1 M WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 119 CDMA Analysis Measurement Procedure 3 120 1 Press CONFIG MODE gt More gt CDMA IS 95 T 53 and select Spurious to set the analyzer with the basic configuration Press the SETUP MAIN key Select the channel as necessary a Press the F
165. ationship between the symbol and bit rates Symbol rate Bit rate x 1 state Number of bits Measurement Selects None no filter or RootRaisedCosine for the filter required to demodulate the Filter digitally modulated signal Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Reference Selects None no filter RaisedCosine or Gaussian for the filter required to create reference Filter data Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Alpha BT Inputs the a BT value The range is 0 0001 to 1 Auto Carrier Determines whether to search the carrier automatically On Searches the carrier automatically and displays the frequency error relative to the center frequency on screen at Freq Err Off Sets the carrier frequency to the value with the Carrier Hz side key which appears by pressing the Off button Carrier Sets carrier frequency when you select Off in Auto Carrier above Burst Sets the burst search parameters Number Frames Specifies the number of frames to be analyzed When the burst exceeds one frame set this parameter to 2 4 or 8 Specifies whether to search burst On or not Off NOTE When you search bursts set the frame position to 0 with the Options Position menu item If you use the defult position 100 you cannot find the bursts Block Size Specifies the frame range to search a burst from the frame specified with Frame refer to page 2 76 The range is 1 to 20 frames Peak Thr
166. axis scale Ver Start Sets the vertical axis start value Auto Scale Automatically sets the start value and scale of the vertical axis so that the entire waveform can be displayed Marker Operates the markers Same as Marker in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 Search Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there Same as Search in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 Average Sets the averaging parameters and starts the process Options Begin Symbol Specifies the first symbol to be averaged The range is 0 to the number of symbols 1 End Symbol Specifies the last symbol to be averaged The range is 0 to the number of symbols 1 All Symbols Specifies that the data is averaged for all the symbols Mkr gt Symbol Sets Begin Symbol and End Symbol with the marker and delta marker Average Type Same as Average Type above on the top menu level Execute Executes averaging 2 94 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions CodeWSpectrogram View Menu Table 2 22 on the next page summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CodeWSpectrogram in the CONFIG VIEW menu According to the W CDMA standard this view displays each channel power measured for each slot in color with channel along the horizontal axis and slot time along the vertical axis For details on W CDMA analysis refer to page 3 135 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 95 Menu Functions
167. ayed Clicking this kind of menu item causes the menu item display to change as shown below The Up and Down arrows indicate that this menu item has been selected Select the desired item from the drop down listing or move and select the item using the Up or Down arrow A toggle menu item which switches between the two selections each time you Click on the menu item No function assigned Figure E 4 Operating the side menu 7 items in lower level E 6 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix E Mouse Operations NOTE When the instrument is used with the front panel interface in the open position the side keys and corresponding side menu items are not in the same order as when the front panel interface is in the closed position Selecting the CONFIG Another way to display the associated side menu is to click in any of the SETUP or VIEW Menu locations as shown in Figure E 5 3 EI ES MAIN FREQ SPAN REF allelic s 8 knz ms ponj u conic MAN SCALE MKR SRCH Fe MODE SETUP VIEW UTIL Ba O A e ict BLOCK When you click in this area the _ ee a ee CONFIG menu appears Tagg ee regan OTT TIT spectrom When you click in any view frame in display its VIEW menu appears When you click in this area the __ Freg 1 899 931 256z SETUP menu appears Source Active x Format Freq mpl z a diheohoatt pE wlll bade al ue a a Hitt WL i iid Lie Frame frame
168. ber of points specified here For time domain data this value is also used for sampling Refer to FFT Parameters on page 3 15 and Frame Period and Real Time on page 3 25 for the details FFT Window Selects Blackman Hamming or Rect for the FFT window Refer to FFT Parameters on page 3 15 for details Freq Span Sets a center frequency span and reference level The center frequency span and reference level can be Ref accessed directly using the SETUP FREQ SPAN and REF keys respectively NOTE When you change modes from Baseband to RF IQ or Wide or vice versa these setting will be changed to the defaults Sets a center frequency You must set the value so that Frequency Span 2 does not exceed the frequency range available for the analyzer Refer to Frequency and Span on page 3 9 for details 3G 2G 1G 500M Selects a predefined span This value depends on the input mode 200M 100M 50M Baseband mode 100 Hz to 10 MHz in 1 2 5 steps 30M 20M 10M RF mode 100 Hz to 3 GHz in 1 2 5 steps 6M 5M 2M 1M IQ and Wide modes 10 MHz 20 MHz or 30 MHz ce a If you press the Max Span side key the maximum span is set 5k 2k 1k Refer to Frequency and Span on page 3 9 for details 500 200 100 Sets a reference level It must be greater than the maximum level of an input signal If an overload occurs the measured data will be invalid Refer to Reference Level on page 3 13 for details Sets the maximum span Mixer an
169. bservation of the digitally modulated signal and the Average function is using the D1 register the resulting display will be unpredictable If these two functions are in use concurrently do not use the same register for the two functions Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed after a trigger event If this frame number agrees with the trigger position specified with Setup Trigger gt Pos the frame for which a trigger is generated is displayed By default Position is set to zero current frame 2 78 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions EyeDiagram View Menu Table 2 13 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as EyeDiagram in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 Table 2 13 EyeDiagram view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Specifies the source data for the view Refer to Process Flow on page 3 98 Specifies the Measurement data register pair output from the Polar View as the input source Specifies the Reference data register pair output from the Polar View as the input source Format Selects the display format ef Displays Eye diagram with data along the vertical axis Displays Eye diagram with Q data along the vertical axis Displays Eye diagram with phase along the vertical axis Eye Length Sets the length of the symbol to be displayed This is the scale setti
170. c shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Observe Standard Precautions for Lifting Heavy Objects The product weighs more than 30 kg To avoid falling or injury carry the product with two or more people WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual XV General Safety Summary xvi Symbols and Terms A A Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that
171. cations Electrical Characteristics Unless otherwise stated the following tables of electrical characteristics and features apply to the spectrum analyzer after a 20 minute warm up period within the environmental limits and after all normalization procedures have been carried out Table B 1 Frequency Characteristic Input frequency Description Baseband DC to 10 MHz RF RF1 band 10 MHz to 3 GHz RF WCA330 RF1 WCA380 RF2 band 2 5 GHz to 3 5 GHz WCA380 RF8 band 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz WCA380 RF4 band 5 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz WCA380 1 Q input DC to 16 MHz Center frequency setting resolution 0 1 Hz Residual FM Reference frequency Aging per day Aging per year Temperature drift Total frequency error Reference output level External reference input Table B 2 Spectrum purity Characteristic Spectrum Purity Frequency 1500 MHz Carrier offset 10 kHz 2 Hz p p 1 x 10 9 after 30 days of operation 1 x 10 7 after 30 days of operation 1x 10 7 10 C to 40 C 2 x 10 7 within one year after calibration gt 0 dBm 10 MHz 10 to 6 dBm Description RF attenuation 0 dB 100 dBc Hz Normal IF mode 95 dBc Hz HiRes IF mode Frequency 1500 MHz Carrier offset 100 kHz Frequency 1500 MHz Carrier offset 1 MHz 103 dBc Hz Normal IF mode 105 dBc Hz HiRes IF mode 120 dBc Hz Normal IF mode 125 dBc Hz HiRes IF mode B 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix
172. ccuracy measurement WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual imo Freq Err 32 462Hz 5 EVN 0 6841 rms 2 141 at 75sym Origin Offset 50 996daB deg Mag Err 0 344 rms 1 014 at 78sym Phase Err 0 44deg 1 225deg at 7S5sym Rho 0 9999 Length 147 sym 80 00101110 11111000 10111001 10010000 01001010 Error Max Frame 14 Frame r 15 Frame 16 Frame a y A Frame i 18 Frame E Frame 20 Frame Frame EVM view View D GSM Mod Accuracy Measurement Mod Accuracy 32 462Hz 1 225deg 0 44deg 145 142 137 133 129 125 121 GSM view Measurement side key to select the measurement item Measurement result from the top Frequency error Phase error max e Phase error RMS 3 155 GSM Analysis Output power 1 Select OutputPower with the Measurement side key in the GSM view Measurement menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 GSMPolar view Marker 0 0415ym 1 001 42 924deg fee Freq Err 40 341Hz Origin Offset 52 935dB i Scale 162 656mV Unit SEIPE RIE Marker 935MHz 23 564dBm 137frame 303 frame o dBm Spectrogram view View A Active GMSK Measurement 9 21 00 1 48 27 PM View B Active Freqampl 9 21 00 1 48 27 PM 2 Press the Burst Count side key and set the number of bursts to acquire 3 Press the Measure side key to start acquiring data The analyzer repeats to m
173. ch ON STANDBY ceceeeeees 1 12 Figure 1 7 New clock settings dialog box cceceeeeees 1 13 Figure 1 8 Display of self test results upon power up upper left of SCHON 6 5 5 05 15 ga E wd edb deee E E 9 ovale 96 Sage oe uere 0 1 13 Figure 1 9 Initial screen 0 cc ccc cece cece cee e ee eees 1 14 Figure 1 10 Angular adjustment of tilt display 1 15 Figure 1 11 Displaying UNCAL cece cece cece eens 1 20 Figure 1 12 Running the self gain calibration 1 21 Figure 1 13 Running calibration and diagnostics 1 22 Figure 1 14 Execution results of diagnostic routines View C 1 25 Figure 2 1 Front panel map left part cece eee eee 2 2 Figure 2 2 Front panel map right part cece eeee 2 3 Figure 2 3 Rear panel map cece eee c eee weer e eens 2 4 Figure 2 4 Display screen configuration eeeeees 2 5 Figure 2 5 View general display information 2 6 Figure 2 6 Status display areas 0 cece cece cece ee eee 2 7 Figure 2 7 Setup display area 0 cece cece eee rere eens 2 9 Figure 2 8 Menu display area and keys eeeeeeeeee 2 11 Figure 2 9 CONFIG menu keys 0 cece cece cere eeeee 2 12 Figure 2 10 SETUP menu keys cece cece rece ceeee 2 12 Figure 2 11 VIEW keys cece ccc e cece cece eee ec eeee 2 13 Figu
174. ch ON STANDBY shown in Figure 2 20 to toggle the analyzer into operation STANDBY O ON Power switch l STANDBY Figure 2 20 Power switch WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 21 Tutorial The analyzer should boot up with the initial screen shown in Figure 2 21 This concludes the analyzer preparation tutorial View A Active Freqampl Config lt Mode Load From File CFG Save To File CFG Spectrum Spectrogram JLI gt More Freg 1 5GHz Span 3GHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEBMLE RFAtt 200B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Freq HW 1024 Blackman 80u 160u 6 Auto On 1 Figure 2 21 Initial screen 2 22 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial Configuring the Analyzer with Basic Configuration Patterns This section describes the easy way to measure a spectrum using the basic configuration patterns in the CONFIG MODE menu Measuring the Spectrum Follow these steps to quickly measure the spectrum of the input signal 1 Press the MODE key in the CONFIG area see Figure 2 22 When you press the CONFIG MODE key the CONFIG MODE menu is displayed at the right side of the screen Config lt Mode LC Load CFG Save CFG Spectrum side key REF Spectrum Q e z a O CONFIG MODE menu CONFIG MODE key
175. ches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there You can specify the symbol by moving the marker vertically Peak Searches the peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Max Searches for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Min Searches for the minimum peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Separation Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks Same as Separation in the Waveform view menu on page 2 68 Ver Specifies the vertical position i e the symbol number to which you move O By default the marker is positioned in frame 0 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Ver Mag Sets the number of vertical pixels to display one frame The range is 1 to 10 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions CodePolar View Menu Table 2 20 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CodePolar in the CONFIG VIEW menu This view displays IQ loci and chip positions according to the cdmaOne standard For details on cdmaOne analysis refer to page 3 127 Table 2 20 CodePolar view menu table Top level Source Analysis Symbol Standard Manual Setup Subordinate level options and descriptions Specifies the source data for the view Same as Source in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 Specifies
176. cquisition begins the scale is restored to the original setting In the Waterfall view a spectrum for each frame is compressed vertically Use Height and Gap in the view menu to specify the vertical height for a frame on the screen and the frame interval in pixels respectively Use Height Start and Height Scale to specify the start value and the height on the vertical axis respectively NOTE In the Waterfall display for the frequency domain Hor Start indicating the horizontal axis start value is applied only to the frame 0 The start value for each frame depends on the frame period For detail on frame period refer to Frame Period and Real Time on page 3 25 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 37 Displaying Waveform Data Changing Display Frames The two dimensional views such as Waveform and Analog display data for one frame By default the data for frame 0 into which current data is written is displayed The three dimensional views such as Spectrogram and Waterfall display several frames simultaneously If you switch from one display frame to another when several views are displayed on the screen the frames in the other views are also switched This subsection shows how to change display frames and turn the view linking feature on off Three dimensional view default display frame Frame N Nw fl ty Frame 3 Frame 2 Frame 1 Frame 0 Block size x Trigger count 1 Two dimensional view de
177. crificing the precision of observation Setting the Zoom Mode To expand the display you must first acquire the waveform in the Zoom mode 1 Place the analyzer in the Zoom mode a Press the CONFIG MODE key b Press the Zoom side key The analyzer is now in the Zoom mode The center frequency and span settings are still unchanged Check them with the menu 2 Press the SETUP FREQ key With the Freq and Span menu items make sure that the center frequency and span settings are 800 MHz and 100 kHz respectively If you changed these settings previously they will not be reset when you change acquisition or display modes To set them follow the steps listed on pages 2 28 and 2 30 2 40 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial Acquiring the Signal The zoom function requires the Block mode 3 Press the BLOCK key on the front panel to acquire the signal Figure 2 41 shows an example of the signal acquired in the Zoom mode UH CAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE View A Active FreqAmpl 2000 04 07 11 14 59 View C Zoom Freqampl 2000 04 07 11 13 30 Ok n Marker 800 000 312 SMHz 21 98dBm Ma Setup lt Standard Span Ref d a Freq Hz atl tae ah Hits petit i f re 100k Span View B Active FreqAmpl 2000 04 07 11 14 59 View D Zoom Freqdmpl 2000 04 07 11 13 30 Marker 800 000 312 SMHz 21 98dBm Oframe 0s i OOdBm Of Max Span Manual Mixer RFAtt Mixer Lev
178. criptions Specifies the input data used for the view Same as Source in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 Specifies the number of the time slot to display the IQ locus The default is slot 0 which contains the latest data Configures the analyzer according to the standard digital modulating system settings W CDMA Selects W CDMA with the chip rate of 4 096 Mcpc 4 096M W CDMA Selects W CDMA with the chip rate of 8 192 Mcpc 8 192M W CDMA Selects W CDMA with the chip rate of 16 384 Mcpc 16 384M Sets the modulating system chip rate filter and a BT manually Modulation Selects the modulating system required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal W CDMA Selects W CDMA system Chip Rate Inputs the chip rate 4 096 M 8 192 M or 16 384 M Measurement Selects None no filter or RootRaisedCosine for the filter required to demodulate the Filter digitally modulated signal Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Reference Selects None no filter RaisedCosine or Gaussian for the filter required to create Filter reference data Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Alpha BT Inputs the a BT value Auto Carrier Determines whether to search the carrier automatically Same as Auto Carrier in the Polar view menu on page 2 77 Symbol Constellation Specifies how to display the constellation On Displays the constellation for one short code specified with Options Time Slot Off Displays
179. ct on the average The utility average function does not support the RMSExpo mode WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Average and Peak Hold Operating Example of the View Average Function In this example View A simultaneously displays an ordinary spectrum and its averaged waveform 1 Set the view a Press CONFIG VIEW gt View A and select Waveform b Press VIEW A gt VIEW MAIN gt Average c With the Average side key select On d With the Average Type side key select the averaging mode e With the Num Averages side key set the number of averaging f Press the side key View A lt gt Options Trace2 Source and select Active 2 Press the ROLL key to acquire the signal The ordinary spectrum and its averaged data are displayed simultaneously in the View A see Figure 3 31 If you press the Reset side key the averaging restarts View C Active Freqampl D1 96 12 03 22 52 00 Marker OHz 75 29dBm Averaged waveform Ordinary spectrum waveform Peak Hold mode FM modulated signal PM ti ci ad fal j ABr VAL ULM AE AI wiht WES bd Center SMHz Span 1MHz Figure 3 31 Simultaneous display of a spectrum and its averaged waveform Example WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 61 Average and Peak Hold Averaging the Data Data that was previously acquired in the Roll or Block mode can be averaged Already in Memory using the following procedure View A is used as the Waveform view 1
180. ction describes the averaging process and provides operating examples The average function also includes the peak hold WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 57 Average and Peak Hold Averaging Process There are two ways of averaging m Using the average in the Waveform view m Using the average in the Utility menu Using the Average inthe In the averaging of the Waveform view when you select Average Average Waveform View On the analyzer performs averaging while acquiring the data In the Block mode it displays raw data without averaging When you select Average Execute the analyzer averages the data that has been acquired once in the Roll or Block mode See Figure 3 29 Data memory Time domain Analog process data Average On FFT process Average gt Display Frequency domain data Display For concurrent display Execute use Trace 2 y Figure 3 29 Averaging process in the view 3 58 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Average and Peak Hold Using the Average inthe The average function in the CONFIG UTILITY Util C menu can process data Utility Menu when waveform acquisition is at a stop The data to be processed must be in a file or in the data memory The analyzer has eight data registers that store the acquisition data see Fig ure 3 30 You can use data registers D1 to D8 to store the averaging results The average data written in a da
181. ctions The following topics are discussed m About the cdmaOne analysis m Operating examples m Standard code domain power measurement m Code domain power measurement for continuous symbols WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 127 cdmaOne Analysis About cdmaOne Analysis Measurement Functions Measurement Process 3 128 The analyzer processes the cdmaOne down link signals specified in TIA EIA IS 95 A 1995 5 TIA EIA The function covers the cdmaOne parameters listed in Table 3 15 Table 3 15 cdmaOne parameters Item Description Chip rate 1 2288 Mcps Symbol rate 19 2 ksps Number of channels 64 Spreading code Pilot PN code Orthogonal code Walsh Modulation method Foward link filter QPSK IS 95 or IS 95 plus equalizer The analyzer has the following cdmaOne measurement functions Code domain power The analyzer measures the relative power to total power for each channel Code domain power spectrogram The analyzer measures the code domain power continuously for 6144 symbols 0 32 s maximum and displays spectrogram for each symbol Vector constellation The analyzer measures vector loci and chip points for all signals Modulation accuracy The analyzer measures EVM error vector magnitude amplitude error phase error waveform quality and origin offset for all signals The analyzer processes the input signals internally with the following procedure 1 A vu e Y BK Perform
182. d RF attenuator levels are usually set automatically When you want to set these levels manually select Mixer or RF Att and set the value as described below Mixer Level When you select Mixer in Manual above select the level The mixer level depends on the Band setting RF WCA330 RF1 RF2 WCA380 5 10 15 20 25 dBm RF3 RF4 WCA380 5 15 25 dBm Select the level necessary for your measurement The default is 25 dBm Normally use the default If your measurement requires high dynamic range such as Adjacent Channel Leak Power ACP measurement you can increase the level up to 5 dBm NOTE Raising the mixer level increases waveform distortion WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 55 Menu Functions Table 2 4 SETUP standard menu table cont Top level Frame Period Block Size Trigger Subordinate level options and descriptions When you select RF Att in Manual above select the level The RF attenuator level depends on the Band setting RF WCA330 RF1 RF2 WCA380 0 to 50 dB in 0 2 5 7 step RF3 RF4 WCA380 0 10 20 30 40 50 dB Freq Offset The frequency displayed on the screen is the sum of the frequency actually processed by the analyzer and its frequency offset This setting is required for example when a down converter is connected externally This does not affect the frequency internally processed by the analyzer Usually set this value to zero Ref Offset The reference
183. d in the block set with Block The range is 0 to 100 0 represents the first frame in the block and 100 represents the last Hold Ver Scale Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the vertical axis when you change the input source Same as Hold Ver Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 2 88 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 18 CDMATime view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Scales the horizontal and vertical axes Scale Marker Search Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Scale Sets the vertical axis scale Ver Start Sets the vertical axis start value Rising Edge Enlarges the waveform around the rising edge Falling Edge Enlarges the waveform around the falling edge Full Scale Returns the usual display state when the rising or falling edge waveform is in enlarged display Marker Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as the symbol O and the delta marker as O and For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Specifies the horizontal position to which you move O By default O is positioned at the origin of the horizontal axis Turns the delta marker on or off Changes the and marker positions each other Searches for the peak spectrum and places the m
184. d symbol rate Short code in a long code mask LMS part Modulation method Baseband filter WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 8 bit Gold code using M sequence obtained from the generator polynomial QPSK Root cosine with a 0 22 default 0 0001 lt as1 3 135 W CDMA Analysis Measurement Functions The analyzer has the following measurement functions Code domain power The analyzer measures the relative power to total power for each channel with multi rate and 1024 channels maximum Time vs code domain power The analyzer measures the relative power at symbol points for each channel as time series Code domain power spectrogram The analyzer measures the code domain power continuously for maximum 160 slots 0 1 s and displays spectrogram for each slot Vector constellation The analyzer measures the vector loci and chip points for entire signals as well as constellation at symbol points for each channel Modulation accuracy The analyzer measures EVM error vector magnitude amplitude error phase error waveform quality and origin offset for each channel Measurement Process The analyzer processes the input signals internally with the following procedure 1 eA A we e Y N 3 136 Perform the flatness correction and filtering Establish the synchronization with LMS of the 1 perch channel Determine the long code number range at the 24 perch channel Establish the long code number and phase Correct the fr
185. dard this view displays each channel power measured for the symbol specified with Symbol in CodeWSpectrogram view menu For details on W CDMA analysis refer to page 3 135 Table 2 24 CodeWPower view menu table Top level X Axis Average Average Type Num Averages Subordinate level options and descriptions Defines the parameter concerning the horizontal axis Short Code Specifies that the horizontal axis represents short code numbers Symbol Specifies that the horizontal axis represents symbol numbers The display is for the channel on which the marker is positioned when the horizontal axis is short code numbers Time Slot Specifies that the horizontal axis represents time slot numbers Determines whether to average data or not Specifies the data is not averaged i Displays the measurement result data averaged with Average Type and Num Averages below Selects an average mode This item is displayed when Average is set to On Same as Average Type in the CodePower view menu on page 2 93 Specifies the number of slots to be averaged The range is 1 to 108 If Average Type is set to RMS slots specified with Num Averages are averaged before switching to a fixed display If Average Type is set to RMSExpo Num Averages is used for weighing old data Refer to page 3 57 for details on averaging Time Slot Specifies the number of the time slot to be displayed The default is the slot 0 which contains the latest data This
186. de The analyzer has the following trigger modes Auto Data is acquired under the following conditions regardless of trigger generation If you turn on the trigger count when you press the BLOCK key on the front panel data is acquired the number of times specified with the trigger count Times Otherwise data acquisition is repeated until you press the BLOCK key on the front panel again Normal When a trigger is generated data is acquired When you press the BLOCK key on the front panel with the trigger count on data is acquired the number of times specified with the trigger count Times after a trigger is generated Otherwise data acquisition is repeated while waiting for trigger generation until you press the BLOCK key on the front panel again 2 56 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 4 SETUP standard menu table cont Top level Subordinate level and descriptions Same as Normal except that data is displayed after all blocks are acquired Delayed Same as Normal except that data acquisition completes at the time specified with Delayed refer to page 2 57 after trigger event generation Timeout This mode is valid when the trigger source is set to Internal When a trigger event does not occur within the time specified with Timeout refer to page 2 57 data acquisition stops If a signal suddenly disappears when the trigger mode is set to Timeout you can examine the contents of data just b
187. de when the input frequency band is set to RF for WCA330 RF1 to 4 for WCA380 Wide Mode This mode has an IF bandwidth of 32 MHz which is the widest of all the three modes It is suitable for modulation analysis of wide bandwidth signals or code domain analysis of W CDMA A span can be expanded to maximum 30 MHz per frame You can specify the Wide mode when the input frequency band is set to RF for WCA330 RF1 to 4 for WCA380 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Input and Memory Modes Memory Modes Scalar Frequency Dual and Zoom If the number of FFT points is set to 1024 or 256 the data memory for up to 4 000 or 16 000 frames can be allocated respectively see Figure 3 2 The following four modes can be available depending on memory or frame usage Time domain data For 1024 FFT points the data memory for up to 4000 frames The number of FFT points is fixed at is allocated 1024 The data memory for up to lt Frequency domain data 4 4000 frames 2000 frames for each For 256 FFT points the data is allocated memory for up to 16 000 frames is allocated Frequency domain data XN Memory mode Memory mode Scalar IF mode Normal Scalar IF mode HiRes Frequency Dual Zoom Figure 3 2 Usage of data memory Frequency Mode Only frequency domain data is written into every frame Refer to Figure 3 2 This mode enables the analyzer to capture signals of twice the length possibl
188. dicator is for only the current frame you could miss an overload condition when you have set a long span in the RF mode In a long span two or more physical frames are used by one scan when a high level signal occurs OVERLOAD turns red momentarily and then disappears If you have made settings so that one scan uses one physical frame a similar phenome non may result when a single shot signal occurs 3 14 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual a FFT Parameters The analyzer is equipped with a hardware fast Fourier FFT analyzer This enables concurrent measurement of time and frequency domain data The following three FFT parameters are available m FFT type m FFT point m FFT window These parameters can be set by pressing the SETUP MAIN key gt Memory Mode Input FF T This section explains each parameter and how to set it WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 15 FFT Parameters FFT Type FFT Points FFT is usually performed by hardware however you can choose to have software perform FFT to improve accuracy Software uses floating decimal numbers to perform FFT resulting in better accuracy but a lower speed The FFT type depends on memory modes refer to Table 3 6 below If the IF mode is set to HiRes or Wide only software FFT is allowed On the other hand if the memory mode is set to Frequency only hardware FFT is allowed You can select either 256 or 1 024 for the number of FFT points This number is the nu
189. dow refer to FFT parame ters on page 3 15 m Measurement can be performed for data captured in the vector mode In the vector mode one frame of data is acquired by one scan When the input mode is Baseband IQ or Wide the analyzer is always in the vector mode When in the RF mode the analyzer is in the vector mode with the span of 6 MHz or less To perform power measurement you have to use special markers called band power markers as well as the ordinary markers For details refer to Marker Operations and Peak Search on page 3 45 and Band Power Marker Operations on page 3 90 The power per frequency measured with the markers is calculated by the bandwidth per bin For the bandwidth per bin refer to Relation among Frame Bin and Pixel on page 3 41 You must use an averaged waveform in any power measurement although it may not appear in the following operation descriptions Select Source gt Average in the Waveform view or 3gppACPView For averaging refer to Averaging and Peak Hold beginning on page 3 57 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement Noise Measurement The Noise measurement measures the noise per frequency dBm Hz readout The value of the vertical component at the marker position is divided by the bandwidth of the bin To measure noise follow this procedure 1 Display the spectrum in the Waveform view or 3gppACPView for the 3GPP standard 2 From the view menu select Options
190. e Start 50us Scale Sus div Figure 3 89 CCDF measurement View G Data source View H Di CCDF 99 03 10 11 06 39 Measurement values at gt Marker 32 607 marker position from the left Horizontal readout Threshold power e Vertical readout Probability The value at which the probability is zero crest factor 2qaB div_11 910B Figure 3 90 CCDFView display View H WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual a es Auto Save Function Restrictions WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual The auto save function stores captured data into specified files while acquiring data It operates in the AutoSave view with two modes the RollSave mode for the Roll acquisition and the BlockSave mode for the Block acquisition With the auto save function you can save data to files in a long time acquisition for further analysis The auto save function operates with the analyzer basic application software version 3 12 or later In the Block mode the analyzer does not start the next acquisition until all of the one block data acquired has been stored into a file The time required for the file write depends on the block size i e the number of frames and the destination media HD FD MO JAZZ or network disk etc For the same media type the access time additionally varies with the internal state of the media For example suppose you store the data onto the analyzer hard disk drive HDD If the settings are 4 000 fra
191. e a Press the SETUP MAIN key b Press the Band side key to select RF for WCA330 or RF1 for WCA380 with the general purpose knob c Press the IF Mode side key to select Normal with the general purpose knob 4 Set the frequency span and reference level a Press the SETUP FREQ key b Press the Span side key to enter 1 5 GHz using the keypad c Press the Max Span side key d Press the Ref side key to enter 0 dBm using the keypad For the CDMA Configuration Refer to Table C 2 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key on the front panel 2 Press the side key targeting the basic configuration Set the parameters that are not reset 3 Set the frequency span and reference level a Press SETUP MAIN gt Freq Span Ref b Press the Standard side key to select IS95 using the general purpose knob c Press the Channel side key to enter 777 using the keypad WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual C 9 Appendix C Default Settings d Press the Span side key to enter the following value using the keypad m 5 MHz for EVM Rho m 30 MHz for Spurious and Time Domain e Press the Ref side key to enter 0 dBm using the keypad For the 3GPP Configuration Refer to Table C 3 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key on the front panel 2 Press the side key targeting the basic configuration Set the parameters that are not reset 3 Change the input mode a Press the SETUP MAIN key b Press the Band side key to select RF for WCA330 or RF
192. e same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Products in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Safety Certification Compliance Equipment Type Test and measuring Safety Class Class 1 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex H grounded product Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex J Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only B 14 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual eee O_ Seeeas Appendix C Default Settings The default settings of the basic c
193. e Figure 1 6 STANDBY O ON Standby LED Power switch m STANDBY Figure 1 6 Power switch ON STANDBY When you power on the analyzer Windows 98 is booted and then applications are started The STANDBY LED goes out after blinking for a while 1 12 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Installation and Power On When the New clock settings dialog box appears If Windows 98 displays the New clock settings dialog box at power on see Figure 1 7 press the OK button with the mouse to start the analyzer application New clock settings 5 Windows has updated your clock as a result of Daylight Saving Time Please verify that your new clock settings are corect Figure 1 7 New clock settings dialog box For the date and time setting procedure refer to page 3 209 Self Test When you turn on the power the analyzer performs a pass fail test for ROM and RAM using an internal diagnosis routine and checks whether the A20 Digital Down Converter board is installed Upon completion it displays the result as shown in Figure 1 8 When Fail or Not installed is displayed contact your local Tektronix representatives WCA380 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ANALYZER Copyright C 2000 SONY TEKTRONIX CORPORATION Main System Version Sub System Version 4 1 Rom Pass Ram Pass A20 Installed Opti
194. e RE INPUT SaveLoad ACEC O Figure 1 12 Running the self gain calibration IQ Offset Calibration This calibration routine compensates the IQ signal offset between the signal source and the analyzer when inputting IQ signals directly from the rear panel connectors NOTE Set the level of the I and Q signals to zero before performing the following procedure m Press the UTILITY key in the front panel CONFIG area See Figure 1 12 D Press the Util A SelfCal side key B Press the IQ Offset Cal side key The calibration runs Allow at least 30 seconds to complete the process Wide IQ Balance This calibration routine compensates the DC component balance of IQ signals in Calibration the Wide mode For the Wide mode refer to Selecting the IF mode on page 3 4 Press the UTILITY key in the front panel CONFIG area See Figure 1 12 Press the Util A SelfCal side key 3 Press the Wide IQ Balance Cal side key Calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 21 Calibration and Diagnostics Wide IQ Full Calibration This routine performs the factory full calibration for IQ signal balance in the Wide mode For the Wide mode refer to Selecting the IF mode on page 3 4 1 Press the MODE key in the front panel CONFIG area See Figure 1 12 Press the More side key twice Press the Calibration side key
195. e analyzer for the external sync mode In this mode the external trigger position is displayed on the time axis with a vertical line marker allowing you to measure input signal delay relative to the trigger signal Input the external trigger signal from the EXT TRIG connector on the front panel with TTL level Trigger occurs on the rising edge of the trigger signal The external sync mode is available in the Wide IF mode For the IF mode refer to page 3 4 The marker accuracy is as follows 50 ns for 20 MHz and 30 MHz span 100 ns for 10 MHz span Configures the analyzer for the measurements according to the GSM Global System for Mobile Measurement Communication For details refer to GSM Analysis on page 3 151 Calibration Executes the auto calibration For details refer to Wide IQ full calibration on page 1 22 Diag Executes the internal diagnostic routines For details refer to Diagnosis on page 1 23 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 49 Menu Functions Table 2 3 CONFIG menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Setup Loads the predefined standard settings for a center frequency span reference level and trigger Switches side key functions Allows you to select items using the Setup side key Allows you to display the item selected with the Setup side key Selects the Setup program The Setup submenu changes according to the selection of a basic setting pattern with the C
196. e arrow f side keys c Repeat substeps a and b until you set all the fields Change the time zone with the following substeps or skip to the step 6 a Move the cursor to the Time amp Date tab using the general purpose knob and press the right arrow key to select the Time Zone tab b Using the general purpose knob move the cursor to select the field c Change the value with the arrow f side keys To select the check box use the Space Bar side key When you are finished move the cursor to the OK button using the general purpose knob and press the Space Bar side key to confirm your settings The Date Time Properties dialog box appears again Press UTIL D side key and select None to close the Date Time Properties dialog box WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying the Version and Self Test Result The analyzer executes the self test and displays the result at power up see Figure 3 109 The display also contains the version information of the system software You can see the contents at any time after power up of the analyzer To display the version and self test result perform these steps 1 Press any key in the CONFIG area on the front panel For example press the CONFIG MODE key 2 Press the uppermost side key WCA380 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ANALYZER Copyright C 2000 SONY TEKTRONIX CORPORATION Main System Version Sub System Version 4 1 Rom Pass Ram Pass A20
197. e cdmaOne compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 90 CodePolar This view has basically the same functions as the Polar view except for the cdmaOne compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 92 CodePower This view has basically the same functions as the Waveform view except for the cdmaOne compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 93 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 51 Menu Functions Table 2 3 CONFIG menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions W CDMA related view CodeW This view has basically the same functions as the Spectrogram view except Spectrogram for the W CDMA compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 95 CodeWPolar This view has basically the same functions as the Polar view except for the W CDMA compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 97 CodeWPower This view has basically the same functions as the Waveform view except for the W CDMA compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 99 3GPP related view 3gppACPView This view has the 3GPP compliant functions for measuring ACP For detailed settings refer to page 2 100 3gpp This view has basically the same functions as the Spectrogram view except Spectrogram for the 3GPP compliant analysis For detailed settings refer to page 2 103 3gppPolar This
198. e current data is written 2 72 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 10 Spectrogram view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Options Monochrome Selects monochrome or color display ons Selects monochrome display lof o Selects color display default Number Colors Selects the number of display colors 100 default or 10 Hold Color Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the Y color axis when you change the Scale input source On Retains the scale setting of the Y axis Off Resets the scale setting of the Y axis The full scale display results Time Scale Specifies whether the time scale is displayed on screen Scale Marker Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes search Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Scale Sets the vertical axis scale The range is 1 to 32 The frames are thinned out by this number For example if you set Ver Scale to 10 the spectrogram is displayed every ten frames Ver Start Same as Ver Start on the top level on page 2 72 Color Scale Inputs the height of the level represented in colors The level is represented in ten colors from the minimum blue to the maximum red The level under the minimum is represented in black Color Start Inputs the start value of the level represented in colors Full Scale Sets the
199. e default values of the basic configuration patterns refer to Appendix C 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key on the front panel 2 Select a basic configuration pattern For example press the Dual side key to configure the analyzer for the Dual mode or press the Zoom side key for the Zoom mode For details on menus refer to CONFIG Menu on page 2 48 Use the following procedure to change the input and memory modes 1 Select an input frequency band a Press SETUP MAIN gt Band b Use the general purpose knob to select the band you prefer from Baseband RF for WCA330 RF1 to 4 for WCA380 and IQ 2 Select an IF mode a Press the IF Mode side key b Use the general purpose knob to select the mode from Normal HiRes and Wide 3 Select a memory mode a Press the side key Memory Mode Input FFT gt Memory Mode b Use the general purpose knob to select the mode from Frequency Dual and Zoom There is no Scalar mode selection The mode is automatically set when you set a span to 10 MHz or more For how to set spans refer to page 3 9 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Input and Memory Modes Mode Summary Table 3 3 summarizes the relationship among modes spans and frame periods For details on frame period refer to Frame Period and Real Time on page 3 25 Table 3 3 Mode summary Baseband Normal Frequency Optionally set Disabled Dual Optionally set Disabled Zoom Consecutive not se
200. e in the Dual or Zoom mode Up to 10 MHz span is allowed Scalar Mode The above Frequency mode is switched to the Scalar mode when the input mode is set to RF and the span is above 6 MHz One logical frame comprises data acquired by several scan so that up to 3 GHz span can be processed For example with a span of 3 GHz one frame comprises data acquired through 600 scans refer to RF Mode on page 3 3 Dual Mode Frequency and time domain data is written concurrently into memory see Figure 3 2 The block size the number of frames for each domain is reduced to half You can set the frame period to any value The number of FFT points is fixed at 1024 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 5 Input and Memory Modes Setting the Mode 3 6 Setting a Basic Configuration Pattern Changing Modes Zoom mode Frequency and time domain data is written concurrently into memory see Figure 3 2 The block size the number of frames for each domain is reduced to half In the Zoom mode the frame period is fixed so that frames are acquired continuously As to the acquired signals you can change the settings of the center frequency and the span within the their original ranges to display them again The number of FFT points is fixed at 1024 For frame period refer to Frame Period and Real Time on page 3 25 You can use the CONFIG MODE menu to set a basic configuration pattern for the analyzer including the input and memory modes For th
201. e keys after pressing the More key 3 Use the general purpose knob to select a view You can define one to eight views and display up to four views simultaneously Switching Views to E to H You can switch display between View A to D and View E to H respectively see Figure 4 14 For example you want to switch display from View A to View E do the following procedure m When View A is currently displayed Press the VIEW A key twice m When View A is not currently displayed Press the VIEW A key three times If you want to switch back from View E to View A press the VIEW A key twice Specifying a DataSource Specify a data source and display format for the defined view using the and Display Format following steps 1 Select the defined view For example press the VIEW A key 2 Press the VIEW MAIN key A view menu appears 3 Press the Source side key and use the general purpose knob to select a data source 4 Press the Format side key and use the general purpose knob to select a display format Selection items for the source and format depend on view types Refer to the view menu descriptions on page 2 63 and below NOTE When you specify None for Source in a view menu the view is empty Specifying the Layouton Select one of the view layout keys see Figure 3 15 to define a view layout the Screen WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 33 Displaying Waveform Data One View Display If you press the J key
202. e power is on turn off the Power Switch on the front N CAUTION To avoid damaging the analyzer make sure that the power is off before panel and wait until the power shuts off completely For the normal analyzer operation the mouse is not necessary You can use it in these cases m When you want to operate with a mouse instead of the front panel Refer to Appendix E for the mouse operations m When Windows 98 displays a dialog box for maintaining the operating system for example changing the time CAS S09 09 Mouse connector oro 609 oo Ld 6 I o Figure 1 4 Mouse connector location rear panel WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 11 Installation and Power On Turning On the Power 1 Turn on the principal power switch on the rear panel See Figure 1 5 0 O o 000000000000000 o0o00000000000000 00000000000000 oooooooaooooaoo 000000000000000 000000000000000 000000000000000 000000000000000 000000000000000 000000000000000 oo O O Principal power switch OO O O o0oo0o0000000000000 g g Figure 1 5 Principal power switch on the rear panel When you turn on the principal power switch a voltage is placed on the standby circuit in the analyzer Make sure that the STANDBY LED is lit 2 Turn ON the switch ON STANDBY located at the bottom left corner of the front panel Se
203. e the down link signal Off Uses the scrambling code specified with Scrambling Code below to analyze the down link signal NOTE The analyzer detects the three channels of P SCH S SCH and PCPICH to establish the synchronization and correct the frequency and phase for the down link signal analysis If these channel levels are too low to be detected the analyzer cannot make measurement correctly This error occurs when one of these channel levels is less than about 1 10 the sum of other channel levels In this case set Scrambling Code Search to Off and specify the scrambling code with Scrambling Code just below Scrambling Specifies the scrambling code when you set Scrambling Code Search just above to Off Code The analyzer uses the specified code instead of searching for it to analyze the down link signal Time Slot Sets the number of the time slot to be displayed when Symbol Constellation is On The range is 0 to the number of time slots 1 Symbol Rate Sets the symbol rate to display symbol constellation 960K 480K 240K 120K 60K 30K 15K 7 5K or Composite Composite corresponds to multi rate Short Code Sets the number of the short code to be displayed when Symbol Constellation is On The range is 0 to 255 Hide SCH Part Determines whether to hide or not the SCH in the first part of the data On hides the SCH part i e does not display the part Display Selects the display data Same as Display in the Polar view menu
204. easure for each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 4 Press the Analyze side key to analyze the data acquired on the memory The analyzer repeats to measure for each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D showing the burst number on View D If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 5 Press the Burst No side key and select a burst number View A to D show the measurement result for the specified burst View D GSM OutputPower Amplitude vs Time View C Time Amplitude Marker 37 Sus 64 158 735 058 7dBm o dBm fi Two line markers fixed show the process range 4 127 12s 7 4 Frame 186 6dBm 5 Frame 181 6dBm 6 Frame 178 5 99dBm T Frame 174 6dBm 8 Frame 170 6dBm Frame 166 5 99dBm 10 Frame 161 6dBm Measurement result 11 Frame 157 6dBm 12 Frame 153 6dBm Mean carrier power 13 Frame 149 6dBm 14 Frame 145 5 99dBm 15 Frame 142 5 99dBm Frame GSM view Figure 3 83 Output power measurement 3 156 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis Power vs Time 1 Select PowerVSTime with the Measurement side key in the GSM view Measurement menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 2 Press the Measure side key to start acquiring data The analyzer
205. eco iia aaa d bao wats Wa TUE Gadus When the Analyzer Does Not Seem to Work Properly Backing Up User Piles uriasa iini cea case dak Sean Sad lesion Berd cated eae About Installation of Other Applications 0 0 00 c eee eee eee Calibration and Diagnostics ccc cece cee cece eee eee Calibration gccees dccte e tlwah eecke donde Sees ede tate ee ee es DiaStiostles cou at iwed siete awe cab ices ee pdab taeda sdb ees Characteristics Check 0da ite achat cit ites Ca Se bie ew eR AA es Operating Basics Interface Maps sais ecsiais sccigsdeocene trasin lear era tig e ere pb wee Sao eee ces Front Panel 5 24 ssi dcr acaisntt lad dcx ena due BMG FR Eee ais hE paid be ba hae aed Rear Panel jcc 5nsetssianet onpitan ese Chek ea hae pare ba bie dead Display Screen Configuration ropt inak cence eee eee General Display Information in a View 0 0 cece cee eee eee Status and Setup Display 0 cece eee cee eee ene Menu Operations 2 5606 decisis ise eee ino aan b ee EIEEE ee Displaying Menus 0 cece cece ce ett ne teen ee Menu Item Information 0 0 0 cee cece eee eens Selection and Numeric Input 00 eee eee ee WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual XV xvii xix 1 17 1 18 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 23 1 25 2 1 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 11 2 11 2 14 2 16 Table of Contents Tutorial s2 cetiesteeteerieeses dehedebiesb
206. efine the first and last frames in Begin Frame and End Frame m Press the All Frames side key to save all frames acquired m Press the Mkr gt Frame side key to save the frames from 0 to the one in the marker position 4 Press the Save To File IQ or Save To File AP side key to save the IQ or AP formatted data respectively The file access menu appears Specify the device directory and file name before saving Refer to Operating File Access Menu on page 3 178 for detail The analyzer uses the IQ format to write data into the memory The IQ formatted data is represented with the horizontal and vertical axes but not represented with the I and Q axes of the IQ diagram The AP formatted data is calculated from the 1Q formatted data and represented in the polar coordinates It takes more time to save the AP formatted data than the IQ formatted data WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 175 File Operations 3 176 Load There are two ways to load data m Specify the file as a view source m Use the utility menu Specify the file as a view source Specify the file using File IQ or File AP in Source of the view menu The available data is listed in Table 3 20 NOTE The data loaded in this way cannot be zoomed The data saved in AP format is unavailable for modulation analysis Table 3 20 Data format available in views View Display Waveform Analog FSK Waterfall Spectrogram CDMAWaveform Pol
207. efore the signal disappears Interval Block data is acquired at a specified interval The interval is set with the Interval menu item see below Quick Interval Same as Quick except that data is displayed after all blocks are acquired Never You can start or stop data acquisition of one block manually by pressing the BLOCK key Other trigger settings are ineffective Sets the trigger count on enabled or off disabled The trigger count is specified with Times Times Sets a trigger count If Count is set to on data is acquired the number of times specified here Refer to Trigger Count on page 3 70 for details Selects a aa source Refer to Trigger Source on page 3 73 for details Internal A trigger mask pattern is used to generate a trigger A trigger is generated by the rising edge of a signal input through the TRIG connector on the front panel Specifies the domain in which a trigger functions Select either Frequency frequency domain or Time time domain Refer to Trigger Domain on page 3 73 for details Selects a trigger polarity when the trigger source is set to Internal Refer to Trigger Slope on page 3 73 for details When a signal exits the trigger mask pattern area that is when a signal exits the blue area and enters the black area assuming that screen colors are set to the defaults a trigger occurs Fall When a signal enters the trigger mask pattern area that is when a signal exits the black area a
208. el dBm Nominal 25 Center 800MHZz pan Center 7 275 957 614pHz Span 100kHz Freq 800MHz Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 200B Mixer 25daBm RF1 Normal AC Zoom HW 1024 Blackman 6 4m 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Figure 2 41 Signal acquisition in the Zoom mode Searching for the Peak Define a new center frequency and expansion factor for the acquired waveform Use the search function to search for the peak signal with the maximum intensity and set the peak frequency to the center frequency for zooming 4 Using the search function search for the peak spectrum a Press the VIEW A key b Press the VIEW SRCH key The marker O is positioned at the maximum signal peak The marker frequency in View A becomes the center frequency for zooming in View C in the next step WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 41 Tutorial Executing Zoom Execute zoom around the center frequency found with the search function 5 Run zooming a Press the SETUP MAIN key b Press the Zoom side key Note that the Frequency menu item contains the new frequency resulting from the search c Press the Mag side key to set the expansion factor to 100 using the general purpose knob d Press the Execute side key The expanded view is displayed in Views C and D as shown in Figure 2 42 In View D the number of displayed frames is block size expansion factor 1 In this case 200 100 1 1 You can repeat steps c and d
209. elect up to eight formats and display four of them together WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 7 Product Overview 1 8 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual SS SLs Installation and Power On Before beginning the installation be sure to read General Safety Summary and Service Safety Summary starting on page xv This section describes the following procedures Unpacking and inspection Connecting the power cord Powering on Adjusting the display tilt angle Powering off Resetting the analyzer Backing up user files Unpacking and Inspection CAUTION This product weighs about 31 kg To avoid falling or injury carry the product with two or more people This product is packed in a corrugated fiberboard container for delivery Before opening the container be sure to check that it has no scratches or damage on its surface When opening the container check that the product has no damage and that all the standard accessories are found inside For a list of accessories refer to Standard Accessories on page A 2 If you find any damaged or missing components contact your local Tektronix representatives It is recommended that the container and packing materials be stored in a safe place The container and packaging material should be used to transport this product for calibration or repair clearance of at least 5 cm at both sides for proper air circulation f CAUTION The analyzer has two exhaust fans on the rear panel
210. ence ideal signal in the Polar view menu Use the EVM view to obtain the errors quantitatively from the ideal digitally modulated signal refer to page 3 106 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 103 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Eye Diagram Display The EyeDiagram view inputs the signal processed in the Polar view and displays the eye diagram The eye diagram represents symbol to symbol transitions by time and amplitude or phase Figure 3 54 shows an example of the vector display of a signal in the 1 4 1 QPSK modulation and Eye diagram display examples Each point through which multiple concentrated lines pass represents a symbol You can set the symbol transition length with Eye Length in the EyeDiagram view menu The EyeDiagram view can display the ideal signal as well as the measurement data Select Display gt Measurement measurement data or Reference ideal signal in the EyeDiagram view menu You can observe the size of disorder in the eye diagram by switching the display with the general purpose knob To obtain the errors quantitatively from the ideal digitally modulated signal use the EVM view refer to page 3 106 Vector display Eye diagram display 1 symbol transition length 3 104 Eye diagram display Eye diagram display 2 symbol transition length 4 symbol transition length Figure 3 54 Vector and Eye diagram display examples WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Display and Analy
211. ence data Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Alpha BT Inputs the a BT value The range is 0 0001 to 1 Auto Carrier Determines whether to search the carrier automatically On Searches the carrier automatically and displays the frequency error relative to the center frequency on screen at Freq Err Off Sets the carrier frequency with the Carrier Hz side key which appears by selecting Off Carrier Sets carrier frequency when you select Off in Auto Carrier above Sets the burst search parameters Same as Burst in the Polar view menu on page 2 77 Specifies the frequency range to be processed Same as Mask in the Polar view menu on page 2 77 Same as Options in the Polar view menu on page 2 78 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 87 Menu Functions CDMATime View Menu Table 2 17 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CDMATime in the CONFIG VIEW menu NOTE Use the CDMATime view to perform the measurement according to the IS 95 and T 53 standards NOTE For the CDMA time characteristic measurement use the Measure side key rather than the front panel ROLL or BLOCK key If you use the ROLL or BLOCK key for the measurement neither averaging nor mask decision takes place although the measurement can be performed In this case the horizontal axis in the CDMATime view represents the time in the Block mode or the frequency in the Roll mode Table 2 18 CDM
212. ent the analyzer always turns Sync Word Search On When it is set to On specify the sync word parameters using the submenus described below NOTE If the analyzer does not find the sync word no waveform is displayed Determines whether or not to use the differential encoding It defaults to Off However for the GSM measurement the analyzer always turns Differential Encoding On Sync Word Pattern Sync Word Entry Sync Word Length Sync Word Position Analysis Length TSCO to TSC7 Selects the pre defined sync word pattern in the GSM standard TSC0 250225C TSC4 1AE41AC TSC1 2DDE2DC TSC5 4EB04E8 TSC2 43BA438 TSC6 A7D7A7C TSC3 47B4478 TSC7 EF12EF0 Note The sync word is reset to TSCO default when you change the measurement item with the Measurement side key in the GSM view menu User Uses the user defined sync word Set the sync word with the Syne Word Entry menu below Sets the sync word in hexadecimal numbers oko Cd Accepts the entry Position Moves the cursor in the Sync Word field on the screen to input a number Delete Char Deletes the character at the cursor f0123 Inputs a number from 0 to 3 Inputs a number from 4 to 7 Inputs a number from 8 to B CDEF Inputs a number from C to F Sets the sync word length in bits when Sync Word Pattern is set to User It is fixed to 26 for TSCO to TSC7 See Figure 2 50 If this length is greater than that of the user defined word
213. enu on page 2 65 Copy To Copies the waveform currently being displayed to one of the destinations Same as Copy To in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Hold Ver Scale Scale Marker Scale Search Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the vertical axis when you change the input source Same as Hold Ver Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Same as Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Marker Operates the markers Refer to page 3 45 for how to operate the markers Hor Inputs the horizontal position to move the marker By default the marker is positioned at the origin on the horizontal axis Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Search Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there Peak Max Min Separation Delta Marker Toggle Delta Searches for the peak spectrum and moves the marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Searches for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Searches for the minimum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Sets the minimum horizontal distance to separate two peaks Same as Separation in the Waveform view menu on page 2 6
214. eowees kisteeweees 2 19 Preparations x seit iret alee Sin BR ay we WORE Ghee Ls at es Sh ee EOE 2 20 Connecting the Signal Generator 0 0 0 enint cee eee eee 2 20 Applying POWEL 6 ia ccnaeecea s bance do ane ela ca a ERE a e abulas 2 21 Configuring the Analyzer with Basic Configuration Patterns 2 23 Measuring a Digitally Modulated Signal 00 0 0 0 0000 2 26 Changing Hardware Settings 0 0 0 eee eee eee 2 28 View Definitions and Layout 0 0 0 eee eee ridas 2 33 Averaging and Compared Display 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 2 38 P ak Search and ZOOM oee 5 0 oa hide a dale oo doled alan athblen ae e 2 40 DeltaMarkers ia meie m abla ve n e Gale 4 E are e Valens Laenatdalenaes Oe 2 43 Tumis Off the POWer mtie s aie Akare e sate cei eare e aaiae n bale nee ES 2 46 Menu Functions 5 i404 vesudcsVeeeaee ve tE Esn KiE yeeiees SEERE 2 47 Setup SEQUENCE o5 esc eeswa eari tiini EEEE EEEE ne 2d ee ee 2 47 CONFIG Menu a6 cc006 csas estes Sock ee she Pos EEE eee eee aes 2 48 SETUP Standard Ment c42 2 0 essen be de PE te ees breech ete 2 54 SETUP CDMA Ment e c 064ec26 ce sdee sie fos oiaas Peewee 2 59 SETUP GeppACP Menu 5 0 06 esses iae eases gee eee 2 61 Waveform View Menu 0 cece cece eee eee eben eee 2 63 Analog View Men 2 06604 cocus ose e ete Pees eee ee ee ees 2 69 FSK View Men 2 c446 cscs eos de ese eee Posen Goede ees betes ieee 2 71 Spectrogram View Menu
215. equency and phase Perform Fast Hadamard Transformation Calculate the symbol power for all channels Extract effective channels from pilot symbols WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual W CDMA Analysis Operating Examples Standard Code Domain Power Measurement WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual The following is the basic procedure for standard code domain power analysis Press the CONFIG MODE key Press the More side key Press the W CDMA Down Link side key The default views are as follows see Figure 3 71 to 3 74 View A Spectrum Waveform view View B Code domain power spectrogram CodeWSpectrogram view View C Vector diagram CodeWPolar view View D Code domain power Code WPower view Press the VIEW C key Press the Standard side key and select chip rate 4 096 8 192 or 16 384 Mcpc Press the SETUP SPAN key and set the span as follows m Span 10 MHz for the chip rate of 4 096 Mcpc m Span 30 MHz for the chip rate of 8 192 and 16 384 Mcpc Press the SETUP FREQ key to set the center frequency Press the SETUP REF key to set the reference level Press the START STOP BLOCK key to acquire one block of data When the input level is too high the OVERLOAD indicator displays in red Then increase the reference level For details on the view menus refer to page 2 63 and below 3 137 W CDMA Analysis Data source Code domain power Relative time from data acquisition end point View B Pol
216. er of D1 to D8 for Source Position Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed after a trigger event If this frame number agrees with the trigger position specified with Setup Trigger gt Pos the frame for which a trigger is generated is displayed By default Position is set to zero current frame Hold Ver Scale Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the vertical axis when you change the input source ons Retains the scale setting of the vertical axis Resets the scale setting of the vertical axis The full scale display results Scale Marker Sets up scale marker and search related parameters search Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Scale Sets the vertical axis scale Ver Start Sets the vertical axis start value Full Scale Sets the vertical axis to the default full scale This menu item is available when Format is FreqAmpl FreqPhase TimeAmpl or TimePhase Auto Scale Automatically sets the start value and scale of the horizontal and vertical axes so that the entire waveform can be displayed This menu item is available when Format is Freql FreqQ Timel or TimeQ Frame Relative Specifies whether the origin of the time axis for each frame is set to zero See Figure 2 46 on page 2 68 On specifies that the origin of the time axis for each frame is set to zero
217. eries Code domain power spectrogram The analyzer measures the code domain power continuously for maximum 150 slots 0 1 s and displays spectrogram for each slot Vector constellation The analyzer measures the vector loci and chip points for entire signals as well as constellation at symbol points for each channel Modulation accuracy The analyzer measures EVM error vector magnitude amplitude error phase error waveform quality and origin offset for each channel Measurement Process The analyzer processes the input signals internally using the following proce dure 1 a A wo FF amp BN 3 144 Perform the flatness correction and filtering Establish the synchronization with P SCH Determine the scrambling code number range with S SCH Establish the long code number and phase Correct the frequency and phase with PCPICH Perform Fast Hadamard Transformation Calculate the symbol power for all channels WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3GPP Analysis Basic Operation for The following is a basic procedure for standard code domain power analysis Code Domain Power The analyzer acquires a number of slots and performs the measurement for Measurement continuous data 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key on the front panel 2 Press the side key More 3GPP Down Link to configure the analyzer for the 3GPP down link signal analysis Default views are as follows View A Spectrum Waveform view View B Code do
218. ers Search Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Scale Sets the vertical axis scale Ver Start Sets the vertical axis start value Full Scale Sets the vertical scale to the default full scale WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 25 3gppACPView menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as O and the delta marker as O and For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Hor Specifies the horizontal position to which you move By default O is positioned at the start point of the horizontal axis Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Mkr gt Freq Sets the center frequency to the value at the current marker position When you press this side key the Freq Span Ref Freq setting in the SETUP menu changes to the frequency at the current marker position Measurement ACP OBW Performs power measurement Select one of the measurement types Noise Power C N C No ACP and OBW Refer to Power Measurement on page 3 81 This menu item is displayed when you select ACP for
219. es 2 120 Table 3 1 Input frequency band cece eee wee ee eens 3 2 Table 3 2 IF modes i 5 660 806 0659 54 oroesi os Olena a aeaa oe 3 4 Table 3 3 Mode summary cccccsecccccccccscscceces 3 7 Table 3 4 Frequency and span setting range 206 3 10 Table 3 5 Reference level setting range cee eeeeeees 3 13 Table 3 6 Input modes and FFT parameters 06 3 16 Table 3 7 FFT window and band pass filter 6 3 18 Table 3 8 Block size setting range ccccece cee cseceees 3 22 Table 3 9 Minimum frame period cececcece cence 3 29 Table 3 10 The number of bins 0 cc cee eee eee eeee 3 41 Table 3 11 Zoom range cece cece cece cee e reece eees 3 53 Table 3 12 Maximum trigger count ccceceeceeceees 3 70 Table 3 13 Modulating systems ccccecc ccs cscceces 3 98 Table 3 14 CDMA analysis items cc cece e cee ce eceees 3 111 Table 3 15 cdmaOne parameters cece cece cere cece 3 128 Table 3 16 W CDMA parameters ccccececcccseceees 3 135 Table 3 17 3GPP parameters cece eee eee cere ee eeee 3 143 Table 3 18 GSM measurement functions 0eeeeee 3 152 Table 3 19 Files available in the analyzer 0eeeeeee 3 174 Table 3 20 Data format available in views eeeeeee 3 176 Table 3 21 Possible combinations of data types 3 190 Table 3 22 Fr
220. es captured data to files while acquiring the data For details refer to Auto Save Function on page 3 169 Table 2 32 AutoSave menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Mode RollSave Stores the data acquired in the Roll mode BlockSave Stores the data acquired in the Block mode File Name Specifies the name of the file to store the data Save Frames Sets the number of frames to be stored in the RollSave mode Counter Reset Resets the file counter When you acquire data next time the file name is suffixed to zero WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 115 Menu Functions SelfCal Util A Menu Controls the self gain calibration For details on the operation refer to Calibration on page 3 174 Table 2 33 SelfCal menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Auto Gain Cal When set to On the analyzer will automatically run the internal calibration routines Gain Cal Runs the auto calibration IQ Offset Cal Compensates offset of I Q input signals Wide IQ Corrects DC balance of I Q signals in the Wide IF mode Balance Cal 2 116 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions SaveLoad Util B Menu Controls saving and loading files For details on the operation refer to Saving and Loading Files on page 1 20 Table 2 34 SaveLoad menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Save Saves the contents of the data mem
221. escribed on the following page WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations File Header The following is an example of the file header The analyzer always writes xxxxx Type at the beginning of header where x is a decimal digit For other items no special order is observed and some new items may be added 40403Type WCA380AP FrameReverse Off FramePadding Before Band RF4 IFMode HiRes MemoryMode Dual FFTType SW FFTWindow Blackman ENBW 2 FFTPoints 1024 Bins 801 MaxInputLevel 0 LevelOffset 0 CenterFrequency 7 9G FrequencyOffset 0 Span 5M BlockSize 40 ValidFrames 40 FramePeriod 160u UnitPeriod 80u FrameLength 160u DateTime 2000 03 24 10 45 01 GainOffset 72 532 MultiFrames 1 MultiAddr 0 The first numbers show a length of header The first character 4 in the example indicates that the length of header is expressed by the four bytes after the second character In this case Length of header 1 15t byte 4 2 4 to 5 bytes 0403 408 bytes The data block starts from the 409 byte WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 185 File Operations 3 186 Type Shows a type of data The analyzer has the following four types of data WCA3801Q indicates the data block contains I and Q data in the frequency domain WCA380IQT indicates the data block contains I and Q data in the time domain WCA380AP indicates the data block contains amplitude and phase data in the frequency domain WCA380APT
222. escriptions Search Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there Max Searches the maximum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Min Searches the minimum peak spectrum and moves the marker there Example Mask Percent 10 In this example 10 area of both ends are excluded from the EVM calculation Figure 2 48 Setting Mask Percent for the EVM calculation 10 2 82 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions CDMAWaveform View Menu Table 2 15 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CDMAWaveform in the CONFIG VIEW menu NOTE The CDMAWaveform view is used to perform the measurement in accordance with the IS 95 and T 53 standards Table 2 16 CDMAWaveform view menu table Top level Source Format Compression Frame Average Type Num Averages Subordinate level options and descriptions Selects input data for a view You can select one of the following items None Specifies no input source The display area in the view is empty Active Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Average Specifies the averaged data for the input source When you select this item Format and Frame menu disappears and Average Type and Num Averages menu appears Zoom Specifies the zoomed data for an input source When you use the Zoom mode select this For zoom refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 and Zoom on page 3 5
223. eshold Sets the threshold to validate the burst If the peak level of an input signal exceeds the threshold it is recognized as a burst If not it is discarded as noise The range is 100 dB to 10 dB relative to the maximum data value Threshold Sets the threshold to detect the rising edge of a burst The range is 100 dB to 10 dB relative to the maximum data value Specifies the first data point to be analyzed relative to the beginning of burst within the range of 1024 to 1024 For example when you set it to 100 the measurement is made from the hundredth data point before the beginning of burst Mask Specifies the frequency range to be processed The data out of the range is ignored for calculating Mask i Enables On or disables Off the masking Marker Link Specifies whether the Center value described below varies with the marker movement on the frequency axis in the other view Center Hz Sets the center frequency of the mask range with Width described below Width Hz Sets the width of the mask range with Center described above Left Hz Sets the left edge frequency of the mask range with Right described below Right Hz Sets the right edge frequency of the mask range with Left described above WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 77 Menu Functions Table 2 12 Polar view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Options Display The polar view can di
224. ess the OK side key NOTE The analyzer automatically adds the extension to the file If you input an improper extension the analyzer replaces it with the proper one Loading a File 1 Selecta file using the procedures in Selecting a File described above 2 Press the OK side key 3 180 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Copying a File Figure 3 96 shows the Copy File menu 1 Open the destination directory Refer to Changing a Directory on page 3 180 2 Select a source file a Press the side key Operation and then Copy File The Copy File menu and file listing boxes appear b Select a file using the procedure in Selecting a File on page 3 180 3 Press the Copy File side key 4 Press the uppermost side key twice to return to the top level menu Destination lt Source C x C x ABC cfg ABC cfg CA CA duall0m cfg i dual3g cfg ly Program Files t Program Files freq1 Om cfg ay WCA B WCA scal3g cfg e SUP cfg SYSTEM SYSTEM SUP2 cfg zooml0m cfg P OldSave zoom3m cfg Directory listing File listing Directory listing File listing Figure 3 96 Copying a file Deleting a File 1 Press the side key Operation and then Delete File The Delete File menu appears 2 Select a file using the procedure described in Selecting
225. et up the analyzer with the basic configuration Set a proper frequency and span refer to page 3 9 The analyzer requires the proper span to recognize the digital modulation and display the signal Set the span as close to the bandwidth as possible and fine tune it Redefine the view a Press the CONFIG VIEW key b Press one of the VIEW A to D side keys c Turn the general purpose knob to select FSK If you want to define two or more FSK views repeat steps b and c Now the FSK signal can be demodulated and displayed on screen 3 109 Analyzing an FSK Digital Modulated Signal Display 3 110 The FSK view displays the demodulated signal with time along the horizontal axis and frequency along the vertical axis Figure 3 58 shows an example of a demodulated FSK modulated signal By default the horizontal axis scale is set to the frame length see Table 3 9 on page 3 29 and the vertical axis scale is set to the span The default scale settings may not be enough to finely display the whole waveform In this case use the auto scale function refer to page 3 36 View B lt FSK Options Scale View B Active FSK 97 02 09 4 22 23 Marker DS 6 861kKHz al tik if l i Ut IM Stop Freq 800MHz Span 1MHz Ref 0dBm VECTOR REALTIME RF Dual AC Blackman 1024 160u 200 Auto On 1 Internal 50 Figure 3 58 Example display of FSK modulation signal demodulation WCA330 amp WCA380 Use
226. etween the measurement signal and ideal signal Figure 3 56 shows the examples of the EVM view of the 1 4 7 QPSK modulated signal each view is auto scaled You can select three formats of EVM Mag Error and Phase Error with Format in the EVM view menu View C Active 1 4PI QPSK Measurement 97 11 21 14 2 deg Vector display View B EVM Marker O EVM display View D MagError Marker Os 0 Mag Error display Figure 3 56 EVM view display examples 3 106 View D PhaseErro Marker 0s Ddeg Phase Error display WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal The constellation display of the 1 4 x QPSK modulation is shown for the three formats of EVM Mag Error and Phase Error see see Figure 3 57 The cross hairs called symbol represent the phase positions of the ideal signal in this case the amplitude is fixed In this modulating system the bit pattern is determined by shifts from the individual positions For example suppose that an actual signal has shifted to the position from the ideal symbol position You can evaluate the quality of the modulated signal as an error in the radial amplitude direction an error in the phase direction and the total error vector which correspond to Mag Error Phase Error and EVM formats respectively Amplitude Error Mag Error Error Vector Magnitude EVM Phase Error 0 3 4 x shift 10
227. ews and display up to four views at the same time You can specify how the waveform and results are displayed in each of the defined views In the subsequent sections you modify the view located at the bottom right corner on the screen to the Waterfall display Four views of A to D are already defined with the basic configuration First check their definitions 1 Press the VIEW key in the CONFIG area see Figure 2 34 The display area shows the menu used to set the format of the four views see Figure 2 34 config lt 4 View View C Polar M Action m Assign Show CONFIG CONFIG area gt View A MODE Waveform M I SETUP 5 VIEW View B CONFIG VIEW key Spectrogram M UTILITY ENTER dBm EXT TRIG RF INPUT View D lt View D side key EyeDiagram M 509 max 30dBm ti i Figure 2 34 CONFIG VIEW key and its submenu WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 33 Tutorial Redefining a View The view A to D are now defined as follows see Figure 2 33 on page 2 32 View A upper left of the screen Waveform View B lower left of the screen Spectrogram View C upper right of the screen Polar View D lower right of the screen Eye diagram Change the View D definition from Eye diagram to Wa
228. ey A drop down list appears to select the desired item See Figure 2 31 Figure 2 31 Span side menu item available for numeric input 2 Select 100k using the general purpose knob 3 Press the Span side key again The hardware is set up immediately with the new value NOTE After the span has been changed the relationship between the span and the frequency input in Step 2 falls within the allowable range Now the 800 MHz center frequency input previously is displayed in the Freq menu Starting and Stopping the With the center frequency and span set to appropriate values you can now use Measurement the Block mode to acquire data This mode displays the result of measurement Block Mode after the data has been acquired in blocks 1 Press the BLOCK key on the front panel Unlike the Roll mode the Block mode requires a longer time to display the data This is because the data is displayed only after enough is acquired to fill the specified block size After acquiring one block of data the analyzer displays the data 2 30 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial Make sure that SEAMLESS is displayed in blue in the setting status display area at the bottom of the display see Figure 2 32 It indicates that the data is being acquired continuously i e there is no time gap between two adjacent frames The settings allowing the seamless acquisition depend on the frame period and span sett
229. f a spectrum and its averaged waveform Example ccc cece cece cece ccc eeeseecees Figure 3 32 modes Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Acquiring and displaying data in the Auto and Normal Delayed trigger 6 60c cscs ccc eec eee cenecees Timeout trigger ccc cece cece cece ee ee eee Interval trie Ger sercissicoeieseiss tie we ahecele aioe ares CO TTT Ca go tt 2 cian earn ne a me EE Quick Interval trigger 0 ccc eee ee ee eee eee Three dimensional view display effect by setting a ris Per Count 66 5 062i 2 Soc teeta eet eee ee ere sees eee ee Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Relation between the trigger count and the frame Trigger position and data acquisition Example of a trigger mask pattern WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 42 baseline Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 vector Figure 3 58 demodulation Figure 3 59 configuration Figure 3 60 30 MHz span Figure 3 61 5 MHz span Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 configuration Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure
230. fault frame Figure 3 22 Display frames 3 38 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Waveform Data Changing a Display Frame Use in a Two Dimensional View i Changing a Marker Frame 1 Position in a Three Dimensional View WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual the following procedure to change the frame being displayed Select a view and display a view menu Use View C as an example a Press the VIEW C key b Press the VIEW MAIN key Press the Frame side key to enter the desired frame number The valid frame number depends on the trigger settings as follows The trigger count disabled 0 to Block count 1 The trigger count enabled 0 to Trigger count X Block count 1 When you use the general purpose knob to change the frame number sequentially you can observe time dependent variations in a waveform continuously Select a three dimensional view such as Spectrogram or Waterfall and display a marker menu Use View B as an example a Press the VIEW B key b Press the VIEW MKR key Press the Ver side key to change a numeric value Use the general purpose knob to observe in detail the time dependent variations in the spectrum 3 39 Displaying Waveform Data Linked Views When several views are displayed on screen these views are linked together by default Change of a display frame in a view automatically causes change of display frames in other two dimensional views and of marker frame positions
231. fied in the GSM standard You can select the sync word from TSCO to TSC7 or enter an arbitrary sync word in the GSMPolar view with the following procedure For information on the GSMPolar view menu refer to page 2 108 1 Select the measurement item with the Measurement side key in the GSM view menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 2 Select the GSMPolar view For example if View A is defined as the GSMPolar view press the VIEW A key 3 Press the Syne Word side key For details on the Sync Word submenu refer to page 2 109 4 Press the Sync Word Pattern and select User 5 Press the Syne Word Entry side key and then edit the sync word in the Sync Word field in hexadecimal numbers see Figure 3 87 m Press the Position side key to move the cursor to input a number m Press Delete side key to delete the number at the cursor position m Press one of the side keys from 0 1 2 3 to C D E F and then select a number View A Active GMSK Measurement 1 1 98 7 10 35 AM GSMPol P Marker 0 025ym 1 002 44 145deg orar view fem Freq Err 49 82Hz Origin Offset 54 01dB Chlewik 1 914 Figure 3 87 Entering a sync word in the GSMPolar view WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 163 GSM Analysis 6 When you finish entering the word press OK to exit the sync word entry 7 Set the sync word length in bits with the Syne Word Length side key if necessary the default set
232. for different expansion factors Before zoom After zoom UHCAL OVERL AD TRIGGERED PAUSE View A Active Freqampl 200 04 07 11 14 59 View C Zoom Freqampl 2000 9 07 11 14 59 Setup lt Marker 800 000 312 SMHz 21 98dBm Marker SOkHz 84 891dBm Standard FFT Type HW Su div i Frequency i f 1 t j z1 800 0003125 View B Active Freq mpl 2000 04 07 11 14 59 View D Zoom Freq mpl 2000 04 07 11 14 59 Marker 800 000 312 SMHz 21 98dBm Oframe Os Marker SOkHz 84 891dBm Oframe 0s Execute Center SOOMHz 5 pan Center 800 000 312 SMHz 5 Freq 800MHz Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 20d0B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Zoom HW 1024 Blackman 6 4m 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Figure 2 42 Example of zooming 2 42 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial Delta Markers In this section you learn how to operate the delta markers Delta markers let you accurately measure the difference between two frequencies A comb spectrum waveform can be observed in View C in Figure 2 43 Measure the difference between the frequencies of adjacent spectrum peaks 1 For better visibility change View C to a single view display a Press the VIEW C key b Press the VIEW I key View C changes to single view display See Figure 2 43 View C Zoom Freq mpl 2000 04 07 11 14 59 Marker 799 999 987 SMHz 32 053dBm o dBm j Tzacet Tracez Delta Marker off On Re
233. for the view menus Refer to page 3 209 for setting the date and time Displays the horizontal HHH and vertical VVV r S positions in which the marker is placed VIEW A Active FreqAmpl YY MM DD HH MM SS Marker HHH VVV FFF Frame SSS s For the Spectrogram and Waveform views this line also displays the frame position and the start time that the frame is acquired For the SymbolTable view this line displays the symbol position For the Polar view it displays the offset from the symbol position amplitude and phase When you turn on the delta marker this line indicates the difference between the two markers with Delta displayed instead of Marker Refer to page 3 45 for the marker operations Displays the start left end and stop value right end of the vertical axis For the Spectrogram view this area also displays a level color map that shows the level in one of 10 colors For the SymbolTable view this area displays nothing For the views other than Polar EyeDiagram and SymbolTable the vertical axis is divided into 10 divisions Refer to page 3 36 for setting scales Displays the start left end and stop end right end of the horizontal axis When the frequency is represented this area displays the center frequency and span information For the SymbolTable view it displays nothing For the views other than Polar EyeDiagram and SymbolTable the
234. form Data Relation among Frame Bin and Pixel One frame contains 256 or 1024 FFT points A part of data in a frame becomes invalid for the calculation refer to Table 3 23 on page 3 191 The analyzer discards the invalid data to display only valid data The valid data is called bin see Figure 3 24 on page 3 42 The number of bins depends on a span and the number of FFT points refer to Table 3 10 Table 3 10 The number of bins Span FFT points The number of bins Supplemental lt 2 MHz 256 161 1024 641 5 MHz 256 201 1024 801 6 MHz 256 121 1024 481 10 MHz 256 201 Baseband mode only 1024 801 10 MHz 20 MHz 1024 501 IQ and Wide modes 30 MHz 1024 751 The number of bins is valid for the memory modes other than Scalar such as Frequency Dual and Zoom It is meaningless in the Scalar mode because several physical frames are used to display data The bandwidth of one bin is calculated as follows This bandwidth is important for power measurement as described on page 3 81 Bandwidth of one bin Set span Number of bins 1 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 41 Displaying Waveform Data 3 42 Compression of Display Data Generally as the number of horizontal pixels on screen is smaller than the number of bins bin data is reduced to agree with the number of corresponding pixels when they are displayed see Figure 3 24 Data displayed O 0 0 co ooo o that I pach
235. ge B 9 for the specifications for external trigger input Refer to page B 3 for the input specification Figure 2 2 Front panel map right part WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 3 Interface Maps Rear Panel Parallel port PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH Used to connect a printer for hardcopying Turns the AC power on or off When this switch is A 25 pin D sub connector female on the internal standby circuitry is energized Refer to page 3 202 for connecting the printer Refer to Turning On the Power on page 1 12 VGA output port AC inlet Outputs display images to a monitor Connect the AC power cable Use the supplied AC A 15 pin D sub connector female power cable to connect the analyzer to the AC outlet Refer to Installation on page 1 9 CLOCK IN OUT connector Refer to page B 11 for the power specifications 50 Q BNC connectors for inputting and outputting the reference clock A 10 MHz sine wave is used as the reference clock The input level is tome ner oureur o 10 to 6 dBm Refer to Reference Osc on page 2 56 for the settings Ar 0X0 Q 0000000000000 oo00000000000000 a oo0oo0000000000000 f oo0o0000000000000 o0oo00000000000000 oo0o0000000000000 oo00000000000000 oo0o0000000000000 INPUT o o0o00000000000000 oo0oo0000000000000 1 Q Input connectors T 6 NO INPUT
236. gt Favorites US Online Services gt Entertainment gt 7 A StartUp gt Games ay Documents gt Intemet Explorer S Intenet Tools gt ER Settings we MS DOS Prompt L System Tools gt wz Outlook Express GA Address Book Al Eind G 2 Windows Explorer EB Calculator Q Help m WEA El Imaging Winlasim gt T Notepad Bun W Paint Y WordPad Log Off WCA380 Ry Shut Down Span 3GHz ages g 12554m lt Task bar wease0 Figure 3 101 Displaying the Windows 98 accessory menu Setting Date and Time The analyzer view displays date and time managed by the Windows operating system You can use the Windows 98 time setting program to set date and time WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 197 Using Windows 98 Displaying the Windows To display a Windows98 desktop screen follow these steps Desktop Screen Use a mouse to move the pointer to the bottom of the display see Fig ure 3 101 The task bar appears 2 Locate the pointer on the WCA330 or WCA380 icon in the task bar and right click A menu appears 3 Select Close in the menu The system program of the analyzer terminates and a Windows 98 desktop screen appears Switching to View Display To switch the Windows 98 desktop screen to the analyzer view display do the following step m Select Start gt Program gt WCA from the task bar The system program of the analyzer starts 3 198 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual D ts
237. he shutdown process commonly used on Windows 98 is not effective in normal operation If you have performed the Windows 98 shutdown process The analyzer shuts down normally but the front panel power switch remains on with the STANDBY LED lit At the next power on turn the power switch to STANDBY and back ON again WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual E 9 Appendix E Mouse Operations E 10 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual r Appendix F Inspection and Cleaning A Inspect and clean the exterior of the instrument as often as operating conditions require Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipation Regular cleaning may prevent instrument malfunction and enhance reliability WARNING To avoid injury or death unplug the power cord from line voltage before cleaning the instrument To avoid getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the applicator Inspection and Cleaning Procedures A Inspecting Exterior If you need to clean the inside of the instrument consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative The collection of dirt on components inside can cause instrument overheating and breakdown Dirt also provides an electrical conduc tion path that can cause instrument failure especially under high humidity conditions CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument Orga
238. he vertical scale to display the whole waveform Full Scale Resets the vertical scale to the default Frame Relative Specifies whether the origin of the time axis for each frame is set to zero Same as Frame Relative in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Operates the marker and the delta marker Same as Marker in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there Same as Search in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 Output Format Selects CCDF or Histogram for the display format Resolution Sets the resolution for the histogram when Output Format is set to Histogram The range is 0 01 dB to 10 dB in 1 2 5 steps Destination Specifies the destination data register from D1 to D8 The default is D1 NOTE When another digital demodulating system such as cdmaOne or W CDMA is active use D1 to D4 Calculate Sets the CCDF calculation parameters or starts the process Specifies the first frame to be calculated The range is 0 to the number of frames 1 End Frame Specifies the last frame to be calculated The range is 0 to the number of frames 1 All Frames Specifies that the data is calculated for all frames Mkr gt Frame Sets Begin Frame and End Frame with the marker and delta marker Execute Executes the calculation Reset This menu item is displayed during data acquisition It restarts the CCDF calculation WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 113 Me
239. hold side key to execute the process When you press the RMS or PeakHold side key the side key turns white indicating that the process is in execution Wait until the key returns to the initial color gray indicating that the process is complete Display the contents of the data register For example use View A as the Waveform view a Press CONFIG VIEW View A and select Waveform b Press VIEW A gt VIEW MAIN gt Source and select the data register you set in step Ic Now the averaging result is displayed 3 63 Average and Peak Hold 3 64 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Trigger The user can specify various triggering parameters NOTE Trigger is valid for the Block mode It is not used in the Roll mode These are the trigger parameters Mode Selects how to trigger Count Specifies how many times a block data is acquired Domain Selects either the time or frequency domain Source Selects a trigger signal source Slope Selects the rising or falling edge of a trigger signal Position Specifies a trigger position This section describes the above topics in detail WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 65 Trigger Setting a Trigger 3 66 Trigger Mode Use the Trigger menu invoked by SETUP MAIN gt Trigger to make trigger related settings Trigger modes specify how to acquire and display data before or after trigger occurs Setting m Press SETUP MAIN gt Trigger
240. i pike ei nne E We puke eek 3 98 Supported Modulation Systems 0 0 0 eee eee 3 98 SEMINE saiae ena trade belated bite le diblae amp Abia oailisie da Pisa wanes alla 3 100 Vector and Constellation Displays 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 3 102 Eye Diagram Display ss is ensc nlstecs aon seas neka and asesasas aig Sh be ace ncaa We peed ak 3 104 Symbol Table Display fs s ccc hls gig big ates nenio u aa tik E T wd 3 105 Error Vector Analysis Display eo ch scecs a2csececk nonien Wa sg SEES 3 106 Analyzing an FSK Digital Modulated Signal 3 109 Seting s4s6 ciate eee iwae bee besa eee gash eee bee eee ee 3 109 Display 3 660 c1tae ee he gata ties Gch Gees Ga Ee cee REO Ee asa ee 3 110 CDMA Analysis s o 6 59 55 9 5 9 6 009 9 08090 sede Ee EG 9 Bee 9 BOSAL 3 111 Evaluation of Demodulation Precision and Waveform Quality 3 112 Evaluation of Spurious 0 eee ee ee ee eee renee 3 116 Time Characteristic Evaluation ssai eo 0 0 cece eee eee ee 3 122 cdmaOne Analysis ccc cece cccc cen sccccesscnsesceeces 3 127 About cdmaOne Analysis 0 0 0 eee eteris i edunt tieri eee 3 128 Operating Examples 0 0 04 tcee bes oe te eee bole Peace bebe ease oe 3 129 W CDMA Amal ysis os 9 is s06 igs0 0 9 s ieee ance ini io ow oe ine ENERE ERENER 3 135 About W CDMA Analysis 5 0 0050s00054 000 es eens buses ARRA ENN 3 135 Operating Examples rers 20 3520che 505 62 os4 Oo bas RE eed SEWN DE
241. ide key in the GSM view Measurement menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 2 Press the Burst Count side key and set the number of bursts to acquire 3 Press the Measure side key to start acquiring data The analyzer acquires bursts by the number specified with Burst Count averaging the spectrum View A and C display the vector diagram and the amplitude versus time waveform for each burst respectively View B displays the averaged spectrum with the specified line in the GSM standard Pass Fail is shown in View D See Figure 3 85 If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key NOTE If no GSM burst is found the specified line is not displayed 4 Press the Analyze side key to analyze the data acquired on the memory The analyzer displays the measurement result and waveform as in step 3 If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 5 Press the Burst No side key and select a burst number View A to D show the measurement result for the specified burst In this case View B displays raw data of the specified burst not averaged 3 158 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis GSMPolar view Freq Err 46 401Hz Origin Offset 51 5950B Amplitude vs Time Specified line in GSM Waveform view Figure 3 85 Spectrum MOD measurement WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Average Frame Frame Frame
242. iew as CDMAPolar in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 NOTE The CDMAPolar view is based on the Polar view adding the measure ment functions according to the IS 95 and T 53 standards Usually use the Polar view When you perform measurements according to the IS 95 or T 53 standards use the CDMAPolar view Table 2 17 CDMAPolar view menu table Top level Source Frame Standard Manual Setup Subordinate level options and descriptions Specifies the source data for the view Same as Source in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written Configures the analyzer according to the standard digital modulating system settings Configures the analyzer according to NADC North American Digital Cellular Configures the analyzer according to PDC Personal Digital Cellular System Configures the analyzer according to PHS Personal Handy Phone System Configures the analyzer according to TETRA Trans European Trunked Radio Configures the analyzer according to GSM Global System for Mobile Communication Configures the analyzer according to CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data IS 95 Configures the analyzer according to IS 95 Sets the modulating system symbol rate filter and a BT manually Modulation Selects the modulating system
243. igure 3 98 Frame padding Bins Shows the number of bins It is the same as bins in the frame header refer to Frame Header on page 3 189 For the relation between the number of bins and the frame size refer to Frame Data on page 3 191 MaxinputLevel Shows the reference level in dBm when the analyzer acquired the data LevelOffset Shows the level offset in dB when the analyzer acquired the data Band Shows the input frequency band when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data IFMode Shows the IF Intermediate Frequency mode when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data MemoryMode Shows the memory mode when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data CenterFrequency Shows the center frequency in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 187 File Operations FrequencyOffset Shows the frequency offset in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data Span Shows the span in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data BlockSize Shows the block size when the analyzer acquired the data ValidFrames Shows the number of frames in the data block This value divided by MultiFrames described below represents the number of frames that are scanned and synthesized into one frame FramePeriod Shows the frame period setting in second The actual period is ob
244. imum values from the data for each pixel and connect the values with a line Displays the maximum value of the data for each pixel Min Displays the minimum value of the data for each pixel WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 63 Menu Functions Table 2 7 Waveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Format Defines the horizontal and vertical axes You can select one of the following items FreqAmpl Horizontal axis Frequency span Vertical axis Amplitude FreqPhase Horizontal axis Frequency span Vertical axis Phase Horizontal axis Frequency span Vertical axis In Phase Horizontal axis Frequency span Vertical axis Q Quadrature Phase TimeAmpl Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis Amplitude TimePhase Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis Phase Timel Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis In Phase TimeQ Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis Q Quadrature Phase Frame Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written If you select Average for the above Source frame selection is meaningless This item disappears from the menu Average Sets up Average parameters For details on averaging refer to Average and Peak Hold on page 3 57 Average Selects on or off for the average function Displays raw data without averaging In the Roll mode it performs averaging while acquiring the data
245. in blue 3 122 0 aBm Mask Area pasaian Eoma O ONA ea a RE a an AE a mc oaa lad Mask Area View A Active 97 11 18 21 37 59 Marker Os 50 845dBm Scale 160us div View B Active 97 11 18 21 37 59 Marker Os 50 845dBm 0 Start 0s Scale 160us div Figure 3 64 CDMA analysis with the Time Domain basic configuration WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CDMA Analysis View Contents Views A and B use the CDMATime view showing signal strength along the vertical axis and time shown on the horizontal axis By default the two views display the same contents They are used to measure the burst signal rising and falling time characteristics according to the IS 95 and T 53 standards The green waveform is obtained by one scan while the yellow one is the average of 100 scans When an averaged signal enters a mask area that is blue this results in an error FAIL is displayed in red at the bottom left corner of the view The following information is also shown at the bottom left corner of the view Times Averaging count On Burst signal intensity averaged waveform Off Intensity resulting when the burst signal is off averaged waveform On Off Ratio Ratio of the signal strength resulting when the burst signal is on to that resulting when off Mask Settings By default the mask area is set as shown in Figure 3 65 These values are specified in IS 95 and T 53 You can view and set the
246. in the STANDBY position Place the principal power switch on the rear panel in the OFF position 10 seconds later place the principal power switch on the rear panel in the ON position Place the power switch on the front panel in the ON position If the analyzer was not shut down properly the Windows Scan Disk may be executed when you power it on When the Scan Disk screen appears perform the following procedure 1 Perform either of the following m Wait for about one minute with the Scan Disk screen displayed m Attach a keyboard to the analyzer and press any key Scan Disk continues to run If no error is detected applications on the analyzer are started If an error is detected refer to an appropriate Windows manual For how to access Windows on the analyzer refer to Using Windows 98 on page 3 195 Installation and Power On Backing Up User Files You should back up your user files on a regular basis as an insurance against system failures The Back Up tool is located in the System Tool folder in the Accessories folder Start this tool to select files and folders to be backed up Use the Windows on line help for information on using the Back Up tool For how to access Windows on the analyzer refer to Using Windows 98 on page 3 195 In particular you should back up user generated files frequently User generated files consist of configuration and data files with the following extensions m Configuration files
247. in to move the marker For detail refer to each view menu beginning on page 2 63 3 Read the marker read out Marker read out Marker 0Hz 25 29dBm T nv f ae Figure 3 26 Marker read out WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Marker Operations and Peak Search Hints on the Marker Review the following hints on marker operation Operation WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual You can link the markers between views or operate them separately For the details refer to Linked Views on page 3 40 The search function is disabled along the vertical frame number axis in a three dimensional display such as the spectrogram and waterfall views The search function is not supported for the Polar EyeDiagram and SymbolTable views 3 47 Marker Operations and Peak Search Operating the Delta Marker 3 48 The delta marker has the on off and reset controls and marker functions Operate the delta marker using the following procedures 1 Select the view by pressing one of the VIEW A to D keys 2 Press the VIEW MKR key to display the marker menu 3 Select On with the Delta Marker side key The Marker label in the top left corner of the view changes to Delta Delta 0Hz 0 0dBm Tym Y Y Point A Point 4 Move the O marker to the desi
248. indicates the data block contains amplitude and phase data in the time domain NOTE When FFTType is set to SW refer to page 3 186 data files in the frequency domain contain the AP format data Type WCA380AP even if the file extension is IQ FrameReverse Shows the frame order in a data block Off indicates the last frame in the data block is the latest acquired frame On indicates the first frame in the data block is the latest acquired frame FramePadding The analyzer adds dummy frames when acquired frames do not fill the data block Such a case occurs for example when the analyzer stops a data acquisition after a trigger event before it fill a pre trigger area in the data block with frames See Figure 3 98 Before adds dummy frames before valid frames but not in the first block After adds dummy frames after valid frames but not in the last block FFTType Shows the FFT type HW hardware or SW software when the analyzer acquired the data FFTWindow Shows the FFT window setting when the analyzer acquired the data ENBW Shows the factor used for the in band power calculation FFTPoints Shows the FFT points setting when the analyzer acquired the data WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Before After Valid frame Valid frame Dummy frame Dummy frame Valid frame Valid frame Dummy frame anm ramo Valid frame Valid frame F
249. ined as the following structure structframeHeader_st le short dataShift short validA short validP short validI short validQ short bins short frameError short triggered short overLoad short lastFrame unsigned long ticks The explanation for each item listed above begins on the following page WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 189 File Operations short dataShift The lower four bits have the value 0 to 15 The upper 12 bits are uncertain It is used to calculate I and Q values refer to Calculation of Data on page 3 193 short validA short validP short validl short validQ These parameters indicate whether the data type is amplitude phase I or Q respectively Table 3 21 shows possible combinations of these values 0 indicates that data is not written in the file 1 indicates that data is written in the file Table 3 21 Possible combinations of data types validA validP validl validQ 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 short bins Shows the number of bins It is the same as Bins in the file header short Reserved Internal use only short triggered Indicates whether the frame is before or after the trigger 0 indicates that the frame is before the trigger pre trigger 1 indicates that the frame is after the trigger post trigger short overLoad Indicates whether an input overload occurred 0 indicates that the MaxInputLevel val
250. ings Refer to Frame Period and Real Time on 3 25 for the details Also check that the PAUSE display is gray in the hardware status display area see Figure 2 32 If PAUSE is blue the data capture is stopped If it is in gray the data capture is in progress REMOTE UNCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE Hardware status display area i Setting status display area 4 I VECTOR SEAMLESS If SEAMLESS is blue this indicates that the data is being captured continuously Figure 2 32 Setup display areas WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 31 Tutorial 2 32 Figure 2 33 shows the measurement result using the new center frequency and span Note that the display scale has automatically changed in accordance with the center frequency and span settings You now have a proper vector display and Eye diagram Try changing the span This modifies the two views especially the Polar view located at the top right corner on the display It has a mechanism to demodulate the digitally modulated signal The Eye diagram view uses the demodulated signal in the Polar view If the span is too great or small the modulated signal cannot be analyzed Try changing the frequency in fine increments using the general purpose knob Note how the display diagram changes Spectrum display Vector display Waveform view Polar view UNCAT DVERI JAD TRIGGERED PAUSE
251. kHz 84 891dBm Frequency Hz 800 0003125M Center 800MHz p View B Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 View D Zoom Freqampl 2000 04 07 11 14 59 Marker 800 000 312 SMHz 21 98dBm Marker SOkHz 84 891dBm Oframe Os Execute Center 800MHz E pan Center 800 000 312 5MHz p Freq 800MHz Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 20d0B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Zoom HW 1024 Blackman 6 4m 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Figure 3 28 Spectra before and after zooming WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 55 Zoom Setting the You can position a marker at the peak spectrum using the search function and Center Frequency then set the frequency at the marker position to the center frequency for zoom ney Merocarch PONCHON 1 Using the VIEW A to D keys select the view in which you operate the marker 2 Press the VIEW SRCH key The marker is positioned at the maximum signal peak Rotating the general purpose knob clockwise initiates a search for the next peak to the right and positions the marker there and vice versa The frequency at the marker position is immediately set to the zoom center frequency SETUP Zoom Frequency If necessary change the center frequency by fine tuning the marker position 3 Press the Execute side key to run the zoom with the new center frequency 3 56 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual eee Average and Peak Hold The averaging technique is generally used to enhance the signal to noise ratio This se
252. key Pressing the BLOCK key displays the original spectrum without averaging The averaged waveform is displayed on the screen With the averaging parameter settings above the process stops after 64 sweeps If you want to restart the averaging press the Reset side key WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial View A Active Freqdmpl Active Freqampl 97 02 01 2 Marker OHz 92 288dBm Center SOOMHz Span 100kHz Figure 2 40 Averaging and compared waveform display Setting Up the Compared You can display two waveforms for comparison Displa p ay 3 Make settings to display the averaged and the non averaged waveforms at the same time a Return to the previous menu level by pressing the View A lt side key top side key b Press the side key Options gt Trace2 gt Source c Select Active using the general purpose knob View A displays a green and a yellow trace see Figure 2 40 The white trace represents the non averaged waveform and the grayish trace the averaged waveform WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 39 Tutorial Peak Search and Zoom In this section you learn to use the peak search and zoom functions The zoom expands a specific section of the obtained spectrum and displays it The analyzer remakes the frequency domain data with a specific frequency and span based on the time domain data Therefore it is capable of enlarging the view by a factor of up to 1000 without sa
253. key to acquire the signal while measuring the OBW Figure 3 47 shows an OBW measurement example WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement Band power marker View B Active Freqimpl snjoni2s 15 33 54 Marker 850MHz 27 918dBm OBW measurement result Center 850MHz pan SOOkHZ Figure 3 47 OBW measurement example WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 89 Power Measurement Band Power Marker Operations The power measurement uses special markers called band power markers as well as the ordinary marker The following three band power markers are available Their operations depend on the measurement type Power C N and C No measurements Power measurement band power marker m ACP measurement ACP measurement band power marker OBW measurement OBW measurement band power marker Power C N and C No The band power marker is used to determine the bandwidth See Figure 3 48 Measurements Two vertical cursors appear Set the four related parameters to move the cursors Use one of the following methods or both methods combined Determine the Center Frequency and Bandwidth 1 Input the center frequency in Options Scale Marker Search Marker Band Power Markers 2 Press the Center side key and input the center frequency 3 Press the Width side key and input the bandwidth If it is set to 0 the power for one bin width will be calculated Center frequency Center Left cursor Right c
254. l Setup Filter Honea Cosine Manual Setup Alpha BT 0 5 Measurement Destination D5D6 Reference Destination D7D8 Source Active Zoom Measurement Format TimeQ FreqAmpl l TimeQ Frame 0 0 Display Lines Hor 1 Visible Off Display Lines Hor 1 0 Display Lines Hor 2 Visible Off Display Lines Hor 2 0 Display Lines Ver 1 Visible Off Display Lines Ver 1 0 Display Lines Ver 2 Visible Off Display Lines Ver 2 0 Scale gt Hor Scale Scale gt Hor Start Scale gt Ver Scale 2V 308 Scale Ver Start 1V 0 Scale gt Color Scale 100 dBm Scale gt Color Start 100 dBm Eye Length 2 2 1 These items are not reset when you set the basic configuration pattern 2 These items are displayed in gray initially When you set the span equal to 5 MHz or lower in Baseband mode or equal to 10 MHz or lower in RF mode these items are available WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual C 3 Appendix C Default Settings Table C 2 Default settings for the CDMA configuration Menu item EIR Spurious Time Domain RST 1 CONFIG CDMA CDMA CDMA CDMAWaveform CDMAWaveform CDMATime Spectrogram CDMAWaveform CDMATime CDMAPolar None None View4 EVM None None SETUP Standard IS 95 IS 95 IS 95 y Channel 777 777 777 J Span 5 MHz 30 MHz 30 MHz J Ref 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm y Reference Osc Internal Internal Internal Block Size 20 200 20 Trigger Mode
255. l line marker 1 and 2 Turns on or off the vertical line marker 1 Sets the position of the vertical line marker 1 Turns on or off the vertical line marker 2 Sets the position of the vertical line marker 2 Ver 2 Ver 1 Shows the difference between the vertical line marker 1 and 2 Trace2 Used to display two waveforms concurrently The Trace2 submenu sets up the second waveform Source Same as Source on page 2 63 Format Same as Format on page 2 64 Frame Same as Frame on page 2 64 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 65 Menu Functions Table 2 7 Waveform view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Copies the waveform currently being displayed to one of the following destinations This copy function is available only for the data acquired in the vector mode Clipboard Converts the waveform currently being displayed into the text form to copy it to the Windows clipboard The text data on the clipboard can be passed to PC applications For details refer to page 3 206 Text File Converts the waveform currently being displayed into the text form to copy it to a text file For details refer to page 3 206 D1 to D8 Selects a data register in which the waveform currently being displayed is saved temporarily Copy From Loads text data from the file to which the waveform was copied using Copy To This menu item is displayed only when you select a regist
256. lation For example 10 specifies that 10 area of both left and right ends are excluded See Figure 2 48 on page 2 82 Mask Left Sets the symbol number for the left mask area The left area from the specified symbol number is excluded from the EVM calculation Mask Right Sets the symbol number for the right mask area The right area from the specified symbol number is excluded from the EVM calculation Options Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Same as Display Lines in the Waveform view menu on page 2 65 Copy To Copies the waveform currently being displayed to one of the destinations Same as Copy To in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Scale Marker Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Same as Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Marker Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as The delta marker is represented as and For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Symbol Inputs the symbol position to place the marker The range is 0 to the number of symbols 1 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 81 Menu Functions Table 2 15 EVM view menu table Cont Top level Subordinate level options and d
257. lation Calculation Alpha Sets the RBW filter shape factor The range is 0 0001 to 1 RBW Sets the resolution bandwidth The range is 4 5 bins to 3 MHz Edit Creates a trigger mask pattern in a waveform display For details on how to create it refer to page 3 75 To create a trigger mask pattern and markers are used You can use Hor Ver and Toggle Delta to operate these markers The created mask pattern is saved in an internal trigger register Hor Specifies a horizontal position to which you moves the marker Ver Specifies a vertical position to which you moves the marker Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Draw Max Fills the area below the maximum line reference level Draw Line Fills the area below the draw line currently set and the line between O and The draw line is set using Draw Max or Draw Min DrawMin Fills the area below the minimum line the level below the reference level by 70 dB Fills the area below the horizontal line including a marker position Options Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Turns on or off the horizontal line marker 1 Hori Sets the position of the horizontal line marker 1 Turns on or off the horizontal line marker 2 fHor 2 Sets the position of the horizontal line marker 2 Hor 2 Hor 1 Shows the difference between the horizonta
258. low the analyzer to warm up for 20 minutes before you begin the calibration procedure The warm up period allows electrical performance of the analyzer to stabilize During normal operation when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C from the temperature at the previous calibration UNCAL is displayed in red in the hardware status display area see Figure 1 11 Run the self gain cal ibration UNCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE When red run the calibration Figure 1 11 Displaying UNCAL Use the following procedure to perform self gain calibration NOTE When you run self gain calibration during signal acquisition calibration begins after the acquisition is completed 1 Press the UTILITY key in the front panel CONFIG area See Figure 1 12 2 Press the Util A SelfCal side key 3 Press the Gain Cal side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process 4 If you press the AutoGainCal side key to select On calibration will run automatically anytime the analyzer gain drifts to an UNCAL state WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Calibration and Diagnostics config lt Util CONFIG area CONFIG MODE Action Assign Show SETUP UTILITY key VIEW Util A n SelfCal unity Util B a Util A SelfCal side key mc TH
259. lowing measurement parameters Options Specifies the power ratio between the current frequency area and the whole span area that is used to calculate the occupied bandwidth OBW The range is 90 to 99 8 By default 99 is set as specified in IS 95 and T 53 Separation Specifies the ratio of the frequency resolution to the span frequency This resolution is used to distinguish two adjacent peak spectrums as being independent spurious signals for the spurious search Threshold Sets the threshold level relative to the reference level to detect spurious signals Sorted by Specifies the order of the number tags assigned to the eight detected spurious signal If you select Level the tags will be numbered in level order If you select Frequency they will be numbered in frequency order Spurious Usually keep it On throughout the spurious measurement If you select Off with the number tag Search displayed the tag display position will not change during all subsequent measurements This setting is useful to observe time dependent changes of the detected spurious signals Selects either IS 95 or T 53 standard Specifies the measurement channel Displays the specified mask line of the specified channel By default the channel matches the one you specify in SETUP CDMA Freq Span Ref WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 85 Menu Functions CDMAPolar View Menu Table 2 17 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the v
260. m lower than the reference level Press the Draw Min side key m To place the baseline between the reference level and the level 70 dB lower than the reference level Move the edit marker O to a specified position using the Hor and Ver side keys then press the Draw Horizontal side key Original baseline gt New baseline gt Figure 3 42 Example of a trigger mask pattern with a shifted baseline WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 79 Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern 3 80 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual a A OS Power Measurement The following power measurements are available Noise Noise per frequency dBm Hz Power Power of the specified frequency area dBm C N Proportion of carrier to noise dB C No Proportion of carrier to noise per frequency dB Hz ACP Leakage power of adjacent channel dB OBW Occupied bandwidth WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 81 Power Measurement Setting Requirements Restrictions Marker Operations Using an Averaged Waveform 3 82 The following restrictions are imposed on the power measurements m Measurement is enabled only for the Waveform view and 3gppACPView m Only Blackman Harris default is enabled for the FFT window Select Memory Mode Input FFT FFT Window gt Blackman from the SETUP menu If you set an FFT window other than Blackman Harris the result will not be displayed For the FFT win
261. m view 2 90 CodeWPolar view 2 97 CodeWPower view 2 99 CodeWSpectrogram view 2 95 CONHIG 2 48 EVM view 2 81 EyeDiagram view 2 79 file access 2 119 FSK view 2 71 GSM view 2 107 GSMMask view menu 2 111 GSMPolar view menu 2 108 Polar view 2 76 Print 2 120 SaveLoad Util B 2 117 SelfCal Util A 2 116 SETUP CDMA 2 59 SETUP Standard 2 54 2 61 Spectrogram view 2 72 SymbolTable view 2 80 Waterfall view 2 75 Waveform view 2 63 Minimum frame period 3 29 Mode trigger 3 66 Modulation system supported 3 98 Mouse connection 1 11 3 195 connector rear panel 2 4 operation E 1 Index 4 Never trigger mode 3 69 New clock settings dialog box 1 13 Noise power measurement 3 83 Normal IF mode 3 4 trigger mode 3 66 Numeric input 2 16 0 OBW power measurement 3 88 One view display 3 34 Operation average 3 61 delta marker 3 48 file access menu 3 178 Keyboard E 9 marker 3 45 only with a mouse E 1 peak search 3 45 zoom 3 54 Operations menu 2 11 Optional accessories A 2 Options A 1 Origin offset Polar view 3 103 Output spectrum data in the text format 3 206 waveform data 3 201 OVERLOAD status display 2 8 Overload description 3 14 indicator 3 14 Overview features 1 2 product 1 1 P Parallel port rear panel 2 4 PAUSE status display 2 8 Peak hold description 3 57 Peak
262. main power spectrogram 3gppSpectrogram view View C Vector diagram 3gppPolar view View D Code domain power 3gppPower view For details on the view menus refer to Menu Functions beginning on page 2 47 and the illustrations on pages 3 147 and 3 148 Press the SETUP FREQ key and set the center frequency Press the SETUP REF key and set the reference level Press the SETUP MAIN key A wv PF Y Press the Block Size side key and set the number of frames The number of frames M must satisfy the following condition to analyze N slots M gt K N 1 5 where K 13 4 7 Press the START STOP BLOCK key to start data acquisition After the data acquisition the first slot is analyzed When the input level is too high the OVERLOAD indicator displays in red Then increase the reference level 8 Press the VIEW C key 9 Press the Analyze side key to measure for all frames WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 145 3GPP Analysis 3 146 10 A low level signal may cause an irregular waveform display In this case try these steps NOTE The analyzer detects the three channels of P SCH S SCH and PCPICH to establish the synchronization and correct the frequency and phase for the down link signal analysis If these channel levels are too low to be detected the analyzer cannot make measurement correctly This error occurs when one of these channel levels is less than about 1 10 the sum of other channel levels In this case set Scra
263. mask parameters by selecting Options Mask in the CDMATime view menu Off Left 169 ms Off Right 1 431 ms On Level 3 dB Off Level 20 dB Off Level 20 dB On Left 175 ms On Right 1 425 ms Figure 3 65 Default mask area WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 123 CDMA Analysis Measurement Procedure 3 124 1 Press CONFIG MODE More CDMA IS 95 T 53 and select Time Domain to set the analyzer with the basic configuration 2 Press the ROLL key to make sure that the input signal is a burst NOTE The burst signal must be active to evaluate the rising and falling characteristics of the input signal Press the Measure side key to perform the measurement When you press the Measure side key the nnn 100 message appears By default nnn increases from 0 to 100 It indicates that the signal is acquired 100 times while being averaged After the 100 100 message appears the view displays the latest acquisition signal in green and the averaged waveform in yellow At the same time the averaged waveform is compared with the mask for the PASS FAIL test The result is shown at the bottom left corner of the view IS 95 specifies that the averaging count is 100 This value is the default for the analyzer You can set another value through Options Num Averages in the view menu To stop the measurement before completion press the Break side key or
264. matically with specifying the IQ formatted file only WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual r Es File Operations The settings and data in the analyzer can be saved in files This section describes how to handle the files The following topics are included m Saving and loading files page 3 174 m Operating file access menu page 3 178 m Data file format page 3 184 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 173 File Operations Saving and Loading Files Available Files Configuration File CFG 3 174 You can save or load the settings or data on the hard disk or a floppy disk using the Save and Load menus The analyzer can save and load any file with one of the extensions listed in Table 3 19 Table 3 19 Files available in the analyzer Extension Description CFG A configuration file used to save the current settings IQ A file used to save IQ formatted data stands for in phase Q stands for quadrature phase which is orthogonal to I When data is written into the data memory the IQ format is always used This data can be saved into the file as it is AP A file used to save AP formatted data A and P stand for amplitude and phase respectively The contents of the data memory are converted into the AP format from the IQ format before being saved The configuration file contains the settings in all menus You can save the current configuration and settings in this kind of file You can also load
265. mber of points contained in one physical frame for the time and frequency domains The smaller the number of points is the more accurately time depen dent spectrum variations can be observed in the color spectrogram or waterfall view because of a shorten frame period On the other hand the larger the number of points is the better a SN ratio and frequency resolution result In the IQ Wide Dual and Zoom modes only 1024 is valid refer to Table 3 6 When you switch the memory mode to Dual or Zoom with the number of FFT points set to 256 the number of FFT points automatically changes to 1024 Table 3 6 Input modes and FFT parameters Input band FFT points Baseband 1024 or 256 HW or SW 1024 Zoom HW or SW 1024 RF 1024 or 256 o Da wasn fioa Zoom HW or SW 1024 Scalar SW 1024 or 256 Dual 1024 Zoom 1024 1024 IQ 1024 1 HW Hardware processing SW Software processing WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual FFT Parameters FFT Window Figure 3 7 outlines how frequency domain data is generated from time domain data FFT window ae Time domain data resulting after window process Frequency domain data Figure 3 7 Window process of time domain data The FFT window serves as a band pass filter between time and frequency domain data The FFT frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy of each frequency component depend on the window shape The analyzer supports three FFT windows Rectangular Blackman
266. mbling Code Search to Off and specify the scrambling code with Scrambling Code in the 3gppPolar view menu using the following steps a Press the VIEW C key to select the 3gppPolar view b Press the side key Options Scrambling Code Search and select Off allowing you to enter a scrambling code c Press the Scrambling Code side key and set the value The analyzer will use the scrambling code that you have set instead of searching for the scrambling code to analyze the down link signal d Press the START STOP BLOCK key to start data acquisition After the data acquisition the first slot is analyzed e Press the VIEW C key to select the 3gppPolar view f Press the View C lt side key top side key to show the top menu g Press the Analyze side key to analyze for all frames WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3GPP Analysis Code domain power Relative time from data acquisition end point View B Polar Measurement values gt Marker 5ch 15k 2ch 4 647dB O 7 Os at marker position 101 i Channel number Slot number in radio frame dab Symbol rate and channel Slot number relative to number at that rate data acquisition end point AB PUN C 5 tart Och Stop 63ch View B 3gppSpectrogram view Figure 3 76 Code domain power spectrogram Data source Date and time at data acquisition end point View C Active W CDMA Measurement 2000 01 11 21 42 Measurement values gt Marker
267. measure the time varying crest factor quantitatively in time series for code multi plexing signals such as CDMA W CDMA signals and multi carrier signals such as OFDM signals Calculation Process CCDF is calculated with the following formula Max SP X P Y dY XY where P Probability density CCDF X SP X Average Max Maximum of amplitude CCDF crest factor 0 Average Average of amplitude The analyzer processes input signals internally with the following procedure see Figure 3 88 1 Measure the amplitude of the input signal over time 2 Determine the amplitude distribution 3 Obtain CCDF using the above formula Amplitude 4 Max PA CCDF A h i j A W t EA D gt Crest factor Average gt gt gt Time A x Amplitude 0 X Amplitude Average Average Max Figure 3 88 CCDF calculation process 3 166 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CCDF Analysis Operating Examples The following procedure measures CCDF in View G and H View A to F might be used for another measurement such as cdmaOne and W CDMA 1 gt p B amp 10 11 Press the MH key in the front panel VIEW area to make the 4 view display Press the CONFIG MODE key Press the More side key Press the CCDF side key with the icon View G is set to the CCDF view and View H to the CCDFView display automatically Press the VIEW C key one or two times depending on the settings to display the Vie
268. mes Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 ROLL key and BLOCK key 46 Frame period 0 cece cece cece reece cence Seamless status display 0 cece eee eeeeeee Seamless acquisition and real time acquisition Real time acquisition in the frequency domain View control keys ccc cece cece cece ee eeee Views A to H 2x2 display cc cece ee eeee One view display cece cece cece cece eeeeee Two view display 0 ccc cece cree cence eeeee Four view display 1x4 display 06 Four view display 2x2 display 0000 Setting scales cece cee ccc c cece ern scscsees Display frames 0c cece cece ceee eee eies ss Linked views example eee ee eeeeeceees Relationship among frame bin and pixel Display data compression method Marker read out cece cece cee ee eee cece ZOOM PLOCESS 2 cece eee ee cece cece cere ce ecees Spectra before and after zooming Averaging process in the view eeeeeee Process of the utility average cece eee eees Simultaneous display o
269. mes per block and 1 024 points per frame the file capacity per block is a maximum of 16 MB It takes about 15 seconds to write the file If the block size is about a one or two digit number of frames it still takes about a two or three digit number of milliseconds For logging a one shot event the function can be used effectively if you have specified a proper number of frames If you want logging occurring at regular intervals or time reduction between blocks guaranteeing the minimum time this function may not work for you Refer to Frame Period and Real Time on page 3 25 for details 3 169 Auto Save Function Operating Procedure 3 170 The following procedure is a typical example of the auto save operation 1 2 Boot up the analyzer Set up the analyzer and press the BLOCK or ROLL key Check that signals are actually observed Press the CONFIG VIEW key 2 or 4 view display is more convenient to observe spectrum See Figure 3 91 In this example use 4 view display to observe spectrum waveform in two views and operate two auto save modes in the other two views View A Waveform view View B Spectrogram view View C AutoSave RollSave mode View D AutoSave BlockSave mode Press the View A to D side keys to select each view as above Select AutoSave in View C and D in this step Select either of the following auto save modes in View C and D m RollSave Save the data captured in the Roll mode Block
270. n 80u 160u 6 Auto On 1 Figure 2 24 Spectrum measurement with a span of 3 GHz WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial 2 Press the ROLL key to stop the measurement See the PAUSE status in the status display area as shown in Figure 2 25 If PAUSE is in blue The measurement is currently stopped If PAUSE is in gray The measurement is in progress Press the ROLL key to stop the measurement If PAUSE is blue the data acquisition is stopped If it is gray the data acquisition is in progress REMOTE UNCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE Status display area Figure 2 25 Status display area WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 25 Tutorial Measuring a Digitally Modulated Signal 2 26 Now measure a digitally modulated signal with the basic configuration pattern 1 Press the MODE key in the CONFIG area again see Figure 2 22 2 Press the More side key and then Digital Demod side key in the menu The display view changes as shown in Figure 2 26 The analyzer is set to a span of 3 GHz and a center frequency of 1 5 GHz It now displays the spectrum spectrogram vector constellation and EYE pattern in the four views URCAT AD TRICDERED PAUSE View A Active Freq mpl View C Active 1 4PI_QPSK Measurement Config lt Spectrum display area Vector display area View B Active Freqadmpl View D Measurement I Spectrog
271. n be purchased through a variety of agreements to fit your specific requirements For more information regarding service offerings or service locations worldwide please see the Tektronix product catalog or visit us on our Customer Services World Center web site at http www tek com Measurement Service Table of Contents General Safety Summary ccc cee cece ccc ce cesses cees Service Safety Summary ccc cece cece cece cece eceenes Prelice 25505 he gies lt eceas eke d sasnerd sos E E ER About This Manual 0 0 0 0 0c ccc cc eee eee eens Related IDOGUMENS 2 20 ee ceded obec eos we ea oe td tease a N CONVENIOS eas 6 52 dinin dos e delbd Bias dels a dled chan debe e bok a beana Contacting Tektronix siaii acetone de ss Ra eR A eels Getting Started Product Overview cc cece ccc cect cee c ces ee scene scnee FeatiiES soca oa a a E E Targets 034 ia hidden te heh E E E dh bee da ewes Difference between WCA330 and WCA380 0 0 0 ATChiteChite 5 55 cciebdide dea Phebe bebe beh Leet bea E Installation and Power On 00002 205002s 0000s beet cedex ewmns Unpacking and Tispectony vaca sise ideiei a gee aia iaa 8 kan Taare Sebi gs ee Connecting the Power Cord i sce acca Sig i esia dda a be vial 4 hale beaa gle Powerin Oi aaia a a sland nd et eRe Mi a eee ahaa dbo gle a NOY a aiaa ans Adjusting the Display Tilt Angle arcis 0 eee eee eee eee ee Powenn OPE sairis ected Scot st ld cbs B
272. n real time in the block mode This section explains how to set the frame period and the relation ship between the frame period and real time NOTE In the Zoom mode the frame period is fixed You cannot set it Setting a Frame Period The frame period is the time between acquisition of one frame and the next See Figure 3 11 Frame length Frame 0 Frame 1 Frame 2 lt gt lt gt lt gt Frame period Figure 3 11 Frame period Use the following procedure to set the frame period 1 Press the SETUP MAIN key gt the Frame Period side key 2 Use the general purpose knob to increase or decrease the value or enter a numeric value using the ENTRY keypad WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 25 Frame Period and Real Time Frame Period and Seamless Acquisition Real Time Acquisition 3 26 Figure 3 13 on the next page shows the concept of frame periods In the upper part of this figure the frame period is so set that frames overlap in the temporal aspect A shorter frame period allows you to observe time dependent variations in a spectrum waveform in more detail If you set the frame period to a value greater than the frame length there will be a time gap between frames Acquiring frame data without a time gap is called Seamless Acquisition during which SEAMLESS is displayed in blue in the status display area Figure 3 12 Turns blue during seamless acquisition CJ CJ VECTOR
273. n the display area that is horizontally split into two parts and vertically into two parts If the selected view is not defined the display area is empty LIRA Z KK lt 4 2 KKK MMO Figure 3 19 Four view display 1x4 display WUHAN WIE View A or E is displayed View C or G is displayed m JNN Ky View B or F is displayed View D or H is displayed WW Figure 3 20 Four view display 2x2 display o GG G G o 0 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 35 Displaying Waveform Data Setting Scales Auto Scale Changing Scales Manually 3 36 The horizontal and vertical axes in each view are automatically defined when setting up the SETUP menu items To change scale settings use the auto scale function or set scales manually The Polar and SymbolTable views have no scaling function The analyzer uses the auto scale function to calculate the optimum scale based on a captured waveform In the Roll mode you can use the auto scale function during data acquisition 1 Select a view For example when you select View A press the VIEW A key 2 Press the VIEW SCALE key 3 The Auto Scale or Full Scale side key is displayed depending on the views Press either side ke
274. nce Bottom 20 mm 0 79 in Both sides 50 mm 1 97 in Rear 50 mm 1 97 in from the rear fan cover B 12 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 21 Certifications and compliances Characteristic EC Declaration of Conformity EMC Description Meets intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 61000 3 2 EN 50082 1 Immunity AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity EN61000 4 3 RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity EN61000 4 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity EN61000 4 5 Power Line Surge Immunity EN61000 4 6 Conducted Disturbances Induced by RF Fields EN61000 4 8 Power Frequency Electromagnetic Field EN61000 4 11 Power Line Interruption Immunity Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC Complies with EMC provision of Radiocommunications Act per the following standard s AS NZS 2064 1 2 Industrial Scientific and Medical Equipment 1992 EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing Canadian Certification Additional Compliance Installation Overvoltage Category Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the
275. nd Power On Powering Off Place the power switch on the front panel in the STANDBY position When you place the power switch in the STANDBY position the internal software detects the condition of the power switch terminates measurement applications and Windows 98 and automatically powers off the analyzer You do not have to terminate them manually The STANDBY LED is lit after blinking for a while NOTE When you place the power switch on the front panel in the STANDBY position the principal power supply is not turned off completely When you want to turn off the principal power supply you must place the principal power switch on the rear panel in the OFF position CAUTION When you powering on or off the analyzer be sure to use the power switch on the front panel When the power cord remains unplugged from the AC outlet or no voltage is being supplied to the AC outlet be sure to keep the power switch in the STANDBY position WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Installation and Power On When the Analyzer Does Not Seem to Work Properly When Scan Disk Appears WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual When the analyzer does not seem to work properly use the following procedure to power off the analyzer and power on again NOTE When the analyzer does not work properly power is not shut off by returning the power switch on the front panel from ON to STANDBY Make sure that the power switch on the front panel is
276. nd enters the blue area assuming that screen colors are set to the defaults a trigger occurs Specifies a trigger position between 0 and 100 in 1 steps The trigger position represents the rate of the number of frames acquired before the trigger generation to that of frames contained in one block For example if one block contains 1000 frames and the trigger position is 10 100 frames are acquired before trigger generation and 900 frames are acquired after trigger generation Refer to Trigger Position on page 3 74 for details Delayed Sets the delay time when the trigger mode is set to Delayed The range is 0 to 60 s Timeout Sets the timeout value when the trigger mode is set to Timeout The range is 0 to 60 s Interval Sets the time interval when the trigger mode is set to Interval or Quick Interval The range is 1 to 3600 s WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 57 Menu Functions Table 2 4 SETUP standard menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Zoom This submenu is displayed only when the zoom mode is set Zoom is a function to enlarge frequency for a waveform around the center frequency Refer to Zoom on page 3 51 for details FFT Type Selects HW hardware or SW software for the FFT processing method Same as FFT Type on page 2 55 FFT Window Selects Blackman Hamming or Rect for the FFT window Same as FFT Window on page 2 55 Freq
277. nditions are satisfied Peak phase error lt 20 RMS phase error lt 5 Frequency error lt 0 05 ppm of the center frequency Output power The analyzer measures the mean carrier power according to the GSM 11 20 2 1 6 3 standard Figure 3 81 shows the slot data structure The power is measured for the E Data 2 section after TS Training Sequence and then averaged for the specified number of slots The decision is Pass if the following condition is satisfied 0 dB lt Output power Reference power lt 3 dB T H0 G HFF T H0 E E E Data 1 TS Data 2 lt x 58 bits gt lt 26 bits lt 58 bits al j 3 bits Sits 8 25 bits Figure 3 81 Slot data structure 3 152 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power vs Time The analyzer measures the power vs time according to the GSM 11 20 2 1 6 4 standard The input signal is demodulated and then synchronized with TS Training Sequence The Pass Fail test is done for the spectrum in comparison with the specified line in the GSM standard Spectrum MOD The analyzer measures ACP Adjacent Channel Leakage Power for a continuous modulation spectrum according to the GSM 11 20 2 1 6 5 1 standard The spectra are obtained for 160 us after TS Training Sequence using software FFT with the 4 sample Blackman Harris window and the 30 kHz RBW Gaussian filter and
278. ng Waveform Data Spectra are displayed in a view on screen The view is a window where waveform marker and measurement results are displayed Up to eight views can be defined Up to four windows can be displayed simultaneously This section discusses the following topics m Setting views m Setting scales m Changing display frames m Relationship among frame bin and pixel WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 31 Displaying Waveform Data Setting Views 3 32 Use the VIEW keys on the front panel to set up views see Figure 3 15 View selection keys View menu keys lt View layout keys Figure 3 15 View control keys There are eight views named View A to H Each view is displayed in the fixed location see Figure 3 16 VIEW B key VIEW D key Use the VIEW A to D keys to select the view For example when you switch the view A to E press the VIEW A key twice while selecting the view A Figure 3 16 Views A to H 2x2 display WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Waveform Data Defining a View You can display the spectrum in one of the following view types Waveform Spectrogram or Waterfall To select a view type use the following steps 1 Press the CONFIG VIEW key on the front panel The CONFIG VIEW menu appears 2 Press one of the View A to D side keys If you want to define View E to H press one of these sid
279. ng changes to acquired data Since the trigger comparator is continuously in operation at the maximum rate the phenomenon will not be missed even when a low rate of frame update has been set in the Block mode The pre trigger and post trigger positions can be set optionally the phenomenon before and after the trigger event can be measured WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Product Overview Data Memory This is a 16 Mbyte high rate SRAM block that stores spectrum data For 1 024 point analysis this memory contains 4 000 frames for 256 point analysis it contains 16 000 frames The memory is accessed from the system controller via the ISA PC bridge Controller Controls the signal processing system hardware ISA PCI Bus The ISA PCTI bus links the system components CPU Board This system controller board is equipped with a Intel CELERON CPU It controls the analyzer hardware and the user interface with the Windows 98 operating system The analyzer is equipped with a 40 G byte hard disk and a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive for storing data and settings 8 M byte flash disk for storing calibration data and expansion slots The analyzer has the following external interfaces on the rear panel m Mouse m Keyboard m Centronics parallel VGA output m LAN Ethernet 10 100BASE T GPIB TFT Display A 12 1 inch XGA TFT LCD module is used This color display has a sufficient resolution for multi windows and can display 17 formats You can s
280. ng for the horizontal axis The time length required for symbol to symbol movement is defined as 1 The range is 1 to 16 Marker Inputs the time to move the O marker WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 79 Menu Functions SymbolTable View Menu Table 2 14 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as SymbolTable in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 Table 2 14 SymbolTable view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Specifies the source data for the view Same as Source in the EyeDiagram view menu on page 2 79 Radix Selects Hex hexadecimal Oct octal or Bin binary for the notation of numeric values displayed Rotate Selects the numeric value start position from 0 to 3 This setting is unavailable for the 1 4 m QPSK and GMSK modulating systems Symbol Inputs the symbol position to place the O marker The range is 0 to the number of symbols 1 Copy To Copies the symbol data currently being displayed to one of the following destinations Clipboard Converts the symbol data currently being displayed into the text form to copy it to the Windows clipboard The text data on the clipboard can be passed to PC applications For details refer to page 3 206 Text File Converts the symbol data currently being displayed into the text form to copy it to a text file For details refer to page 3 206 Di to D8 Selects a
281. nic solvents such as benzene and acetone must never be used Inspect the outside of the instrument for damage wear and missing parts using Table F 1 as a guide Instruments that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and perfor mance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual F 1 Appendix F Inspection and Cleaning Table F 1 External inspection check list Item Inspect for Cabinet front panel and cover Cracks scratches deformations damaged hardware or gaskets Front panel knobs Missing damaged or loose knobs Connectors Broken shells cracked insulation and deformed contacts Dirt in connectors Carrying handle bail Correct operation cabinet feet Accessories Missing items or parts of items bent pins broken or frayed cables and damaged connectors Cleaning Exterior Clean the exterior of the instrument as follows Repair action Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office CAUTION To prevent moisture from entering the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator 1 Remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint free cloth 2 Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose detergent and water solution D
282. nning out the sampling rate This filter consists of an FIR filter of a maximum of 503 taps and four stage comb filters The factor of the FIR filter can be set at a high precision of 20 bits and it implements relatively sharp thinning out filtering with less spurious emission Upon receiving the data stream from the digital down converter this block divides the data into frames and writes the data into data memory The FIFO sends these frames to the digital trigger comparator at the same time Performs 1 024 or 256 point complex FFT at high speed This block consists of the FFT calculation DSP output buffer and timing control circuit To obtain the capability of performing 1 024 point complex FFT at 12 500 times s this processor has a unique parallel structure This capability of calculation enables real time analysis to be available in up to 5 MHz span The input data is subjected to a window process to keep from missing parts of the spectrum For the window type you have three options of Blackman Harris Hamming and Rectangular To guarantee the continuity of data the windows show view of the spectrum span which overlap by 50 or more for real time spans of 5 MHz or less This block has the real time digital trigger mechanism to monitor the occurrence of a specific event on the spectrum Trigger conditions are produced by editing a mask pattern on the amplitude vs frequency display screen The mask pattern can be obtained also by maki
283. nt result C N measurement C No measurement Figure 3 45 C N and C No measurement examples WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement ACP Measurement 3 86 The ACP Adjacent Channel Leakage Power measurement measures the power proportion dB of a signal appearing in a frequency region adjacent to the carrier signal frequency the carrier signal Use three band power markers specialized for ACP measurement Center Upper and Lower For the band power marker operations refer to page 3 90 To measure ACP follow this procedure 1 Display the spectrum in the Waveform view or 3gppACPView for the 3GPP standard From the view menu select Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement ACP Press the ACP side key and set the band power marker as follows a Press the Center Lock side key and select On to fix the Center band power marker at center It is always On for the 3gppACPView You can move the O marker independently Press the BW side key and input the bandwidth Press the SP side key and input the frequency interval between two adjacent channels You can display the Upper and Lower band power markers by selecting Band Power Markers Upper and Lower respectively Read the measured value displayed at the top left corner on the view ACP Upper dB indicates the power proportion of the low frequency adjacent channel signal to the carrier signal ACP Lower
284. nu Functions CCDFView Menu Table 2 30 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CCDFView in the CONFIG VIEW menu For CCDF analysis refer to page 3 165 Table 2 31 CCDFView menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Specifies the source data for the view D1 D2 D3 D4 Selects a data register D5 D6 D7 D8 Choose the same register as Destination in the CCDF view refer to page 2 113 Options Copy To Copies the waveform currently being displayed to one of the following destinations Same as Copy To in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Copy From Loads text data from the file to which the waveform was copied using Copy To Scale Marker Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Stop Sets the vertical axis stop value Ver Start Sets the vertical axis start value Full Scale Resets the vertical scale to the default Operates the marker and delta marker Same as Marker in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 Search Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there Same as Search in the Analog view menu on page 2 70 2 114 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions AutoSave Menu Table 2 30 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as AutoSave in the CONFIG VIEW menu The auto save function stor
285. o not use abrasive cleaners 3 Clean the monitor screen with a lint free cloth dampened with either isopro pyl alcohol or preferably a gentle general purpose detergent and water solution Lubrication There is no periodic lubrication required for this instrument Cleaning Inside Consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative for cleaning the instrument interior F 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Index Index Symbols AP file extension 3 174 CFG file extension 3 174 IQ file extension 3 174 QT file extension 3 172 Numbers 3GPP analysis ACP measurement 3 149 down link signal 3 143 3gppACPView menu table 2 100 3gppPolar view menu table 2 104 3gppPower view menu table 2 106 3gppSpectrogram view menu table 2 103 A AC inlet rear panel 2 4 Accessories A 1 optional A 2 standard A 2 ACP power measurement 3 86 ACP measurement 3GPP 3 149 Acquisition 3 21 start stop 3 23 Address Tektronix xxi Adjusting the display tilt angle 1 15 Analog modulated signal analysis 3 95 Analog view menu table 2 69 Analysis 3GPP 3 143 analog modulation 3 95 CCDF 3 165 CDMA 3 111 cdmaOne 3 127 digital modulation 3 97 FSK signal 3 109 GSM 3 151 power 3 81 W CDMA 3 135 Architecture 1 4 Auto trigger mode 3 66 Auto save function 3 169 Auto scale 3 36 Average description 3 57 mode 3 60 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual operation
286. ob to change the increment of a setting value Step key to increase the increment L Step key to decrease the increment i C y General purpose knob Figure 2 17 Step keys Pressing a Step key causes the value to change in the numeric input field The increment is MHz in the example illustrated below that is the frequency will be set in 1 MHz step It is changed by pressing a Step key repeatedly Set the desired increment while observing the display Freq Hz 4l eS The increment Figure 2 18 Increment display d Increase or decrease the numeric value in this example the frequency by turning the general purpose knob or pressing the amp and keys When necessary repeat steps c and d to obtain a desired value more quickly The established values are immediately reflected in the analyzer settings 2 18 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial This section describes basic operating procedures such as applying power displaying the results of measurements and powering off the analyzer This section uses default settings as much as possible The following procedures are included in this section Connecting the hardware components and powering up Configuring basic patterns m Measuring the spectrum m Measuring the digitally modulated signal Making changes to the hardware settings View definitions and layout Using averaging and compared displays Using
287. odeWPower view dB with X Axis set to Symbol Start Osyr stop 39sy Figure 3 74 Symbol power WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 139 W CDMA Analysis Code Domain Power The standard code domain power measurement as described above acquires and Measurement for processes slots one by one so it can not capture slots continuously because of Continuous Slots the process time limit The following shows the method to obtain continuous code domain power by acquiring data for slots in the lump and performing the measurement for continuous data 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 3 140 Press the CONFIG MODE key Press the More side key Press the W CDMA Down Link side key Press the VIEW C key Press the Standard side key and select chip rate 4 096 8 192 or 16 384 Mcpc Press the SETUP SPAN key and set the span as follows m Span 10 MHz for the chip rate of 4 096 Mcpc m Span 30 MHz for the chip rate of 8 192 and 16 384 Mcpe Press the SETUP FREQ key to set the center frequency Press the SETUP REF key to set the reference level Press the SETUP MAIN key Press the Block Size side key and set the number of frames The number of frames M must satisfy the following condition to analyze N slots M gt K N 41 5 where K 12 5 for 10 MHz span K 25 for 20 or 30 MHz span Press the Trigger side key Set the Count side key to On Press the START STOP BLOCK key to start data acquisition After the data
288. oints 500 to 2 kHz span 20 ms 256 1024 points 200 Hz span 50 ms 256 1024 points 100 Hz span 100 ms 256 1024 points Minimum frame update time Dual mode 500 k to 6 MHz span 160 us 50 k to 500 kHz span 400 us 5 k to 20 kHz span 4ms 500 to 2 kHz span 40 ms 200 Hz span 100 ms 100 Hz span 200 ms Frame update time Zoom Baseband Normal and HiRes IF modes 5 MHz span 160 us 2 MHz span 320 us 1 MHz span 640 us 500 kHz span 1 28 ms 200 kHz span 3 2 ms 100 kHz span 6 4 ms 50 kHz span 12 8 ms 20 kHz span 32 ms 10 kHz span 64 ms 5 kHz span 128 ms 2 kHz span 320 ms 1 kHz span 640 ms 500 Hz span 1 28s 200 Hz span 3 25 100 Hz span 6 4s Frame update time Zoom Wide IF mode IQ 30 MHz span 25 US 20 MHz span 25 US 10 MHz span 50 Us WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual B 7 Appendix B Specifications Table B 10 Digital demodulation Characteristic Description Demodulator Carrier type Modulation format Measurement filter Reference filter Filter parameter Maximum symbol rate Continuous Burst BPSK QPSK 11 4 Shift DQPSK 8PSK OQPSK 16QAM 64QAM 256QAM GMSK Root cosine Cosine Gauss a BT 0 0001 to 1 0 0001 step 5 3 Msps Baseband Normal and HiRes IF modes 20 48 Msps IQ Wide IF mode Standard setup PDC PHS NADC TETRA GSM CDPD IS 95 T 53 Display format Vector diagram Symbol locus display Frequency error measurement Origin offset measurement Constellation diagr
289. on page 2 78 Format Selects the display format Same as Display in the Polar view menu on page 2 78 Inputs the time to move the O marker Analyze Performs the measurement for all time slots on the data memory WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 105 Menu Functions 3gppPower View Menu 3gppPower view menu is the one when you have defined the view as 3gppPower in the CONFIG VIEW menu According to the 3GPP standard this view displays each channel power measured for the symbol specified with Time Slot in the 3gppSpectrogram view menu For detail on the 3GPP analysis refer to page 3 143 The menu is the same as the CodeWPower view menu on page 2 99 For detail on the 3GPP analysis refer to page 3 143 2 106 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions GSM View Menu Table 2 27 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as GSM in the CONFIG VIEW menu This view controls measurement according to the GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard For details on GSM analysis refer to page 3 151 NOTE The GSM view is designed to work only in View D for the GSM analysis When you perform GSM measurement select GSM Measurement in the CONFIG MODE menu or define View D as GSM Table 2 27 GSM view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Measurement Selects the measurement item Mod Accuracy Selects the modulation accuracy measurement Out
290. onfiguration set by the CONFIG MODE menu are shown in Table C 1 for the Standard configuration Table C 2 for the CDMA configuration and Table C 3 for the 3GPP configuration Restoring the default settings is described at the end of this section Table C 1 Default settings for the Standard configuration Spectrum ner Menu Item Spectrum Speero Dual Zoom aie Folly A SI gram CONFIG Setup Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard View A Waveform Waveform Waveform Waveform Waveform Waveform View B None Spectrogram Spectrogram Spectrogram Spectrogram Spectrogram View C None None Waveform Waveform Polar Waveform View D None None Waveform Spectrogram EyeDiagram Waveform Util D None None None None None Ext Sync Util E None None None None None None Util F None None None None None None Util G None None None None None None SETUP Band RF RF1 RF RF1 RF RF1 RF RF1 RF RF1 RF RF1 J IF Mode Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Wide J Memory Mode Frequency Frequency Dual Zoom Dual Input Coupling AC AC AC AC AC FFT Window Blackman Blackman Blackman Blackman Blackman FFT Points 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 Freq 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz J Span 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz 3 GHz s Ref 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm y Reference Osc Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Frequency Offset 0 0 0 0 0 Ref Offset 0 0 0 0 0 Frame Period 80 u 160 u 160 u 80 u 160 u Block Size 200 200 200 200 200
291. ons Figure 1 8 Display of self test results upon power up upper left of screen WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Installation and Power On The following initial screen appears as shown in Figure 1 9 UH CAL IVERLOAD TRI PAUSE View A Active Freqampl Config lt Mode Load From File CFG Save To File CFG Spectrum Spectrum Spectrogram JN More Freq 1 5GHz Span 3GHz Ref OdBm VECTOR RFAtt 200B Mixer RF1 Normal AC Freq HW 1024 Blackman 80u 160u 6 Auto On 1 Figure 1 9 Initial screen WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Installation and Power On Adjusting the Display Tilt Angle You can adjust the tilt angle of the display within the range of 0 to 30 degrees as appropriate to the lighting conditions in the room and the level of your eyes When you press the release bar at the bottom of the display the bottom of the display slightly pops up toward you While holding the display at its bottom pull it up toward you until you find the optimal viewing angle If you want to return the display into the main cabinet continue to press the bottom of the display until you hear a click See Figure 1 10 2900 0000 0 0004 9 i D0 OO ooo aaa DODO 000 4 RS 0004 9 0007 QO OOD DODO ERRIRE RA Figure 1 10 Angular adjustment of tilt display WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 15 Installation a
292. ons Monochrome Off Options Number Colors 100 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual C 7 Appendix C Default Settings Table C 3 Default settings for the 3GPP configuration Cont Menu item sd Down Link RST View Rave 0 WCDMA Manual Setup Modulation W CDMA Manual Setup Chip Rate 3 84 M Manual Setup Measurement Filter RootRaisedCosine Manual Setup Reference Filter RaisedCosine Manual Setup Alpha BT 0 22 Manual Setup Auto Carrier On Options gt Time Slot 0 Options Short Code 34 ch Options Display Measurement Options Format Vector Options Marker 0 Options Hide SCH Part On Options Symbol Rate 15k Vew D Shor Code Of 0 Composit BA ch 0 5008 50 08 igh Of 2 Of 1 These items are not reset when you set the basic configuration C 8 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix C Default Settings Restoring Default Settings When you select a basic configuration from the CONFIG MODE menu after you have changed some settings the parameters indicated with the check mark V in the RST column of Table C 1 to C 3 remain unchanged Do the following steps to reset the analyzer to the default basic configuration For the Standard Configuration Refer to Table C 1 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key on the front panel 2 Press the side key targeting the basic configuration Set the parameters that are not reset 3 Change the input mod
293. ontal scale to full scale to display all data on the memory WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 111 Menu Functions CCDF Menu Table 2 30 summarizes the menu when you have defined the view as CCDF in the CONFIG VIEW menu For CCDF analysis refer to page 3 165 2 112 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 30 CCDF menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Specifies the source data for the view Same as Source in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 Frame Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written Options Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed after a trigger event occurs If this frame number agrees with the trigger position specified with Setup Trigger gt Pos the frame for which the trigger is generated is displayed By default Position is set to zero current frame Hold Ver Scale Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the vertical axis when you change the input source Same as Hold Ver Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Scale Marker Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Stop Sets the vertical axis stop value Ver Start Sets the vertical axis start value Auto Scale Automatically sets t
294. ontrol the CONFIG menu In the CONFIG menu you can set the hardware with the basic patterns define views and operate the utility functions Refer to page 2 48 for the CONFIG menu WCA380 toimincanon ANALYZER ad General purpose knob Used to increment or decrement a set value or select an item when making changes to settings or parameters Refer to page 2 17 for inputting a numeric value Refer to page 2 16 for selecting an item START STOP keys Starts or stops data acquisition You can specify the acquisition mode at this time Refer to page 3 21 for capturing the data VIEW area The acquisition data is displayed through a view Use this key to control display of the views or control the menus Refer to page 2 63 and below for the view menus Refer to page 3 31 for data display ENTRY keypad Used to enable menu item selection instead of the general purpose knob Refer to page 2 17 for inputting numeric values External trigger input connector RF input connector A BNC connector for external trigger input The input voltage is 0 to 5 V and must be used at the TTL level An RF signal input connector with an input impedance of 50 Q The maximum capacity of non breakdown input is 30 dBm Refer to page 3 65 for the trigger NOTE Inputting a signal of more than 30 dBm may damage the instrument Refer to pa
295. or modulation analysis of wide bandwidth signals or code domain analysis of W COMA Memory Mode Sets up input coupling a memory mode and FFT parameters Input FFT Input Coupling Selects the input coupling for the RF INPUT connector on the front panel This item is displayed only in the Baseband mode In the RF mode the input coupling is fixed to AC In the IQ mode AC or DC is selectable AC Removes the DC component of an input signal to process only the AC component GND Displays the ground level DC Measures an input signal as it is Memory Mode Selects the memory mode Refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 for details Frequency Processes data in the frequency domain only Dual Processes data in both the frequency and time domains Zoom Processes data in both the frequency and time domains and expand the waveform around a specified center frequency 2 54 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 4 SETUP standard menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions FFT Type Selects HW hardware or SW software for the FFT processing method Refer to FFT Parameters on page 3 15 for the details FFT Points Selects 256 or 1024 for the number of FFT sample points per frame For 1024 points the high resolution mode results For 256 points the high speed measurement mode results For Dual and Zoom modes only the 1024 points setting is valid A frame length also depends on the num
296. ory to a file Source Specifies the input data to be saved None Specifies no input source Active Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Zoom Specifies the zoomed data for the input source D1 to D8 Specifies one of the data registers of D1 to D8 for the input source Before saving the data copy the data to this register using Options Copy To in other view menus or Util C Average on a utility menu File 1Q Specifies the IQ formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 File AP Specifies the AP formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Specifies the first frame for saving Specifies the last frame for saving With the beginning and end frames specified only the frames of this data range are saved The specified frame number may be 0 to block size 1 or to trigger count x block size 1 If you set a trigger AllFrames Specifies that the data in all frames is saved Sets the frame at the marker position to End Frame Save To File Saves the data to a file in the IQ format 1Q Save To File Saves the data to a file in the AP format AP The data saved in AP format is unavailable for modulation analysis or zoom Load Loads data from a file to the data memory Load From File Loads the data from the file that contains it in the IQ format 1Q Load From
297. owing the messages appearing in the dialog box NOTE You can set the default printer when you install the driver REMOTE UHCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE View A Active Freqampl Config lt Mode amp Exploring Printers Eile Edit View e 5 faa LDA 2X Ef E Load From File CFG Address 4 Printers Folders x Name Documents Status Comment A Desktop fa Add Printer My Computer B Tektronix Phaser 5 Save To He 3 Floppy amp File CF amp ag C ae D G Printers J Control Panel 2 Dial Up Networking Tools Help Add Printer Wizard dwe This wizard will help you to install your printer quickly and i ee easily To begin installing your printer click Next Spectrum Spectrogram Figure 3 105 Installing the printer driver WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 203 Outputting Waveform Data Setting the Printer Property If you want to set the printer property such as the paper size follow these steps 1 On the Windows 98 desktop double click My Computer Printers and click the printer icon that you use 2 Right click on the printer icon and select Properties from the menu 3 Click on any of the tabs in the Properties window to view and make selections that control the printer features For example the Paper tab controls Paper size and Paper source selections Return to the View Display When you switch the display from the Windows 98 desk
298. p Project standard The following topics are discussed in this chapter m 3GPP down link signal analysis m About the 3GPP analysis Measurement functions m Measurement process m Basic operation for code domain power measurement m 3GPP ACP measurement m Restrictions m Basic procedure 3GPP Down Link Signal Analysis About the 3GPP Analysis The analyzer processes the down link signals specified in the 3GPP standard The analyzer covers the 3GPP parameters listed in Table 3 17 Table 3 17 3GPP parameters Item Chip rate Description 3 84 Mcps Symbol rate Maximum number of channels Frame structure Scrambling code 7 5 ksps 15 ksps 30 ksps 60 ksps 120 ksps 240 ksps 480 ksps 960 ksps 1920 ksps 512 Time slot 666 7 us 18 bit Gold code using M sequence obtained from the generator polynomial Channelization code Modulation method Baseband filter Hierarchical orthogonal code sequence specified with the combination of the chip rate and symbol rate QPSK Root cosine with a 0 22 default 0 0001 lt as1 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 143 3GPP Analysis Measurement Functions The analyzer has the following measurement functions Code domain power The analyzer measures the relative power to total power for each channel with multi rate and 512 channels maximum Time vs code domain power The analyzer measures the relative power at symbol points for each channel as time s
299. p WCA380 User Manual Trigger Quick Interval Same as Interval except that the analyzer acquires all the blocks and then displays them Data Data Data acquisition acquisition acquisition Display Time Specified time The point at which you press the BLOCK key Figure 3 37 Quick Interval trigger Never Press the BLOCK key to start or stop acquisition of one block of data manually Other trigger settings are not effective WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 69 Trigger Trigger Count The trigger count specifies the number of times data is acquired Depending on the trigger mode data acquisition is performed in the following two cases m When you press the BLOCK key the analyzer acquires data the number of specified times and terminates the process regardless of trigger conditions m When you press the BLOCK key the analyzer acquires data the number of specified times after trigger generation and terminates the process Setting 1 Press SETUP MAIN gt Trigger Count and select On enabled or Off disabled 2 When you turn Count on press the Times side key to enter the value The maximum trigger count depends on the number of FFT points and memory modes refer to Table 3 12 Table 3 12 Maximum trigger count FFT points Memory mode Maximum trigger count fraction part rounded down 256 Frequency 16 000 Block size setting Frequency 4 000
300. page E 7 AOOO Setup lt Io Indicates that you can move to a higher menu level Setup lt Currently displayed menu name Input FET Currently displayed submenu name Clicking this kind of menu item allows you to move to a higher menu level Cancel When you click this menu item the menu currently displayed terminates and the menu previously displayed appears Figure E 3 Operating the side menu top level item WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual E 5 Appendix E Mouse Operations Titi t S Mote Trigger Max Span s Frame Period Clicking the menu item labeled More displays another side menu of the same menu level Clicking the menu item labeled displays a subordinate side menu When you click this kind of menu item the function indicated by the label is executed Used to input a numeric value Clicking this kind of menu item causes the menu item display to change as shown below The Up and Down arrows indicate that this menu item has been selected Input a value through the keypad or a keyboard connected to the instrument You can use the general purpose knob or the Up and Down arrows to increase or decrease the current setting value The arrow button in the field indicates that the drop down listing can be displ
301. pan Sets the span to 5 MHz and the trigger mode to Auto Auto Trig It is useful to observe a continuous wave 5MHz Span Sets the span to 5 MHz and the trigger mode to Normal Normal Trig It is useful to observe a burst signal Block Size Specifies the number of frames when data is acquired in the block mode When you press the BLOCK key data is acquired in frames for the block size specified here and then displayed Refer to Setting the Block Size on page 3 22 Trigger Sets the trigger parameters Same as Trigger in the SETUP Standard menu on page 2 56 Refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for details Trigger Level Sets the trigger level in the time domain when you have selected 5 MHz Span Normal Trig The range is 40 dB to 0 dB 2 60 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions SETUP 3gppACP Menu When you select 3gppACP with CONFIG SETUP Setup pressing the SETUP MAIN key displays the menu shown in Table 2 6 Use this menu to set input mode frequency reference level FFT and other parameters for the ACP measurement under the 3GPP standard Table 2 6 SETUP 3gppACP menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Band Selects an input frequency range RF WCA330 only 10 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Normal HiRes or 50 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Wide RF1 to RF4 WCA380 only RF1 10 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Normal HiRes or 50 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Wide RF2 2 5 GHz to 3 5 GHz RF3
302. ping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENT
303. pose The line marker is controlled with the Options gt Display Lines menu in the views such as Waveform Analog FSK and CodePower WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 45 Marker Operations and Peak Search Moving the Primary Marker 3 46 To move the primary marker use the general purpose knob the keypad on the front panel the search functions or a combination of the knob keypad and search functions 1 Select the view by pressing one of the VIEW A to D keys 2 Move the marker in either of the following ways General purpose knob Press VIEW MKR gt Hor Then turn the general purpose knob to move the marker horizontally If the Ver menu item is displayed you can also move the marker vertically by pressing the Ver side key and turning the general purpose knob Keypad Press VIEW MKR gt Hor Then input the numeric value with the keypad to move the marker horizontally If the Ver menu item is displayed you can also move the marker vertically by pressing the Ver side key and inputting the numeric value In the Polar and EyeDiagram views the Marker side key is displayed instead of the Hor or Ver side key In the SymbolTable view the Symbol side key is displayed Search function When you press the VIEW SRCH key the marker moves to the maximum peak of the waveform Rotating the knob cw or ccw moves the marker to the right or left peak respectively You can use the search menu such as Peak Max and M
304. ps Table 2 2 Setup display items Display items From left to right on upper row Frequency Menu items SETUP Freq Span Ref gt Freq Span SETUP Freq Span Ref gt Span Reference level From left to right on middle row RF attenuator Mixer level SETUP Freq Span Ref gt Ref SETUP Freg Span Ref RF Att SETUP Freq Span Ref Mixer Level From left to right on lower row Input band IF mode Input coupling SETUP Band SETUP IF Mode SETUP Memory Mode nput FFT Input Coupling Memory mode SETUP Memory Mode Input FFT Memory Mode FFT type SETUP Memory Mode nput FFT FFT Type FFT points SETUP Memory Mode Input FFT FFT Points FFT window SETUP Memory Mode nput FFT FFT Window Frame period SETUP Frame Period Block size SETUP Block Size Trigger mode SETUP Trigger Mode Trigger count SETUP Trigger Count Trigger count value SETUP Trigger Times Trigger domain SETUP Trigger Domain Trigger source SETUP Trigger Source Trigger polarity SETUP Trigger Slope Trigger position SETUP Trigger Pos The arrow gt indicates that the one pointed to is at the next lower level WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual SS ESS Menu Operations This section describes basic operations of the menus on the analyzer and how to select the desired menu item and input numeric values Refer to Menu Functions on page 2 47 for menu function de
305. putPower Selects the mean carrier power measurement PowerVSTime Selects the power vs time measurement Spectrum MOD Selects the ACP measurement for a continuous modulation spectrum Spectrum SW Selects the ACP measurement for a switching transient spectrum Burst Count Specifies the number of bursts to acquire The range is 1 to 4000 This menu is available when Measurement is set to OutputPower Spectrum MOD and Spectrum SW Measure Starts to acquire and process data Use the ROLL or BLOCK key to stop acquisition Analyze Processes the data acquired on the memory or loaded from a file If you want to discontinue the analysis press the ROLL or BLOCK key Burst No Specifies the number of the burst to display This menu is shown when the number of bursts determines after pressing the Analyze side key This menu is not available when Measurement is set to Spectrum SW WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 107 Menu Functions GSMPolar View Menu Table 2 28 summarizes the GSMPolar view menu displayed when you select GSM Measurement in the CONFIG MODE menu or define View D as GSM This view displays IQ loci and symbol positions according to the GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard For details on GSM analysis refer to page 3 151 Table 2 28 GSMPolar view menu table Top level Source Frame Standard Manual Setup Subordinate level options and descriptions Specifies the source data for the
306. q 1 5GHz Span 15MHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt OdB Mixer 5dBm RF1 HiRes AC Dual SW 1024 Blackman Figure 3 80 3GPP ACP measurement example 3 150 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis This chapter describes the measurement procedures according to the GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard The following topics are discussed Measurement functions m Basic operations Selecting the GSM measurement Modulation accuracy measurement Output power measurement Power vs Time measurement Spectrum MOD measurement Spectrum SW measurement Analyzing file data m Entering the sync word WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 151 GSM Analysis Measurement Functions The analyzer has five GSM measurement functions Table 3 18 GSM measurement functions Measurement type Modulation accuracy Standard GSM 11 20 2 1 6 2 Measurement item Phase error and frequency error Output power Power vs Time Spectrum MOD Spectrum SW GSM 11 20 2 1 6 3 GSM 11 20 2 1 6 4 GSM 11 20 2 1 6 5 1 GSM 11 20 2 1 6 5 2 Mean carrier power Power vs Time ACP for a continuous modulation spectrum ACP for a switching transient spectrum Modulation accuracy The analyzer measures the modulation phase error and mean frequency error according to the GSM 11 20 2 1 6 2 standard The measurement and test is performed for the center 147 bits of each burst The test passes if the following co
307. r Manual CDMA Analysis A signal that a mobile station transmits to the base station can be analyzed for the measurement parameters defined in the IS 95 and T 53 standards The analysis items are listed in Table 3 14 Table 3 14 CDMA analysis items Classification Analysis items Remark Channel analysis In band power 5 MHz span Evaluation of demodulation Burst waveform precision and waveform quality F error EVM and Rho p In band analysis Spurious 30 MHz or 5 MHz Evaluation of spurious 30 kHz and 1 MHz RBW OBW Time characteristic analysis Power Specified Line 1 6 ms wide Evaluation of rising and falling Average power 25 us wide characteristics Rising and falling edges This section describes each type of analysis WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 111 CDMA Analysis Evaluation of Demodulation Precision and Waveform Quality Figure 3 59 shows the result of a channel analysis performed in the four views with the EVM Rho basic configuration View A Active 97 11 18 21 08 59 View C Active CDMA OQPSK Measurement 97 11 18 21 0 Marker 119 661 25MH OdBm Marker 251 9915 1 041 136 117deg Power 10 B RBU 30kHz 1 5 BE 2 917H et 34 2 Center 625 03 MHz View B Active Freqampl 97 11 18 21 08 59 Marke 19 661 25MHz OdBm Oframe Os Os 2 ly Th tl al PF cron a E oe ea k Natl fal at i EIR Figure 3 59 CDMA analysis with the EVM Rho basic configuration 3 112 WCA330 amp WCA380 User
308. r continuous data 1 a A o Fe YS BF 9 Press the CONFIG MODE key Press the More side key Press the cdmaOne Fwd Link side key Press the SETUP FREQ key to set the center frequency Press the SETUP REF key to set the reference level Press the SETUP MAIN key Press the Block Size side key and enter the number of frames The number of frames M must satisfy the following condition to analyze N symbols M gt 0 33XN Press the START STOP BLOCK key to start data acquisition After the data acquisition the first symbol is analyzed Press the VIEW C key 10 Press the Analyze side key to analyze for all frames WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual cdmaOne Analysis Example Figure 3 70 shows an example of continuous symbol analysis In this example the analyzer has captured the phenomenon that the signal power is decreasing gradually using the trigger functions refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for using trigger functions The movement of the marker along the time axis in View B links to the display of code domain power in View A and D So you can observe the time varying signal with consistency between the frequency domain and code domain View E Active Freqampl 99 06 22 15 51 33 View C Active IS 95 EQ Measurement 99 06 22 15 51 Marker 859 975MHz 48 736dBm 9frame 1 44ms Marker O0 004chip 0 118 135 492deg 33 fee Freq Err 54 106Hz frame Origin Offset 36 176daB in dBm 69 27mV Unit Center 860MHz
309. r details View A Active Freqdmpl 97 11 17 20 19 06 Marker 1 899 756 25GHz_ 49 514dBm in dBm The marker moves on the waveform div i l jiri f ul i i F n T A iiia y h nin Mi Allah A hiwi ii FF Li if tht AAR A Aine fal HN sli f f ra itl ha 1a Fa Kris Hh af MH yee A P T M H tet fi i H ME 100 dBm Center 1 899 931 25GHz Span 10MHz View B Active Freqampl 97 11 17 20 19 06 Marker 1 899 756 25GHz 49 385dBm_ 170frame 19 94335 The marker position is c selected in the two dimensional view Figure E 6 Moving the marker and selecting a frame E 8 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix E Mouse Operations Operations with Keyboard The operations with the keypad on the front panel can be done by the keyboard Table E 1 shows the mapping between the keypad and keyboard keys Table E 1 Mapping between keypad and keyboard keys Keypad keys Keyboard keys 0t09 iti s NO CLR ESC BS Back Space ENT ENTER Aan Up and Down arrows respectively Hz ENTER kHz k and ENTER MHz M and ENTER S ENTER ms m and ENTER Us u and ENTER Caution in Turning Off the Power NOTE When using the mouse turn off the analyzer by placing the front panel power switch in the STANDBY position Do not use the Windows 98 shutdown process The analyzer normally controls the power not under the Windows 98 operating system but under the analyzer application software So t
310. r example Select CONFIG MODE More gt CDMA gt Spurious WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Preface Contacting Tektronix Phone 1 800 833 9200 Address Tektronix Inc Department or name if known 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA Web site www tektronix com Sales support 1 800 833 9200 select option 1 Service support 1 800 833 9200 select option 2 Technical support Email support tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 3 1 503 627 2400 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time This phone number is toll free in North America After office hours please leave a voice mail message Outside North America contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor see the Tektronix web site for a list of offices WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual xxi Preface xxii WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Getting Started i o Product Overview WCA330 and WCA380 are wireless communication analyzers equipped with a 3 GHz 8 GHz down converter to analyze Radio Frequency RF signals The newly adopted architecture allows concurrent acquisition of time and frequency domain data and display of measurement results in color The analyzer provides a wide variety of functions such as spectrum power analog and digital modulation and CDMA analyses The instrument is shown in Figure 1 1 RA O B000T lj B0007 hok 7 GOOG 20 0 QOOOWsOO Figure 1
311. ram display area Eye diagram display area Freq 1 5GHz Span 36Hz Ref 0 dBm ECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 20d0B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Dual HW 1024 Blackman 150u 160u 3 Auto On 1 Figure 2 26 Four view display for digital modulation analysis WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial Starting and Stopping Now acquire a signal in the Block mode This mode acquires the data in blocks Measurement before displaying the measurement result Block Mode 1 Press the BLOCK key Note that the Block mode is not yet active because of the current settings The analyzer continues to use the Roll mode to acquire the signal Fig ure 2 27 shows the current view The display in this example contains neither the vector nor the EYE pattern It is because the span is so great 3 GHz that the analyzer cannot capture the digitally modulated signal These views can be obtained by specifying a proper span and center frequency View A Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 11 09 29 View C Active 1 4PI_QPSK Measurement 2000 04 07 11 Config lt Marker OHz 3 825daBm div Diag View B Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 11 09 29 Measurement I Freq 1 5GHz Span 3GHz Ref O0dBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFatt 20d0B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Dual HW 1024 Blackman 160u 160u 3 Auto On 1 Figure 2 27 Measuring the digitally modulated signal Span 3 GHz 2 Stop the Roll mode acquisition WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 27 Tu
312. rame period Seamless acquisition Frame 0 in the Zoom mode Frame 1 Frome i i gt Time Real time acquisition Frame 0 i C Frame 1 1 NW l Frame 2 l i Overlap 50 or more gt Time lt gt lt gt lt gt Frame period Figure 3 13 Seamless acquisition and real time acquisition WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 27 Frame Period and Real Time Real time acquisition Acquires spectrum data continuously gt Frequency Not real time acquisition Discontinuity occurs in spectrum data gt Frequency Figure 3 14 Real time acquisition in the frequency domain NOTE If the span is set to 5 MHz or less in the Baseband or RF WCA330 RF 1 to RF4 WCA380 mode data can be acquired in real time 3 28 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Frame Period and Real Time Table 3 9 Minimum frame period FFT points Span Minimum frame period 256 10 MHz and 6 MHz 2 MHz 20 us 500 kHz 200 kHz 100 kHz 200 us 50 kHz 20 kHz 10 kHz 2ms 5 kHz 1 kHz 20 ms 200 Hz 50 ms 100 Hz 100 ms 1024 10 MHz IF mode Normal 5 MHz HiRes 2 MHz 80 us 100 kHz 6 4ms 200us 10 kHz le4ms o 2ms 1 kHz 640ms J20ms 500 Hz 200 Hz 50 ms 100 Hz 100 ms 1024 30 MHz 25 us IF mode Wide 20 MHz 25 uS 10 MHz 50 us WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 29 Frame Period and Real Time 3 30 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual a Displayi
313. re 2 12 Examples of top menu item display 2 14 Figure 2 13 Examples of lower menu item display 2 15 Figure 2 14 Menu items requiring selection or numeric input 2 16 Figure 2 15 Drop down list for selecting an item 2 16 Figure 2 16 Side menu item for numeric setting 2 17 Figure 2 17 Step Keys esc siciie dees does ee tebe ete eee ea ee 2 18 Figure 2 18 Increment display 0 cece cece ere eeeee 2 18 Figure 2 19 Cable connection 0 c ccc c eee eee eens 2 20 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 3 GHz Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 2 33 Powerswiteh 6556 s 00e e 4 0 0is ere erdsate rs saai e wie Gard ees Initial screen CONFIG MODE key and the menu Control of the start and stop of measurement Spectrum measurement with a span of 3 GHz Status display area Four view display for digital modulation analysis Measuring the digitally modulated signal Span SETUP FREQ key location Freq side menu item available for numeric input Numeric input keypad Span side menu item available for numeric input Setup display areas Views resulting from changes to the frequency and Spar SCENES ss bch ebb dee dere cle es Neen EEOSE EEEE eee NE Ee eS Figure 2 34
314. re saved in the system file init cfg To display this menu press CONFIG MODE front panel Config lt top side key Load From Reset the analyzer to the power on settings INIT CFG NOTE The settings on the Remote Util 8 will not be changed Save To Saves the current settings to the system file init cfg INIT CFG Return To Return the power on settings to the factory default Default Mode The CONFIG MODE menu allows you to set up signal process and display systems using basic patterns The analyzer has predefined basic setting patterns used frequently Their icons are displayed in the side keys NOTE The frequency and the span for the basic setting pattern default to 1 5 GHz and 3 GHz respectively After making a basic setting set the span to a proper value For the default values of the basic setting patterns refer to Appendix C Load CFG Loads the instrument settings from a file and configures the analyzer Save CFG Saves the current settings in a specified file If you save the setting patterns frequently used in a file you can load them to set up the analyzer when necessary Configures the analyzer for observing spectra Spectrum Configures the analyzer for observing spectra and spectrograms Spectrogram Configures the analyzer for the dual frequency and time mode For the dual mode refer to Memory Mode on page 3 5 Zoom Configures the analyzer for the zoom mode For the zoom mode refer to Memory Mode on
315. reate or delete a directory Operation Figure 3 95 File operation menu WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 179 File Operations Selecting a Drive 1 Press the Drive side key It allows you to select a drive in the drive selection field 2 Select a drive using the general purpose knob or the amp or key in the ENTRY keypad Changing a Directory 1 If necessary select a drive Refer to Selecting a Drive on page 3 180 2 Press the Dir side key It allows you to select a directory from the directory listing 3 Select a directory using the general purpose knob or the amp or W key on the ENTRY keypad 4 Press the Expand Dir side key to list the directories under the selected directory 5 If the directory hierarchy is deep repeat steps 2 through 4 Selecting a File 1 If necessary change the directory Refer to Changing a Directory described above 2 Press the File side key It allows you to select a file from the file listing 3 Select a file using the general purpose knob or the amp or W key on the ENTRY keypad The file name you selected is shown in the file name field Saving a File Rewriting an existing file 1 Select a file using the procedure in Selecting a File described above 2 Press the OK side key Creating a new file 1 Press the Name Entry key The submenu appears 2 Enter the file name For detail refer to Inputting a Directory or File Name on page 3 183 3 Pr
316. red correctly RF Overload RF Check that overload is indicated correctly RF Freq Shift Keii Check that frequencies are measured correctly RF T Domain WCA380 Check that data is continuous in the time domain RF F Domain Check that there is no abnormal spurious This subsection explains how to run the diagnostic program You will need a 50 Q BNC N coaxial cable for this test 1 Power on the analyzer 2 Connect the BNC N coaxial cable to the 10 MHz REF OUT BNC type connector on the rear panel and the RF INPUT N type connector on the front panel 3 Press the MODE key in the front panel CONFIG area See Figure 1 13 on page 1 22 4 Press the More side key twice 5 Press the Diag side key 6 Press the C key in the front panel VIEW area WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Calibration and Diagnostics 1 24 Press the Mode side key to select an execution mode Interactive Press the Execute All side key or the side key that corre sponds to each test item to perform a test once Continuous Press the Execute All side key or the side key that corre sponds to each test item to perform a test repeatedly To stop testing press the CLEAR key StopOnFail Press the Execute All side key or the side key that corre sponds to each test item to perform a test until an error occurs To stop testing press the CLEAR key Press the Execute All side key to perform a test on every item Press the side key tha
317. red position Point A Y yo Point A Point B WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Marker Operations and Peak Search 5 Press the Toggle Delta side key 6 The O and markers switch position ry a N WS Y Point A Point B Move the O marker to the desired position Point B The marker remains Delta marker read out Delta 18 2kHz 0 8dBm 7 Read the marker read out WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual N Vy i wal H P oint A Point B The marker is positioned at Point A and the marker at Point B 3 49 Marker Operations and Peak Search 3 50 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Zoom Zoom enables you to observe details of a spectrum around a selected frequency by enlarging the acquired spectrum waveform in the specified span This section discusses the following topics m Zoom process m Zoom range m Zoom operation WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 51 Zoom Zoom Process 3 52 The zooming function regenerates the frequency domain data with a new frequency from the time domain data acquired in the Zoom mode For example suppose that a signal was observed with a center frequency of 5 MHz
318. repeats to measure for each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D View C called GSMMask view shows the Pass Fail test with the specified mask in the GSM standard For details on the GSMMask view menu refer to page 2 111 3 Press the ROLL or BLOCK key to stop the acquisition 4 Press the Analyze side key to analyze the data acquired on the memory The analyzer repeats to measure for each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D showing the burst number on View D If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 5 Press the Burst No side key and select a burst number View A to D show the measurement result for the specified burst GSMPolar view GSMMask view View A Active GMSK Measurement 9 21 00 1 48 27 PM View C D1 View D Marker 0 036Sym 1 42 914deq 1 37 5us 59 432dBm e tine 2S Freq Err 29 621Hz Origin Offset 50 997d0B Measurement PovervsTime 4 Specified mask in GSM 1 5 2 162 693mV Unit View B Active Freqampl 9 21 00 1 48 27 PM View D cs FANFA Versus Time Ea 935MHz 100 556dBm 174frame 5 230 48s Mod Accuracy OutputPower ani gt frame Carrier Power 6dBm o dBm E Measurement result Mean carrier power Spectrogram view GSM view Figure 3 84 Power vs Time measurement WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 157 GSM Analysis Spectrum MOD 1 Select Spectrum MOD with the Measurement s
319. req Span Ref side key b Press the Standard side key to select IS 95 or T53 c Press the Channel side key to select or type the channel number For IS 95 you can select 1 to 777 for the channel number Channels 1 and 777 correspond to 825 03 and 848 31 MHz respectively The difference in frequency between channels is 0 03 MHz For T 53 you can select 1 to 1199 for the channel number Channels 1 and 7 correspond to 915 0125 and 888 9875 MHz respectively The frequency difference between two adjacent channels is 0 0125 MHz d Press the Setup lt side key top side key to return to the previous menu level Select the combination of span and trigger Press the side key 30M Span 5M Span Auto Trig or 5M Span Normal Trig Select 30M Span when observing spurious signals in a wide range The Auto trigger setting is selected automatically The Block mode is not available to acquire a signal in this setting m For SMHz span the Block mode is available For a continuous input signal select 5M Span Auto Trig For a burst input signal select 5M Span Normal Trig When the 5M Span Normal Trig is selected the measurement may not be performed because a trigger event can not be generated If you do not know whether a continuous or burst signal is input select 5M Span Auto Trig first If the display is unstable select 5M Span Normal Trig because it is likely a burst signal Perform the measurement by pressing the ROLL key if
320. ression Same as Compression in the Waveform view menu on page 2 63 Ver Start Sets the start value of the vertical axis i e frame number By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written Options Hold Height Determines whether to retain or reset the Height Scale setting when changing Source Scal On Retains the Height Scale setting Resets the Height Scale setting to full scale Scale Marker Scale Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Scale Sets the start value of the vertical axis frame number Input the number of frames to be displayed Ver Start eli as Ver Start described above on the top menu evel Height Scale Sets the vertical axis scale in dB for Height described below on the top menu level Height Start Sets the start value in dBm for Height described below on the top menu level Full Scale Sets the vertical axis to the default full scale This menu item is available when Format is FreqAmpl FreqPhase TimeAmpl or TimePhase Auto Scale Automatically sets the start value and scale of the horizontal and vertical axes so that the entire waveform can be displayed This menu item is available when Format is Freql FreqQ Timel or TimeQ Marker Operates the marker and the delta marker Same as Marker in the Spectrogram view on page 2 73
321. rker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Mkr gt Freq Sets the center frequency to the value at the current marker position This item is available when Format is FreqAmpl When you press this side key the Freq Span Ref Freq setting changes to the frequency in the current marker position ai On 0 gt 0 gt 0 gt Time Off gt Time 100 us 50 us 0 Example Figure 2 46 Frame Relative On and Off Example Separation 10 10 Two peaks can be detected Two peaks can not be detected Full scale 100 Figure 2 47 Separation setting 2 68 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Analog View Menu Table 2 8 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as Analog in the CONFIG VIEW menu Refer to Analyzing an Analog Modulated Signal on page 3 95 Table 2 8 Analog view menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Source Selects input data for a view You can select one of the following items Specifies no input source The display area in the view is empty Active Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Zoom Specifies the zoomed data for an input source When you use the Zoom mode select this For zoom refer to Input and Memory Modes on page 3 1 and Zoom on page 3 51 D1D2 to D7D8 Specifies a register pair for an input so
322. rload oie 4 05 ssshtthy gas hatte aceite beset Re heck ee dees tenes a FFT Parameters 0 ssscesosrsnrrenrss everene seve eiees FEE TY Pe nenoaia n e Galas E aig de oy FFI POMS enrndnneninsnr r ere ni e E E E teeny FFT Window 0 0 cc ccc cee Ee n EE E Sete FET Parameters oc 6 wie ee chnale rie t A ET oe Acquiring Data cece eee cee cece eee Roll Mode and Block Mode 0 0 0005 Setting the Block Size 0 2 2 eee eee eee Starting Stopping Data Acquisition 4 Frame Period and Real Time Setting a Frame Period i e ee ee eee dee pee ees Frame Period and Seamless Acquisition Real Time Acquisition 20 0 0 c ee eee eee eee Displaying Waveform Data 000 SEMIN VIEWS lt i oer Pet eee ee Os bs ed owen Se SUNS SCAIES Kyi he Pesta e a Glee Reh pees eae eS Changing Display Frames 0 0 0005 Relation among Frame Bin and Pixel Marker Operations and Peak Search Type Marke sce vices goed ene eee eee amen EE ERRES Moving the Primary Marker 0 000 e ee eee Operating the Delta Marker 0000 LOOMI sea hoaa Sexe a 2 E Sno eens Ge IE EE eee ZOOM Process vite eis Ae Rado BRR REG TERA ZOOM Range nce gait tgs dekh Deena teed e ERA Zoom Operation 335 393 2 boc baht eee teh Sa eOR SER SS Average and Peak Hold ceceeeeeeee A
323. rocedure Follow this procedure to output the text data to the clipboard or a file 1 Display the waveform in the view Refer to Restrictions on page 3 206 2 If necessary change the display frame 3 Do either step using the view menu To output the data to the clipboard Press the side key Options Copy To Clipboard To output the data to a file Press the side key Options Copy To Text File For details on the file access menu operations refer to page 3 178 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 207 Outputting Waveform Data Using the Text Datainan Perform the following procedure to use the text data of the spectrum in an Application Software application software such as Scratch Pad or Microsoft Excel You can use a similar procedure for other applications 1 Copy the text data to the clipboard with the procedure described just above 2 Start the application 3 Select Paste from the Edit menu or press the Ctrl and V keys together on the keyboard The contents of the clipboard are pasted 4 When you save the file select Save As from the File menu Input the file name and then click on OK Figure 3 107 shows a graph created in Microsoft Excel using the text data of the spectrum Berra MOB iom ae DS ESAS SBA O c Helvetia ly BLU SSSR O WR SE 10 1942 7 81E 08 15 5797 1 56E 07 15 9941 2 34E 07 _ 15 5558 3 13E 07 15 978 3 91E 07 157084 141 281 421 561 701 841
324. s You can store two different domain patterns in different areas of a single trigger register When the trigger register contains both the frequency and the time domain mask patterns and you attempt to cause the trigger in the frequency domain only the frequency domain pattern in the trigger register will be used If you attempt to cause the trigger in the time domain in the same condition only the time domain pattern will be used m Before you can acquire data using the mask pattern that you have created make sure that the trigger source span and FFT windows are set as follows Trigger source Internal SETUP MAIN gt Trigger Source Internal Span lt 5 MHz SETUP SPAN gt lt 5 MHz FFT window Blackman Harris SETUP MAIN gt Memory Mode Input FFT FFT Window Blackman When you use a mask pattern for triggering the trigger mode is set to Normal automatically 3 76 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern Example of Creating a Mask Pattern Use the edit marker to create a mask pattern You can operate the edit marker almost in the same manner as the delta marker The difference is that you can also move it vertically i WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Acquire a waveform with appropriate frequency span and reference level settings before creating a mask pattern If you desire switch the background color of the screen to white Press CONFIG VIEW gt Options
325. s mechanism Digital data RF data gt Measurement Demodulating Modulating gt Reference filter mechanism mechanism filter Analysis information Measurement data Reference data D5D6 register pair D7D8 register pair The measurement data and the reference data are stored in the registers called register pairs D1D2 D3 D4 D5D6 and D7D8 By default the measurement data is stored in the D5D6 register pair and the reference data in D7D8 Select and input either Measurement or Reference data Measurement data Reference data Polar view Comparison Vector constellation display Error vector analysis and display EVM view EyeDiagram view EYE diagram display SymbolTable view Symbol table display Figure 3 52 Digital modulation signal flow WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 99 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Setting 3 100 Select the Dual or Zoom memory mode to provide the time domain data required to analyze a digitally modulated signal When you display the EyeDiagram SymbolTable or EVM view be sure to display the Polar or CDMAPolar view also 1 Press CONFIG MODE gt More twice gt Digital Demod to configure the analyzer for analyzing the digitally modulated signal 2 Select the view In step 1 above the Waveform Spectrogram Polar and EyeDiagram views are set by defa
326. s on the right of the front panel are called side keys The menu display area can display up to eight menu items The function of each side key varies depending on the menu item displayed Refer to page 2 11 for operating menus Refer to page 2 47 for menu item details Measured data display area Displays waveforms measurement results The display window is called view You can set up the views with menus Refer to page 2 6 for general display information displayed in the views Refer to page 2 63 and below for the view menus Refer to page 3 31 for setting up the view When you select the menu item specifying file save or load this area displays the dialog box allowing file access Refer to page 3 178 for file access Figure 2 4 Display screen configuration WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Setup status display area Displays the setting status and the SETUP menu settings Refer to page 2 9 for details about the information displayed Refer to page 2 54 for the SETUP menu information 2 5 Interface Maps General Display Information in a View The display information depends on the view and the display format selected This section details the general information that is displayed in all the views Displays the view name source and format settings Displays the current date and the time of day on a 24 hour basis Refer to page 2 63 and below
327. search operation 3 45 Phase error EVM view 3 107 Phone number Tektronix xxi Physical Characteristics B 12 Pixel relation among frame bin and pixel 3 41 Polar view menu table 2 76 Position trigger 3 74 Power power measurement 3 84 Power cord WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Index connection 1 10 option A 1 Power measurement 3 8 1 ACP 3 86 C N 3 85 C No 3 85 noise 3 83 OBW 3 88 power 3 84 Power off installation 1 16 Power on 1 9 procedure 1 11 scan disk 1 17 Power switch front panel 2 2 turning on 1 12 Principal power switch rear panel 2 4 turning on 1 12 PRINT key front panel 2 3 Print menu table 2 120 Printer connection 3 202 installing a driver 3 203 outputting data 3 202 Process flow digital modulation signal 3 98 Product support contact information xxi Q Quick trigger mode 3 68 Quick interval trigger mode 3 69 R Rackmount Options A 1 Range zoom 3 53 Real time description 3 25 Rear panel AC inlet 2 4 clock in out connectors 2 4 exhaust fan 2 4 expansion slot 2 4 GPIB connector 2 4 T Q input connectors 2 4 keyboard interface connector 2 4 LAN interface connector 2 4 mouse interface connector 2 4 parallel port 2 4 principal power switch 2 4 VGA output port 2 4 Reference level description 3 13 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual REMOTE status display
328. see aia a can aeaaed B 10 Marker csrenrss erstere eae Ss ees 08 se eee eee S B 10 Power requirements ccccecccceccceeces B 11 Table B 19 Physical sssssssssesesesesesesesesesesoeo B 12 Table B 20 Environmental ssssssssssesesesesesesesoeo B 12 Table B 21 Certifications and compliances 0 eee00 B 13 Table C 1 Default settings for the Standard configuration C 1 Table C 2 Default settings for the CDMA configuration C 4 Table C 3 Default settings for the 3GPP configuration C 6 Table D 1 Frequency and time resolution IF mode Normal ROS 5 6 seaee 59 6 ded e s ana tene tie E EEES EEEREN Hanes wae D 1 Table D 2 Frequency and time resolution IF mode Wide 1 D 2 Table E 1 Mapping between keypad and keyboard keys E 9 Table F 1 External inspection check list 0c eee eee F 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual eee SSE General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and Personal Injury certified for the country of use Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electri
329. set Delta Mkr gt Freg F g Freq 800MHz Span 100kHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 200B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Zoom HW 1024 Blackman 6 4m 6 4m 200 Auto On 1 Figure 2 43 Moving the markers by peak search WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 43 Tutorial Searching for the Peak For example we measure the interval between the peak spectrum with the maximum power and the adjacent peak to its right 2 Position the marker at the maximum peak spectrum m Press the VIEW SRCH key The marker O is positioned at the maximum peak spectrum as shown in Figure 2 43 Operating the Delta Position the delta markers for a measurement Markers 3 Operate the delta markers a Press the VIEW MKR key b Press the Delta Marker side key and select On The delta markers O and turn on 2 44 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial 4 Measure the frequency interval between two peaks By rotating the general purpose knob move the O marker to the adjacent right peak At the top left corner the view shows the differences in frequency and power resulting from the delta marker measurement See Figure 2 44 Result of delta marker measurement TRONI VERDAD TRIGGERED PAUSE View C Zoom Freq rm 4 04 07 11 14 59 View C lt Max Separation Trace Tracel Trace2 Delta Marker oft On Reset Delta Mkr gt Freq 3 Span 100kHz Ref
330. sis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Symbol Table Display The SymbolTable view inputs the signal processed in the Polar view and displays the demodulated digital data in a bit string form The bit strings can be represented in binary octal or hexadecimal notation Select one of them with Radix in the SymbolTable view menu For the BPSK QPSK 8 PSK or QAM modulating system the start position of digits is merely a relative position of symbols so you can change it with Rotate in the Symbol Table view menu Figure 3 55 shows an example of a bit pattern symbol table obtained by demodulating the 1 4 n QPSK modulated signal The SymbolTable view can display the ideal signal as well as the measurement data Select Display gt Measurement measurement data or Reference ideal signal in the SymbolTable view menu Figure 3 55 Symbol table display example WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 105 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Error Vector Analysis Display The EVM view inputs both the measurement signal and ideal signal which has been processed in the Polar view to display the difference as error magnitude With the EVM view you can obtain the error quantitatively at each data point The EVM view is shown with time along the horizontal axis and error magnitude along the vertical axis The red points represent the symbol positions of the measurement signal and the green traces represent the differences b
331. sktop screen or execute a Windows 98 application program if necessary You can operate the analyzer only with a mouse For detail refer to Appendix E Attaching a Mouse and a Keyboard You must attach a mouse and a keyboard to the analyzer before you can access Windows 98 CAUTION Be sure that the power is off before you attach a mouse or a keyboard When power is on you must place the power switch on the front panel in the off position and wait for power down Figure 3 100 shows the locations of connectors on the rear panel The connec tors for a PS 2 mouse and a keyboard are located on the second slot from the right AIA 60 ooj rr Keyboard connector m Mouse connector Sap S09 oo k Figure 3 100 Mouse and keyboard connectors Attach a mouse and a keyboard to connectors WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 195 Using Windows 98 Instead of using numerical keys on the front panel of the analyzer use the keyboard to select items or enter values Table 3 24 shows the valid keys Table 3 24 Functions available with a keyboard Key Descriptions Numeric keys Numeric input Inputs numbers in a numeric field Arrow keys Moving the caret Moves the caret within a numeric field Selecting an item Upper or left arrow allows you to select the menu item placed just above the currently selected item
332. splay either measurement data or a reference signal which has been demodulated and modulated in this view Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Measurement Selects the measurement data for display Reference Selects the reference data for display Format Selects the display format Vector Displays a data in vector format that represents symbol to symbol movements using a vector Constellation Displays data in constellation format that represents only symbols Marker Inputs the time to move the O marker Measurement Selects the register pair used to write the data resulting after the signal passes through the Destination Measurement filter See Reference Destination just below for the selections Reference Selects the register pair used to write the data resulting after the signal passes through the Destination Measurement filter demodulating mechanism and Reference filter Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail None Specifies no output source D1D2 D7D8 Specify a register pair for the output source Use default settings when possible A pair of data registers D1 to D8 is called a register pair The possible combinations are D1D2 D3D4 D5D6 and D7D8 They are mainly used to write the and Q component data of a digitally modulated signal NOTE For register pairs two of the D1 to D8 data registers are combined for use For example if the D1D2 register pair is used for o
333. ssing the associated side key Setup Io Name of the menu in display Input FFT Currently selected submenu Pressing a side key with this label returns to the side menu that was displayed before Cancel Figure 2 12 Examples of top menu item display The second through eighth menu items in the displayed menu are used to set or select a menu item or to move to a submenu Figure 2 13 shows many of the menu items WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Operations NOTE If a setting for a menu item is not allowed or is disabled its label remains gray Mecer Frame Period s EEREEEEL Max Span Load CFG o If the label is followed by you can move to the lower level submenu by pressing the associated side key The parameter or option values are displayed together with the menu item label You can press the associated side key to select an option or to input a value See page 2 16 for how to select an item or to input a value When you press the associated side key the function indicated with the label runs In this example the maximum span is set in the Span menu item When you press the associated side key the File Access menu appears You can save or load a file through this menu Toggle menu items switch between the two displayed options when you press the associated side key Menu items
334. t corresponds to each test item to perform a test once Refer to Table 1 1 on Page1l 23 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Calibration and Diagnostics The execution results of the diagnostic program are displayed in the VIEW C upper right window The numbers of passes and fails are displayed for each test item Passed items are shown with a green background and failed items are shown with a red background See Figure 1 14 UHCAL OVERLOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE View A Di 4 12 00 10 03 47 PM View C Marker OHz 83 521dBm Memory Level Overload Freq Shift O RF FREQ DOMAIN TEST o 4 12 00 10 03 48 PM 37 5kHz 68 35dB 4 12 00 10 03 49 PM Mode F Domain RF Level RF Overload RF Freq Shift RF T Domain RF F Domain PREP PPP Ree co00000000 Execute All l arnih RATT A View B Active Freq mpl 4 12 00 10 03 49 PM Marker OHz 80 101dBm Overload aT rat Na yj an agen hy vedere Center 10MHz Freq 1 5GHz Span 5MHz Ref OdBm VECTOR SEAMLESS RFAtt 200B Mixer 25dBm RF1 Normal AC Freq HW 1024 Blackman 80u 160u 200 Auto On 1 Figure 1 14 Execution results of diagnostic routines View C Characteristics Check The electrical characteristics listed in Appendix B Specifications can be checked only by our service personnel If you need a characteristics check contact your local Tektronix representative WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 1 25 Calibration and Diagnostics 1 26 WC
335. t to External the rising edge of an external input signal generates a trigger You cannot select the trigger slope Setting Press SETUP MAIN gt Trigger Slope and select Rise or Fall WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 73 Trigger Trigger Position The position specifies what percentage of all the frames in one block the acquired frames must account for when a trigger occurs Setting m Press SETUP MAIN gt Trigger gt Pos and set the trigger position in All the frames contained in one block are equivalent to 100 The default is 50 How to acquire data depends on the trigger mode see Figure 3 40 Time gt lt 1 block g Normal mode Other than Timeout and Delayed Position setting Trigger Acquisition completed i 1 block gt Timeout mode lt Position setting gt Timeout Acquisition completed i 1 block gt Delayed mode ii Position is always 100 Delayed time elapsed Figure 3 40 Trigger position and data acquisition 3 74 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual EEE EEE SSS Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern The trigger mask pattern is a two dimensional mask pattern for triggering For a frequency domain signal this pattern is used to cause a trigger event with the frequency and amplitude level For a time domain signal it is used to cause the trigger e
336. ta on page 3 162 NOTE If the input signal is nonstandard measurement results are not displayed on the screen waveforms may be displayed if triggered 3 154 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual GSM Analysis Modulation Accuracy 1 Select Mod Accuracy default with the Measurement side key in the GSM Measurement view menu Refer to Selecting the GSM Measurement on page 3 154 2 Press the Measure side key to start acquiring data The analyzer repeats to measure for each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D 3 Press the ROLL or BLOCK key to stop the acquisition 4 Press the Analyze side key to analyze the data acquired on the memory The analyzer repeats to measure for each burst and display the result and waveform on View A to D showing the burst number on View D If you want to quit press the ROLL or BLOCK key 5 Press the Burst No side key and select a burst number View A to D show the measurement result for the specified burst GSMPolar view View A Active GMSK Measurement 9 21 00 1 48 27 PM Marker 0 032Sym 0 999 45 819deq View C PhaseError Marker Osym Odeg Sloe Scale 162 645mi Unit 1 914 View B Measurement Marker Osym 0 O ffo011000 01011110 11011001 10100001 11011110 40 00011111 11110000 01111001 00101110 00010001 Freq Error 01110110 10001111 00111110 0000 Error RMS SymbolTable view Figure 3 82 Modulation a
337. ta register can be displayed separately through a view or displayed together with the contents of the original data memory or file before averaging Data memory Frequency domain data Data register D1 D2 File gt Averaging function gt D3 D8 Figure 3 30 Process of the utility average WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Display gt Display 3 59 Average and Peak Hold Averaging Mode 3 60 The analyzer has three averaging modes Peak Hold Displays only the maximum value X P n X P n for n 1 X P n MAx X P 9 1 X P a for n 2 RMS Root mean square X P n X P n for n 1 X P n da ia AP ns X P n for 2 n lt NumAverage X P n X P Numaverage for n gt NumAverage The view average function processes n frames You can set the number of frames for averaging with the Num Averages menu item The utility average function processes the frames specified with the Begin Frame End Frame or All Frames menu item RMSExpo Exponential root mean square X P n X P n for n 1 X P n n 1 x ADs X P n for 2 S n S NumAverage _ NumAverage 1 X X pP n X P n X P n NumAverage for n gt NumAverage Where X p Display data for the nth frame x P n Active data for the nt frame P Frame point NumAverage Weighting factor Continuous averaging weights older sweeps so that they have a progressively smaller effe
338. tails Displaying Menus A menu is always displayed at the right border of the display screen You can display any one of the three menus by pressing keys on the control panel see Figure 2 8 CONFIG menu selects the predefined settings and configures the analyzer m SETUP menu sets frequency span reference level and other parameters m VIEW menu controls waveform display and marker operation WIRELESS WCA380 conmincanon DCTO8 GHz ash c START STOP PRINT ROLL BLOCK Eo Ca SETUP gt k C menu keys men Menu display area lt gt Side keys control keys CONFIG me _ menu keys mur k J Figure 2 8 Menu display area and keys WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 11 Menu Operations CONFIG SETUP Figure 2 9 shows the CONFIG menu keys When you press any of these keys the submenu associated with the key is displayed These four keys are shortcut keys to the submenus You can return to the top level of the CONFIG menu by pressing the top side key Refer to CONFIG Menu on page 2 48 for the menu details CONFIG MODE lt Used to display the MODE submenu SETUP lt Used to display the SETUP submenu VIEW lt Used to display the VIEW submenu UTILITY lt
339. tained by multiplying UnitPeriod described below by the difference of ticks of each frame refer to page 3 191 UnitPeriod Shows the unit time of time stamp ticks of each frame refer to page 3 191 FrameLength This shows the time necessary to acquire one frame DateTime Shows the time when the analyzer acquired the last frame in a data block It is recommended to change to space Files may have many characters GainOffset Shows the gain offset It is used for calculating the amplitude refer to page 3 193 MultiFrames Shows the number of scans for creating one frame in the multi frame mode For example when MultiFrames 20 scanning 20 times with the span of 5 MHz make the span of 100 MHz MultiAddr Shows the last frame address in the multi frame mode The range is 0 to MultiFrames 1 MultiFrames 1 indicates that the data ends just at the end of scans 3 188 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations Data Block Each data block contains frame header and frame data pairs The number of frames in a block is indicated by ValidFrames refer to page 3 188 The frame order is determined by FrameReverse refer to page 3 186 Frame header Frame data Frame header Frame data S The number of ValidFrames Frame header Frame data Frame header Frame data Figure 3 99 Data block structure Frame Header The frame header is def
340. tandard and the 3gppPolar view for the 3GPP standard EYE diagram display in the EyeDiagram view Symbol table display in the SymbolTable view Error vector analysis display in the EVM view 3 97 Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Process Flow Figure 3 52 outlines the digitally modulated signal process taking place in the Polar view The Polar view is capable of demodulating and modulating digitally modulated signals Inputting the data obtained with the Polar view allows the EYE diagram display to be in the EyeDiagram view symbol display to be in the SymbolTable view and error vector analysis display to be in EVM view So the Polar view must always be kept in display in order to use these three views Supported Modulation Systems 3 98 The standard modulation systems are supported for the Polar view For non stan dard cases you can specify the modulating system symbol rate filter and o BT Table 3 13 Modulating systems Modulation system Symbol rate NADC 24 3 kHz PDC 21 kHz PHS 192 kHz TETRA 18 kHz GSM 270 833 kHz CDPD 19 2 kHz IS 95 T 53 1 CDMA_OQPSK 1 2288 MHz Filter RootRaisedCosine RootRaisedCosine RootRaisedCosine RootRaisedCosine None None RootRaisedCosine a BT 0 35 0 5 0 5 0 35 0 3 0 5 0 2 1 95 and T 53 can be set in the CDMAPolar view WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal Polar view proces
341. ter Plug the printer cable into the rear panel parallel port CAUTION Be sure that power is off before you connect a cable When power is on you must place the power switch on the front panel in the off position and wait for power down 3 202 Parallel port O o o0oo00000000000000 o0000 OOOCOCOCO00O000O0 O0C000 ON COOOVDO0O0000N0 a o0000 oo0oo0o000000000000 80 OOOOO 0000000000000 o3 OO000 OFF oo00000000000000 80 O00000 000000000000000 oo OO000 oo00000000000000 soq O00000 000000000000000 an OO000 oo00000000000000 eol O00 oo0o0000000000000 o o O00000 oo0o0000000000000 2 oo0o000 fo oo00000000000000 OO0000 oo0oo0oo000000000000 oo0oo000 mi m m Figure 3 104 Parallel port location rear panel mie If you have connected the analyzer to LAN you can also use any printer on the network WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Outputting Waveform Data Installing the Printer Driver Install the printer driver according to the Windows 98 printer wizard You need a mouse to install the driver For connecting the mouse refer to page 3 195 NOTE For the optional HP970Cxi printer the printer driver is factory installed 1 Move the mouse pointer to the bottom on the screen The Windows 98 task bar appears 2 Open Start Settings Printer gt Add Printer The dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 105 3 Install the printer driver foll
342. terfall 2 Redefine View D a Press the View D side key A drop down listing appears to select the desired item see Figure 2 35 View D _ Indicates that the menu item is currently selected v and the general purpose knob and the amp and W keys of the numeric key pad are available Waterfall d E Indicates that the drop down listing is currently in display Spectrogram Waterfall CDMAWaveform CDMAPolar lt Drop down listing CDMATime Select the item using the general purpose knob or Polar the A and keys of the numeric key pad EyeDiagram SymbolTable w Figure 2 35 Selecting the Waterfall view b Select Waterfall from the drop down listing by turning the general purpose knob c Press the View D side key again to enable the view settings Figure 2 36 shows an example of the views with the new settings 2 34 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial URCAT TOAD TRIGGERED PAUSE View A Active Freq mpl 2000 04 07 11 10 View C Active 1 4PI_ QPSK Measurement 2000 04 07 11 Config lt Marker OHz 95 159dBm Marker 0 0265ym 1 029 0O 521ideg Action Assign Show div s View A Waveform View B cale Spectrogram Center 800MHz 1 914 View B Active Freqimpl 2000 04 07 11 View D Active Freqampl 2000 04 07 11 10 49 Marker OHz 95 159dBm Oframe 0s Marker OHz 95 159dBm Oframe
343. that is not allowed it is buffered but not set in the hardware If you change another parameter and the combination is permitted the buffered value takes effect and is reflected to the hardware This buffering is made in frequency span and frame period settings WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 11 Frequency and Span Span and frequency settings must fit within the Set frequency maximum allowable span setting N Maximum allowable span a aa T T A i A setting for the analyzer lt gt Set span The frequency and span cannot be set as shown Set frequenc in these two illustrations a ney HOH egen ae lt gt Set span Set frequency Lagan NH lt gt Set span Figure 3 4 Relationship between the frequency and span settings 3 12 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Cans Reference Level The reference level setting depends on the input signal level The reference level defaults to 0 dBm If the input signal level goes too high or the reference level setting is too low an input overload may occur Setting the Reference Level Set a reference level with the SETUP keys on the front panel There are two ways to set it see Figure 3 5 m Press SETUP MAIN gt Freq Span Ref Ref and enter the value using the general purpose knob or keypad m Press SETUP REF and enter the value using the general purpose knob or
344. the analyzer and its frequency offset This setting is required for example when a down converter is connected externally This does not affect the frequency internally processed by the analyzer Usually set this value to zero The reference level displayed on the screen is the sum of the reference level actually processed by the analyzer and its offset This setting is required for example when an attenuator is connected externally This does not affect the reference level internally processed by the analyzer Usually set this value to zero Selects a reference clock External When you want the analyzer to operate on the same clock as other devices use the 10 MHz sine wave between 10 dBm and 6 dBm input through the 10 MHz REF INPUT connector on the rear panel intemal The internal reference clock for the analyzer 10 MHz sine wave is used WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Waveform View Menu Table 2 7 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as Waveform in the CONFIG VIEW menu Table 2 7 Waveform view menu table Top level Source Compression Subordinate level options and descriptions Selects input data for a view You can select one of the following items None Specifies no input source The display area in the view is empty Active Specifies the data memory storing acquired data for the input source Zoom Specifies the zoomed data for an input source When you use the
345. the constellation for all the signals WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 97 Menu Functions Table 2 23 CodeWPolar view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Options Time Slot Sets the number of the time slot displayed when Symbol Constellation is On The range is 0 to the number of time slots 1 Short Code Sets the number of the short code displayed when Symbol Constellation is On The range is 0 to 255 Display The polar view can display either measurement data or a reference signal which has been demodulated and modulated in this view Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Measure Selects the measurement data for display Reference Selects the reference data for display Format Selects the display format Vector Displays a data in vector format that represents chip to chip movements using a vector Constellation Displays data in constellation format that represents only chips Marker Inputs the time to move the O marker Hide LMS Part Determines whether to hide or not the LMS in the last part of the data On hides the LMS part i e does not display the part Analyze Performs the measurement for all time slots on the data memory 2 98 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions CodeWPower View Menu Table 2 24 summarizes the view menu when you have defined the view as CodeWPower in the CONFIG VIEW menu According to the W CDMA stan
346. the data registers of D1 to D8 for an input source Copy data to this register using Options Copy To in other view menus or Util C Average on a utility menu NOTE The display data is always written into the D5 register If you want to write another data use a register other than D5 Select on or off for a receive filter The receive filter is a route Nyquist filter to extract the channels stipulated by the 3GPP standard The filter related parameters can be changed with Options Scale Marker Search Marker ACP described below Sets up Average parameters Same as Average in the Waveform view menu on page 2 64 Simulates Resolution Bandwidth RBW for compatibility with data measured by a conventional scanning RF spectrum analyzer Same as RBW in the Waveform view menu on page 2 65 Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Same as Display Lines in the Waveform view menu on page 2 65 Copy To Copies the waveform currently being displayed to one of the destinations Same as Copy To in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Copy From Loads text data from the file to which the waveform was copied using Copy To Hold Ver Scale Specifies whether you retain or reset the scale setting of the vertical axis when you change the input source Same as Hold Ver Scale in the Waveform view menu on page 2 66 Scale Marker Sets up scale marker and search related paramet
347. the flatness correction and filtering Establish the synchronization as QPSK and correct the frequency and phase Establish the long code using pilot channels Perform Fast Hadamard Transformation Calculate the symbol power for all channels Create the reference waveform WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual cdmaOne Analysis Operating Examples This section shows two typical operation examples standard code domain power measurement and code domain power measurement for continuous symbols Standard Code Domain The following is the basic procedure for standard code domain power measure Power Measurement ment 1 2 Press the CONFIG MODE key Press the More side key Press the cdmaOne Fwd Link side key The default views are displayed as follows see Figure 3 67 to 3 69 View A Spectrum Waveform view View B Code domain power spectrogram CodeSpectrogram view View C Vector diagram CodePolar view View D Code domain power CodePower view Press the SETUP FREQ key to set the center frequency Press the SETUP REF key to set the reference level Press the START STOP ROLL key to start data acquisition When the input level is too high the OVERLOAD indicator displays in red Then increase the reference level The measurement for each symbol continues To stop data acquisition press START STOP ROLL key again For details on the view menus refer to page 2 63 and below WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual
348. then averaged for the specified number of slots The Pass Fail test is done for the averaged spectrum in comparison with the specified line in the GSM standard Spectrum SW The analyzer measures ACP Adjacent Channel Leakage Power for a switching transient spectrum according to the GSM 11 20 2 1 6 5 2 standard The spectra of bursts are calculated with the 30 kHz RBW Gaussian filter and then peak held for the specified number of slots The Pass Fail test is done for the peak held spectrum in comparison with the specified line in the GSM standard 3 153 GSM Analysis Basic Operations This section shows the fundamental procedures for GSM analysis Selecting the GSM 1 Press the CONFIG MODE key Measurement Press the More side key twice 3 Press the GSM Measurement side key to configure the analyzer for the GSM measurement Default views are as follows View A GSMPolar view View B SymbolTable view View C EVM view View D GSM view For details on the view menus refer to Menu Functions on page 2 47 4 Press the VIEW D key to display the GSM view menu There are five selection items in the Measurement menu as described in the previous section Measurement Functions Refer to each section for the procedures as listed below Mod Accuracy page 3 155 OutputPower page 3 156 PowerVSTime page 3 157 Spectrum MOD page 3 158 Spectrum SW page 3 160 If you want to analyze data on a file refer to Analyzing File Da
349. ting is 26 bits m If you set the length greater than the sync word that you have entered the remaining lower bits are set to 0 m If you set the length less than the sync word that you have entered the remaining lower bits are ignored 8 Press the VIEW D key and perform measurement The analyzer acquires data searching for the sync word If the sync word is found waveforms and measurement results are displayed on screen Although Syne Word Search and Differential Encoding are set to Off by default in the Syne Word menu the analyzer always turns them On for the GSM measurement NOTE The sync word is reset to TSCO default when you change the measure ment item with the Measurement side key in the GSM view menu 3 164 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CCDF Analysis This chapter describes the CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function analysis functions The following topics are discussed m About CCDF analysis m Operating examples WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 165 CCDF Analysis About CCDF Analysis CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function represents the probability that the peak power above average power of input signals exceeds a threshold The analyzer displays the ratio of peak power to average power along the horizontal axis and the probability that the ratio is exceeded along the vertical axis The CCDF in conjunction with the real time analysis function allow you to
350. to Operating File Access Menu on page 3 178 Press OK side key 3 205 Outputting Waveform Data Outputting View Data in Text Format 3 206 Restrictions Output Format You can output acquired data as text data to a file or the Windows clipboard in order to generate a spreadsheet program and create a report transfer the data to other equipment and analyze the spectrum in detail or use it as test data for the next stage product The following views can output acquired data in the text format Waveform Analog FSK CDMAWaveform EVM 3gppACPView SymbolTable In the Waveform and CDMAWaveform views the data must be acquired with span lt 50 MHz The following is an example of spectrum data output to a file The left column contains the data along the horizontal axis and the right column contains the data along the vertical axis They are separated by a tab character 10 1942459427812 8125E 8 15 5797318785542 5625E 7 15 9940859783336 34375E 7 15 5557856085716 125E 7 15 9780353894513 90625E 7 15 7083613241091 6875E 7 15 7874987521482 46875E 7 15 7419274821247 lt 2 5E 7 16 2202259114158 03125E 7 15 618887152088 NOOB WWDNY FN CO The units of measure of the vertical and horizontal axes data is what is currently displayed on screen The number of data points output to the file or the clipboard equals the currently set number of FFT points in the time domain or the number of bins in the frequency dom
351. top to the analyzer view do this step From the task bar select Start gt Program gt WCA to start the analyzer system program Print Perform the following procedure to make a hardcopy 1 With signal acquisition at a stop press the PRINT key on the front panel The Print menu appears on the screen 2 Press the Printer side key to select the printer If you use the optional HP970Cxi printer select HP DeskJet 970 Series 3 Press the Print To Printer side key to transfer the whole screen image data to the printer If you want to cancel the print press the Cancel side key to back to the previous menu If you have not set the default printer yet the analyzer displays the message Default Printer Not Found in red in the uppermost status display area on the screen This message also appear when no printer driver is installed If the printer is disconnected or turned off the printer driver prompts you to correct the problem 3 204 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Outputting Waveform Data Outputting the Hardcopy A screen image can also be output as a bit map file to a hard disk or floppy disk to a Disk You can use it for use with desktop publishing DTP software to create a report 1 2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Press the PRINT key on the front panel Press the Save To File BMP side key The directory and file listings appear Select an existing file or create a new file For details refer
352. torial Changing Hardware Settings In this section you learn how to make changes to the hardware settings through the SETUP menu For the previous views the default center frequency and span settings were used for measurement You can change the center frequency and span using the keys in the SETUP area and the SETUP menu Changing the Center The center frequency is initially set to the default value 1 5 GHz Change it to Frequency 800 MHz 1 Press the FREQ key in the SETUP area see Figure 2 28 SETUP area gt MAIN FREQ SETUP FREQ key gt SPAN CONFIG MODE Figure 2 28 SETUP FREQ key location The Freq Span Ref submenu is displayed in the menu display area Note that numeric input in the Freq menu item is already available for adjustment See Figure 2 29 2 28 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Tutorial Freq Hz A Indicates that the menu item is currently selected and the lt general purpose knob A and W keys of the numeric key y pad are available XXX s Numeric input field Figure 2 29 Freq side menu item available for numeric input 2 Input the new center frequency 800 MHz In the ENTRY area press the key 8 0 0 MHz s in order NOTE When you input 800 MHz in this state the display returns to
353. ttable Enabled Normal Scalar 4 Optionally set Disabled RF Frequency Optionally set Disabled WCA330 Dual Optionally set Disabled RF1 to RF4 Zoom Consecutive not settable Enabled WCA380 Scalar 4 Optionally set Disabled Dual Optionally set F Disabled F 30 MHz Consecutive not settable Enabled Consecutive not settable Enabled 2 Fand T represent the frequency and time domain data respectively lQ 30 MHz 1 Maximum span per frame i 5 MHz Consecutive not settable Enabled i i 3 The number of FFT points is 1024 When it is 256 the maximum span is 5 MHz 4 The mode is switched to Scalar by setting the span to 10 MHz or larger 5 1 GHz when the input band is RF2 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 7 Input and Memory Modes 3 8 The RF mode is switched to the Scalar mode when you set the span to 1OMHz or higher If you set the span to 6 MHz or lower the original settings are restored and display resumes NOTE The data disappears if you set the data memory mode to Dual or Zoom to display time domain data in a view Usually you observe signals using the Scalar mode in which a wide span is used When you want to observe detailed phenomena around a particular center frequency you can use the Dual or Frequency mode Use the Zoom mode to examine phenomena in the frequency domain in more detail Scalar mode m Acquires signals in
354. ttings W CDMA Selects the W CDMA standard with the chip rate of 3 84 Mcpc Sets the modulating system chip rate filter and a BT manually Modulation Selects the modulating system required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal W CDMA Selects the W CDMA system Chip Rate Inputs the chip rate required to demodulate the digitally modulated signals Measurement Selects the filter required to demodulate the digitally modulated signal You can select either Filter None no filter or RootRaisedCosine Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Reference Selects None no filter RaisedCosine or Gaussian for the filter required to create reference Filter data Refer to Processing Flow on page 3 98 for detail Alpha BT Inputs the a BT value The range is 0 0001 to 1 Auto Carrier Determines whether to search the carrier automatically Same as Auto Carrier in the Polar view menu on page 2 77 Symbol Constellation Specifies how to display the constellation On Displays the constellation for one short code Off Displays the constellation for all signals 2 104 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 26 3gppPolar view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Options Scrambling Determines whether or not to search for the scrambling code to analyze the down link signal Code Search On default Searches for the scrambling code to analyz
355. u 3 178 Directory and file listings in the file access menu 3 178 File operation menu cece cece ee ee eee 3 179 Copying a file voces ss cscs cee Geese ce ee sis wees eee 3 181 Data file structure ccc cece eee c eee 3 184 Frame padding 5 00060seccs esse ceteessseess 3 187 Data block structure 0 cc cece cece eee 3 189 Mouse and keyboard connectors e000 3 195 Displaying the Windows 98 accessory menu 3 197 10 100 BASE T connector location rear panel 3 199 Setting for sharing a folder ee eeeee 3 200 Parallel port location rear panel 3 202 Installing the printer driver 500 3 203 Pasting text data of the spectrum 3 207 Creating a graph from the text data in Excel 3 208 Date Time Properties dialog box 3 209 Displaying the version and self test result view of upper left COPMEN 6 6550 eove ies ocd edc a one 2s i csod otie serto la wl 3 211 Figure E 1 Front panel interface for mouse operations E 1 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Table of Contents Figure E 2 Correspondence between front panel interface buttons and front panel keys cece ccc c cece ccc ceeesececees E 4 Figure E 3 Operating the side menu top level item E 5 Figure E 4 Operating the side menu 7 items in lower level E 6 Figure E 5
356. u table 2 72 Spurious CDMA analysis 3 116 Standard accessories A 2 STANDBY LED indicator front panel 2 2 Start acquisition 3 23 START STOP keys front panel 2 3 Status display 2 7 Status display area screen 2 5 Step keys front panel 2 3 Stop acquisition 3 23 Symbol table display 3 105 SymbolTable view menu table 2 80 Sync word entry 3 163 T Targets of the product 1 3 Technical support contact information xxi Tektronix contacting xxi Text format outputting spectrum data 3 206 Time resolution D 1 Time characteristics CDMA analysis 3 122 Timeout trigger mode 3 67 Trigger count 3 70 description 3 65 domain 3 73 mask pattern 3 75 mode 3 66 position 3 74 setting 3 66 slope 3 73 source 3 73 TRIGGERED status display 2 8 Trouble installation 1 17 Tutorial 2 19 Index 6 Two view display 3 34 U UNCAL status display 2 8 Unpacking installation 1 9 URL Tektronix xxi V VECTOR status display 2 8 Vector display 3 102 Version display 3 211 VGA output port rear panel 2 4 View general display information 2 6 link 3 40 setting 3 32 VIEW area front panel 2 3 View display area screen 2 5 W Waterfall view menu table 2 75 Waveform view menu table 2 63 W CDMA analysis 3 135 Web site address Tektronix xxi Wide IQ balance calibration 1 21 Wide IQ full calibration 1 22 Wide mode description 3 4
357. ude 10 Ln i i q q Ln 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel dBm For the IQ file the amplitude is calculated using i and q with this formula Amplitude 10 Ln i i q q 1 lt lt DataShift amp OxF 2 Ln 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel dBm Phase For the APT or AP file the phase is calculated using p with this formula Phase p 128 degree For the IQT or IQ file the phase is calculated using 7 and g with this formula Phase atan2 q i 180 pi degree IQ For the IQT file I and Q are calculated with this formula IQScale Sqrt Power 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel 10 20 2 IT 1 IQScale V Q q IQScale V For the IQ file I and Q are calculated with this formula IQScale Sqrt Power 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel 10 20 2 I i 1 lt lt DataShift IQScale V Q q 1 lt lt DataShift IQScale V WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 193 File Operations Correction Data Block 3 194 The correction data block contains gain and phase correction data as one frame in the frequency domain When this block is added the amplitude and phase are calculated with the following formula Be careful about the sign for phase correction Amplitude Original data Gain correction data 128 dBm Phase Original data Phase correction data 128 degree WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual eee Using Windows 98 The analyzer operates under Windows 98 You can switch to a Windows 98 de
358. ue in the file header was proper 1 indicates that the MaxInputLevel value in the file header was too low 3 190 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual File Operations short lastFrame The analyzer can divide its memory such as 100 frames Xx 40 blocks lastFrame indicates the last frame in a block 0 indicates that the frame is not the last in the block 1 indicates that the frame is the last in the block unsigned long ticks Shows a time stamp with the unit time of UnitPeriod in the file header not FramePeriod Frame Data A frame contains either pairs of amplitude and phase data or pairs of I and Q data In the case of amplitude data only the format is the same as in the case of pairs The frame size depends on Bins in the file header or bins in the frame header as listed in Table 3 22 Table 3 22 Frame size Value of Bins 121 161 201 481 501 641 751 801 Number of data per frame 256 bins per frame 1024 bins per frame Order of Bins The frequency domain data line from the center frequency data and dummy data are inserted as given in Table 3 23 Table 3 23 Order of bins in frequency domain Number of bins Order of bins 121 60 61 62 118 119 120 lt 135 dummy data gt 0 1 2 57 58 59 161 80 81 82 158 159 160 lt 95 dummy data gt 0 1 2 77 78 79 201 100 101 102 198 199 200 lt 55 dummy data gt 0 1 2 97 98 99 481 240 241 242 478 4
359. uency Sets the center frequency for zoom This value must be within the frequency range of the acquired data You can also set the central frequency using the Option gt Marker gt Mkr gt Freq side key in the view menus shown in page 2 63 and the subsequent pages Mag Selects the expansion factor 5 MHz span 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 Other than 5 MHz span 2 4 10 20 40 100 200 400 1000 Execute Executes zoom You can repeat execution while changing the above settings 2 58 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions SETUP CDMA Menu When you select CDMA with CONFIG SETUP gt Setup pressing the SETUP MAIN key displays the menu shown in Table 2 5 Use this menu to set input mode frequency reference level trigger FFT and other parameters Table 2 5 SETUP CDMA menu table Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Freq Span Sets a standard channel span and reference level The channel span and reference level can be accessed Ref directly using the SETUP FREQ SPAN and REF keys respectively NOTE When you change modes from Baseband to RF IQ or Wide or vice versa these setting will be changed to the defaults Standard Selects either the IS 95 or T 53 standard Channel Selects a channel number to set the measurement frequency The frequency specified here becomes the center frequency for the 5 MHz span setting but not for the 30 MHz span IS 95 or 50 MHz span T 53 For IS 95 you can
360. uisition press the ROLL key in the Roll mode or BLOCK key in the Block mode again WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 171 Auto Save Function Loading the Data 3 172 In the Roll mode the data is output to the specified file each time the specified number of frames have been captured Suppose that you have specified 600 frames in the Save Frames menu item in the view One file is created each time 600 frames have been captured in this case See Figure 3 92 View C Roll Save Status RollSave BlockSave C PROGRAM FILES SONY TEKTRONIX WJCa BIN RollSave Ii C Users PROJ E RO1 1I0 13 20 24 600 13 21 7 600 13 21 50 600 13 22 32 600 13 23 15 600 13 23 57 600 13 24 15 259 Stop 13 25 1 600 13 25 44 600 26 600 10 13 27 93 600 11 13 27 51 600 12 13 28 34 600 13 13 29 16 600 JaN BUN BeO wo H w N a Figure 3 92 Automatic data storage in the Roll mode In the Block mode the data is output to the specified file each time one block is been captured Suppose that you select SETUP Trigger Count and turn on the trigger count and select SETUP Trigger Times to set the count value to 4 The following four or eight files are created in this case BO10 1Q B010 IQT BO11 1Q B011 IQT BO12 1Q B012 1QT BO13 1Q B013 IQT Refer to Load on page 3 176 If the IQT formatted file exists it is also read auto
361. ult If necessary set the SymbolTable or EVM view instead of the Waveform or Spectrogram view For example define Views A to D as EVM Format EVM EVM Format Phase Error Polar and EyeDiagram respectively a Press the CONFIG VIEW key b Press the View A side key and select EVM c Press the View B side key and select EVM Select the format in each EVM view The format of the EVM view is EVM by default Change the format of View B d Press the VIEW B key and then the VIEW MAIN key e Press the Format side key to select Phase Error 3 Set a proper frequency and span refer to page 3 9 The analyzer requires the proper span to recognize the digital modulation and display the signal Set the span as close to the bandwidth as possible and fine tune it WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal 4 Select the modulating system or set the modulation parameters a Press the VIEW C key to select the Polar view Select the modulating system b C Select the Standard side key Press the appropriate side key to select the modulating system Refer to Supported Modulation Systems on page 3 98 Press the View C lt side key top side key to return to the previous menu level If you set the modulation parameters manually do the following steps j Press the Manual Setup side key Press the Modulation side key to select the modulating signal Press
362. urce The digitally modulated signal demodulated in the Polar view is written into the register pair To display the spectrum of a demodulated digitally modulated signal use a register pair as the input signal For demodulation of digitally modulated signals refer to Display and Analysis of a Digitally Modulated Signal on page 3 97 File 1Q Specifies the Q formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 File AP Specifies the AP formatted data file for the input source On accessing files refer to File Access Menu on page 2 119 Format Selects the signal modulation method With the built in demodulator the analyzer can display the demodulated signal AM Demodulates the amplitude modulated signal Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis Modulating factor PM Demodulates the phase modulated signal Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis Phase FM Demodulates the frequency modulated signal Horizontal axis Time Vertical axis Frequency Frame Specifies the number of the frame to be displayed By default it is set to frame 0 into which the current data is written WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 69 Menu Functions Table 2 8 Analog view menu table cont Top level Options 2 70 Subordinate level options and descriptions Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Same as Display Lines in the Waveform view m
363. ursor Left Right SO Bandwidth Figure 3 48 Power measurement band power marker 3 90 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Power Measurement Determine the right and left cursor positions 1 Input the frequency position of the right cursor in the Options Scale Marker Search Marker Band Power Markers 2 Press the Right side key and input the right cursor position 3 Press the Left side key and input the left cursor position ACP Measurement There are three band power markers The Upper Center and Lower band power markers are used to obtain the power proportion of the upper and lower adjacent frequency channels to the carrier signal See Figure 3 49 The band power markers are set with the following three parameters m Carrier frequency Fe m Bandwidth Bw m Channel spacing Sp Lower band Center band Upper band power marker power marker power marker Fc Sp Fe Fc Sp Se f aes Channel space Sp Channel space Sp _ gt _ _ gt _ gt Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bw Bw Bw Figure 3 49 ACP measurement band power marker WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 91 Power Measurement 3 92 Determine these parameters using the following procedure 1 From the view menu select Options Scale Marker Search Marker Measurement ACP Press the ACP side key to display the band power marker submenu Press the Center Lock side
364. us the measurement may be disabled because no trigger can be generated If you do not know whether a continuous or burst signal is input first select 5M Span Auto Trig If the display condition is unstable select 5M Span Normal Trig because a burst signal is a high probability Press the BLOCK key to initiate the measurement The signal is displayed in each view together with the measurement values WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual CDMA Analysis Setting RBW to 1 MHz Measure Power and OBW with View A at a resolution bandwidth RBW of 1 MHz 1 Press the key VIEW A gt VIEW MAIN 2 Press the side key RBW RBW and select 1M Switching the error display to Mag or Phase Error Switch the error display in View D to Mag Error or Phase Error 1 Press the key VIEW D gt VIEW MAIN 2 Press the Format side key to select either Mag Error or Phase Error 3 If necessary press the side key Options Scale Marker Search Scale Auto Scale to adjust the scale WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 115 CDMA Analysis Evaluation of Spurious 3 116 Figure 3 60 shows the two views that display the in band analysis results with the Spurious basic configuration Examine the spurious of the external area View A Active 97 11 25 20 14 46 Marker 848 622 SMHz 73 792dBm o Po 5 10 dB div EA 0 y T Gc Rc Sc 100 ABm Center 837 5MHz View B Active 97 11 25 20 14 46 Marker 848 622 SMHz 59 10
365. vent with the time and amplitude level Figure 3 41 shows an example of a trigger mask pattern It contains blue and achromatic areas shown in white on the screen When the spectrum exceeds a boundary between two types of areas this causes the trigger You can create a mask pattern by operating the marker in the spectrum display The pattern you create is saved in the internal trigger register Refer to Trigger on page 3 65 for other trigger settings Figure 3 41 Example of a trigger mask pattern WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 75 Creating a Trigger Mask Pattern Hints for Creating a Mask Pattern m You can create a mask pattern only in the Waveform view You can cause the trigger in a two dimensional space of the frequency or time and amplitude so you have to select the format as follows VIEW A for example gt VIEW Main Format FreqAmpl or TimeAmpl m You have to acquire a waveform with appropriate frequency span and reference level settings before creating a mask pattern m The trigger mask pattern contains blue and achromatic areas You can set the trigger with SETUP MAIN gt Trigger Slope as follows Rise The trigger occurs when the spectrum enters the achromatic area from the blue area Fall The trigger occurs when the spectrum enters the blue area from the achromatic area m The trigger register has areas to store both the time and frequency domain mask pattern
366. vertical axis to the default full scale Marker Operates the marker and the delta marker The marker is represented as The delta marker is represented as and lt gt For how to use the markers refer to page 3 45 Hor Ver Specifies the horizontal position to which you move By default O is positioned at the start point of the horizontal axis Specifies the vertical position i e the frame number to which you move O By default the marker is positioned in frame 0 Delta Marker Turns the delta marker on or off Toggle Delta Changes the and marker positions each other Mkr gt Freq Sets the center frequency to the value at the current marker position When you press this side key the Freq Span Ref gt Freq setting in the SETUP menu changes to the frequency at the current marker position WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 10 Spectrogram view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Searches for the peak spectrum and places the marker there You can specify the frame by moving the marker vertically Peak Searches the peak spectrum and moves the O marker there Rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to search the peak rightward and vice versa Max Searches for the maximum peak spectrum and moves the O marker there
367. view Same as Source in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 NOTE Use the default setting Active for the GSM measurement Specifies the number of the frame to display Same as Frame in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 NOTE Use the default setting 0 for the GSM measurement Configures the analyzer according to the standard digital modulating system settings GSM Configures the analyzer according to GSM Global System for Mobile Communication Sets the modulating system symbol rate filter and a BT manually For the menu items refer to Manual Setup in the Polar view menu on page 2 76 NOTE Use the following default settings for the GSM measurement Modulation GMSK Symbol Rate 270 833 K Measurement Filter None Reference Filter Gaussian Alpha BT 0 3 Auto Carrier On Burst 2 108 Sets the burst search parameters Same as Burst in the Polar view menu on page 2 77 NOTE Use the following default settings for the GSM measurement Number Frames 1 Search Off Block Size 4 Peak Threshold 40 Threshold 20 dB Offset 0 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 28 GSMPolar view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Sync Word Specifies the sync word For details on entering the sync word refer to page 3 163 Sync Word Search Differential Encoding Determines whether or not to search the sync word It defaults to Off However for the GSM measurem
368. view has basically the same functions as the Polar view except for the 3GPP compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 104 3gppPower This view has basically the same functions as the Waveform view except for the 3GPP compliant analysis functions For detailed settings refer to page 2 106 GSM related view GSM Controls the measurements under the GSM Global System for Mobile Communication For detailed settings refer to page 3 151 CCDF related view CCDF Performs Complementary Cumulative Distribution Functions CCDF measurements For detailed settings refer to page 2 112 CCDFView Displays the measurement results of the CCDF view described above For detailed settings refer to page 2 114 Auto save related view AutoSave Performs the auto save function that acquires data while storing it to a file For detailed settings refer to page 2 115 Script related view Script The analyzer supports the scripting language You can create a script program to add and customize side keys or automate measurement For details refer to the Programmer Manual 2 52 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Menu Functions Table 2 3 CONFIG menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Options Configures screens and sets up background colors and marker link Style Selects a view layout in the screen For how to display data refer to Displaying Waveform Data on page 3 31
369. w G menu View G is the back screen of View C Press the Calculate side key Set the CCDF calculation range using the Begin Frame and End Frame side keys The unit frame period is as follows W CDMA 50 us for 10 MHz span 25 us for 20 or 30 MHz span cdmaOne 160 us for 5 MHz span Press Execute side key to start the process The results are shown in View G and H see Figure 3 89 and 3 90 Press the VIEW D key one or two times depending on the settings to display the View H menu View H is the back screen of View D Press VIEW SCALE key The side keys are displayed to set the horizontal and vertical scales The maximum value on the horizontal axis displayed by default is the crest factor When you replace View G or H with View C or D press the VIEW C or D key one or two times depending on the settings For details on the CCDF and CCDFView menus refer to page 2 112 and 2 114 respectively WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 167 CCDF Analysis 3 168 Data source Date and time at data acquisition end point View G Active CCDF 99 03 10 11 06 39 Measurement values at gt Marker SOus 30 268dBm marker position 10 Crest Factor 11 916aB Crest factor from the left dBm Peak 1 446dBm e Time Average 13 363dBrer Power The time is zero at data acquisition end point Peak power level within the measurement range Average power level within the measurement rang
370. wer On Return To Defaults in order The analyzer will start with the factory default from the next power on WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 121 Menu Functions 2 122 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Reference eee Input and Memory Modes There are several input frequency bands RF for WCA330 RF1 to RF4 for WCA380 Baseband and IQ There are three intermediate frequency IF modes Normal HiRes and Wide There are four modes in which data is written into memory Scalar Frequency Dual and Zoom When you configure the analyzer you must begin with modes When you change modes most old settings are replaced with the defaults This section explains the function of each mode and how to set them WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 1 Input and Memory Modes Selecting the Input Frequency Band Figure 3 1 shows a rough signal process flow from inputting a signal to writing it into data memory You can select the frequency range of input signals using SETUP MAIN gt Band Table 3 1 shows the frequency ranges 3 GHz 8 GHz Data memory Input down converter gt a signal nalog process Time domain P pe gt Display Frequency domain gt Display FFT process gt data Figure 3 1 Signal process flow Table 3 1 Input frequency band Band Frequency range Baseband 0 to 10 MHz RF WCA330 10 MHz to 3 GHz IF mode Normal HiRes RF1 WCA380
371. xponential RMS root mean square This mode decreases the influence of the older data exponentially Performs averaging with RMS root mean square MaxHold Holds the maximum value MinHold Holds the minimum value Num Averages Specifies the number of symbols to be averaged The range is 1 to 10 If Average Type is set to RMS frames specified with Num Averages are averaged before switching to a fixed display If Average Type is set to RMSExpo Num Averages is used for weighing old data Refer to page 3 57 for details on averaging Symbol Specifies the number of the symbol to be displayed The default is symbol 0 which contains the latest data This menu item is displayed only when Average is Off Options Y Axis Selects relative or absolute representation for the vertical axis Relative Represents relative channel power to the total power along the vertical axis Absolute Represents absolute channel power along the vertical axis Display Lines Controls the horizontal and vertical line markers Same as Display Lines in the Waveform view menu on page 2 65 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 93 Menu Functions Table 2 21 CodePower view menu table cont Top level Subordinate level options and descriptions Scale Marker Sets up the horizontal and vertical axes Search Hor Scale Sets the horizontal axis scale Hor Start Sets the horizontal axis start value Ver Scale Sets the vertical
372. y Auto Scale sets the vertical scale to show the whole waveform Full Scale resets the vertical scale to the default full scale You can change the scale for each axis manually 1 Select a view For example when you select View B press the VIEW B key 2 Press the VIEW SCALE key to display the Scale submenu Use the side keys shown in Figure 3 21 to set up the scale for each axis Vertical axis Start values Vertical axis Set with Ver Start Horizontal axis Set with Hor Start Color axis Set with Color Start Set with Ver Scale x Set with Color Scale Set with Hor Scale AO Figure 3 21 Setting scales Color axis Horizontal axis View direction WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Displaying Waveform Data Setting Special Scales For the EyeDiagram Spectrogram and Waterfall views consider the following In the EyeDiagram view the horizontal axis represents time indicating a symbol length You must set Eye Length in the view menu to a multiple of a symbol length time In the Spectrogram view the vertical axis represents frame numbers The vertical scale is set to the following basic number of frames One view display 660 Two view display 308 Four view display 1 x 4 132 Four view display 2 x 2 308 You can set Ver Scale in the view menu to a multiple of the basic number of frames Stop acquiring data before you can change scales Even if you have changed a scale once data a
373. y on page 3 106 for details of the above information The green trace represents the EVM between the ideal and measured signals The red points represent symbols of the measured signal The display can be switched to Mag Error or Phase Error WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 3 113 CDMA Analysis Measurement Procedure 3 114 1 5 Press CONFIG MODE More gt CDMA IS 95 T 53 and select EVM Rho to set the analyzer with the basic configuration Press the SETUP MAIN key Select the channel as necessary a Press the Freq Span Ref side key b Press the Standard side key to select IS 95 or T53 c Press the Channel side key to select or type the channel number For IS 95 you can select 1 to 777 for the channel number Channels 1 and 7 correspond to 825 03 and 848 31 MHz respectively The frequency difference between two adjacent channels is 0 03 MHz For T 53 you can select 1 to 1199 for the channel number Channels 1 and 7 correspond to 915 0125 and 888 9875 MHz respectively The frequency difference between two adjacent channels is 0 0125 MHz d Press the Setup lt side key top side key to return to the previous menu level Select the relationship between the span and the trigger For a continuous input signal press the 5M Span Auto Trig side key For a burst input signal press the 5M Span Normal Trig side key If you select 5M Span Normal Trig although the input signal is continu o
374. y the menu associated J with the currently selected menu Used to display the associated view submenu Used to display the top level view menu Figure 2 11 VIEW keys For example to use the markers for View B do these steps to display the marker submenu 1 Press the B key 2 Press the MKR key Refer to page 2 63 and below for details on the VIEW menus Refer to page 3 31 for how to display data WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 13 Menu Operations Menu Item Information E Each menu displayed may include up to eight menu items associated with the side keys on the right side of the display The menu item displayed at the top of the eight menu items displays two or three items of information as shown in Figures 2 12 and 2 13 You can use the top menu item to return to the upper level within the menu hierarchy You can return to the top level menu display by pressing the side key to the right of the display once or twice If you are at the top level of a menu the system displays information as shown in the upper illustration in Figure 2 12 If you are at a submenu the system displays information as shown in the lower illustration Setup A Indicates that you are at the top level of the currently selected menu Setup TO Name of the menu in display Displays nothing Setup lt lt Indicates that you can move up one level by pre
375. ypad The selected item is immediately reflected in the analyzer settings or views To cancel the selection press the CLEAR key in the keypad If the setting field is blue even if the drop down list is not displayed the general purpose knob and the amp and keys are available for selection In this case the selection is established without pressing the side key after selection Numeric Input Use the following procedures to input a numeric value 1 Press the associated side key The menu item changes to the display as shown in Figure 2 16 below Freq Hz 4l Indicates that the menu item is currently selected and the general purpose knob and the amp and keys are available XXX Numeric input field Figure 2 16 Side menu item for numeric setting 2 To change the numeric value you can type in the new value or increase or decrease the current value Numeric Input Input the new value using the following procedure Use the ENTRY area keys in the keypad a Type a value with the numeric keys You can delete a digit using the BS or a selection with the CLEAR key b Press the unit key to establish the input The new values are immediately reflected in the analyzer settings or views WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual 2 17 Menu Operations Increase Decrease Increase or decrease the displayed value using the following procedure c Use Step keys to the left of the general purpose kn
376. ys Figure E 2 shows the corresponding front panel interface buttons and the front panel keys For details on the operation refer to Menu Operations on page 2 11 SETUP VIEW MAIN FREQ SPAN REF alse Re ROLL MAIN SCALE MKR SRCH e MODE SETUP VIEW UTIL E 7 0 18 BLOCK Keypad functions can be completed with the keyboard Refer to Operations with Keyboard on page E 9 Figure E 2 Correspondence between front panel interface buttons and front panel keys E 4 WCA330 amp WCA380 User Manual Appendix E Mouse Operations Operating the Side Menu Figures E 3 and E 4 summarize the side menu operations The front panel keys and knob and the side keys also work while you are operating the mouse However the side keys are no longer associated with the menu on the screen For details on the operation refer to Menu Operations on page 2 11 Setup 4 Indicates that the top level menu is currently displayed Setup lt Currently displayed menu name F Displays nothing Even when you click this kind of menu item no function executes Operate with lower 7 menu items displayed To change the menu use the CONFIG SETUP VIEW or PRINT keys on the front panel interface or click a part of the displayed window which is described in Selecting the CONFIG SETUP or VIEW Menu on
377. yzer makes frequency domain data files and time domain data files T is added to the end of frequency domain file name simultaneously The data file normally consists of three blocks see Figure 3 97 Data file AP 1Q File header text format Data block binary format Correction data block binary format Figure 3 97 Data file structure When logging data continuously a data block is added every data acquisition and the date and time are added to the end of data file in the text format The data file is normally made after a data acquisition completes When logging data the analyzer acquires data and adds the data block to the file repeatedly So at the time the analyzer creates the file header it does not know when it will acquire the last frame Therefore the analyzer adds the date and time to the end of file when the logging completes Check if the date and time are added If so use them instead of DateTime in the file header Refer to DateTime on page 3 188 for the format of date and time Also when logging data the analyzer does not know the number of valid frames ValidFrames refer to page 3 188 at the time it creates the file header Then the analyzer writes ValidFrames 0 supposedly Check the value of ValidFrames in the file header If it is zero obtain the true value by investigating the file size In this case Correction data block is always added The details on each block are d

User Manual WCA330 & WCA380 3GHz & 8GHz Wireless

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual WCA330 &amp; WCA380 3GHz &amp; 8GHz Wireless

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual WCA330 & WCA380 3GHz & 8GHz Wireless